User’s Guide
Shop online at
omega.com
e-mail: [email protected]
For latest product manuals:
omegamanual.info
RD100B
Programmable Recorder
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Foreword
Thank you for purchasing the OMEGA RD100B Recorder.
This manual describes the functions (excluding the communication functions), installation
and wiring procedures, operating procedures, and lists the handling precautions of the
RD100B Recorder. To ensure correct use, please read this manual thoroughly before
beginning operation.
The following three manuals including this manual are available for the RD100B
Recorder.
• Electronic Manuals Provided on the Accompanying CD-ROM
Manual Title
Manual No.
Description
RD100B Recorder
User’s Guide
M-4231
This manual.
RD100B/RD1800B
Communication Interface
User’s Manual
M-4233
Explains the communication functions of the
RD100B Recorder using Ethernet interface and
the RS-422A/485 communication interface.
• Paper Manual
Manual Title
Manual No.
Description
RD100B Recorder
Operation Guide
M-4232
Explains concisely the operations of the
RD100B Recorder.
Notes
•
•
The contents of this manual are subject to change without prior notice as a result of
continuing improvements to the instrument’s performance and functions.
Every effort has been made in the preparation of this manual to ensure the accuracy
of its contents. However, should you have any questions or find any errors, please
contact OMEGA.
•
•
Copying or reproducing all or any part of the contents of this manual without
permission is strictly prohibited.
The TCP/IP software of this product and the document concerning the TCP/IP
software have been developed/created based on the BSD Networking Software,
Release 1 that has been licensed from the University of California.
Trademarks
•
Microsoft, MS-DOS, Windows, Windows NT, and Windows XP are either registered
trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other
countries.
•
•
Adobe, Acrobat, and PostScript are trademarks of Adobe Systems incorporated.
For purposes of this manual, the TM and ® symbols do not accompany their
respective trademark names or registered trademark names.
Company and product names that appear in this manual are trademarks or registered
trademarks of their respective holders.
•
Revisions
1st Edition
2nd Edition
3rd Edition
December 2004
March 2005
August 2005
i
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recorder’s Version and Functions Described in This
Manual
The contents of this manual corresponds to the recorder with version 1.11.
RD100B Versions and Functions
Version
Suffix Code Added or Modified Functions
Reference
–
1.02 or earlier –
–
1.11
–
–
(Added)
(Added)
The printout/display format of the date can be changed.
Section 7.19
Key operation to move the printer carriage near the center Section 3.4
position so that the ribbon cassette can be replaced with
the power turned ON (dot model)
–
–
(Changed) Selectable range of alarm values during linear scaling
(including 1-5V and SQRT) is –5% to 105% of the scale
span.
Section 5.2
(Changed) Specify the date/time for switching DST and standard time Sections 5.5
by the month, the nth day of the week of that month, and
and 6.13
time.
/C3
/C7
(Added)
Modbus slave protocol
Two-wire system
Communication
manual
(Changed) Users with the same user name cannot be registered.
Communication
manual
•
Checking the Version Number
You can check the version number on the System display.
The System display cannot be shown at the factory default condition.
First, register the System display to the display screen.
•
•
Procedure of registering the System display to the display screen: See section 8.2.
Procedure of displaying the System display: The screen switches each time the
key is pressed. Press the
DISP
DISP
key repeatedly until System display is shown. The displayed contents on the System display switches every 3
seconds. Check the number shown by the “Version:” item.
Software (Sold Separately)
The RD100B Configuration Software cannot set the new functions (indicated above) available on RD100B
version 1.11. The new functions are planned to be supported on the configuration software to be released after
November 2005.
ii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety Precautions
The general safety precautions described here must be observed during all phases of operation.
Safety Standards and EMC Standards
This recorder conforms to IEC safety class I (provided with terminal for protective grounding), Installation Category
II, Measurement Category II (CAT II), and EN61326-1 (EMC standard), class A (use in a commercial, industrial, or
business environment). This recorder is designed for indoor use.
About This Manual
•
•
•
This manual should be read by the end user.
Read this manual thoroughly and have a clear understanding of the product before operation.
This manual explains the functions of the product. OMEGA does not guarantee that the product will suit a
particular purpose of the user.
•
Under absolutely no circumstances may the contents of this manual be transcribed or copied, in part or in
whole, without permission.
•
•
The contents of this manual are subject to change without prior notice.
Every effort has been made in the preparation of this manual to ensure the accuracy of its contents. However,
should you have any questions or find any errors or omissions, please contact OMEGA.
Precautions Related to the Protection, Safety, and Alteration of the Product
•
The following safety symbols are used on the product and in this manual.
“Handle with care.” To avoid injury and damage to the instrument, the operator must refer to the
explanation in the manual.
Protective ground terminal
AC
“High temperature.” To avoid injury caused by hot surface, do not touch locations where this
symbol appears.
•
•
For the protection and safe use of the product and the system controlled by it, be sure to follow the instructions
and precautions on safety that are stated in this manual whenever you handle the product. Take special note
that if you handle the product in a manner that violate these instructions, the protection functionality of the
product may be damaged or impaired. In such cases, OMEGA does not guarantee the quality, performance,
function, and safety of the product.
When installing protection and/or safety circuits such as lightning protection devices and equipment for the
product and control system or designing or installing separate protection and/or safety circuits for fool-proof
design and fail-safe design of the processes and lines that use the product and the control system, the user
should implement these using additional devices and equipment.
•
•
If you are replacing parts or consumable items of the product, make sure to use parts specified by OMEGA.
This product is not designed or manufactured to be used in critical applications that directly affect or threaten
human lives. Such applications include nuclear power equipment, devices using radioactivity, railway facilities,
aviation equipment, air navigation facilities, aviation facilities, and medical equipment. If so used, it is the user’s
responsibility to include in the system additional equipment and devices that ensure personnel safety.
Do not modify this product.
•
iii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety Precautions
• Power Supply
WARNING
Ensure that the source voltage matches the voltage of the power supply before turning ON the power.
• Protective Grounding
Make sure to connect the protective grounding to prevent electric shock before turning ON the power.
• Necessity of Protective Grounding
Never cut off the internal or external protective earth wire or disconnect the wiring of the protective earth
terminal. Doing so invalidates the protective functions of the instrument and poses a potential shock
hazard.
• Defect of Protective Grounding
Do not operate the instrument if the protective earth or fuse might be defective. Make sure to check
them before operation.
• Do Not Operate in an Explosive Atmosphere
Do not operate the instrument in the presence of flammable liquids or vapors. Operation in such
environments constitutes a safety hazard.
• Do Not Remove Covers
The cover should be removed by OMEGA’s qualified personnel only. Opening the cover is dangerous,
because some areas inside the instrument have high voltages.
• External Connection
Connect the protective grounding before connecting to the item under measurement or to an external
control unit.
• Damage to the Protective Structure
Operating the recorder in a manner not described in this manual may damage its protective structure.
Exemption from Responsibility
•
OMEGA makes no warranties regarding the product except those stated in the WARRANTY that is provided
separately.
•
OMEGA assumes no liability to any party for any loss or damage, direct or indirect, caused by the user or any
unpredictable defect of the product.
Handling Precautions of the Software
•
OMEGA makes no warranties regarding the software accompanying this product except those stated in the
WARRANTY that is provided separately.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Use the software on a single PC.
You must purchase another copy of the software, if you are to use the software on another PC.
Copying the software for any purposes other than backup is strictly prohibited.
Please store the original media containing the software in a safe place.
Reverse engineering, such as decompiling of the software, is strictly prohibited.
No portion of the software supplied by OMEGA may be transferred, exchanged, sublet, or leased for use by any
third party without prior permission by OMEGA.
iv
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Checking the Contents of the Package
Unpack the box and check the contents before operating the recorder. If some of the
contents are not correct or missing or if there is physical damage, contact the dealer
from which you purchased them.
Checking the Model
A name plate is affixed to the recorder. Check that the model name and suffix code
given on the name plate on the rear panel match those on your order.
RD100B RECORDER
MODEL
SUFFIX
STYLE
R
C
US
LR99988
SUPPLY
FREQUENCY
NO.
N200
OMEGA
Made in China
MODEL and SUFFIX Code
Model
Suffix Code
Optional Code
Description
RD101B
RD102B
RD103B
RD104B
RD106B
RD100B 1 pen recorder
RD100B 2 pen recorder
RD100B 3 pen recorder
RD100B 4 pen recorder
RD100B 6 dot recorder
Japanese
-1
-2
English & deg F / DST
1
/A1
/A2
/A3
/C3
/C7
/F1
/H2
/H3
/M1
/N1
/N2
/N3
/R1
Alarm output relay 2 points
Alarm output relay 4 points
Alarm output relay 6 points
1
1, 2
3
RS-422A/485 interface
3
Ethernet (10BASE-T) interface
2
Fail/Chart end detection and output
4
Clamped input terminal
Non-glare door glass
Mathematical function
Cu10, Cu25 RTD input
4, 5
3 legs isolated RTD
6
Expansion inputs
Remote control 5 points
1
2
3
4
5
6
/A1, /A2, and /A3 cannot be specified simultaneously.
/A3 and /F1 cannot be specified simultaneously.
/C3 and /C7 cannot be specified simultaneously.
/H2 and /N2 cannot be specified simultaneously.
Valid only on the model 436106.
14 types of input including Pt50 RTD, PR40-20, and Platinel TC
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Checking the Contents of the Package
Standard Accessories
The standard accessories below are supplied with the recorder. Check that all contents
are present and undamaged.
Z-fold chart
paper
Ribbon
cassette
Disposable
felt pen
Plotter pen Mounting bracket
Manuals for the RD100B/RD1800B
(CD-ROM)
RD100B Recorder Operation Guide
M-4232
Item
Z-fold chart paper
1-Pen
2-Pen
3-Pen 4-Pen Dot Printing
1
-
1
-
1
-
1
-
1
1
-
Ribbon cassette
Red
1
-
1
1
-
1
1
1
-
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
Green
Blue
-
Disposable felt pen
-
-
Violet
Purple
-
-
-
Plotter pen
1
2
1
1
2
1
1
2
1
-
Mounting bracket
2
1
Manuals for the RD100B/RD1800B (CD-ROM)
RD100B Recorder Operation Guide
M-4232
1
1
1
1
1
Optional Accessories (Sold Separately)
The optional accessories below are available for purchase separately. If you make an
order, make sure that all contents are present and undamaged.
For information about ordering accessories, contact the dealer from which you
purchased the recorder.
Model
Item
Quantity
Note
10 pcs.
(Part Number
RD100-ZFP-10
RD100-RC
Z-fold chart paper
Ribbon cassette
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
Red
RD100A-01
3 pcs.
3 pcs.
3 pcs.
3 pcs.
3 pcs.
Green RD100A-02
Disposable felt pen
Blue
RD100A-03
RD100A-04
Violet
Plotter pen
Purple RD100A-11
B9900BX
415920
Mounting bracket
250 Ω 0.1%
100 Ω 0.1%
10 Ω 0.1%
250 Ω 0.1%
100 Ω 0.1%
10 Ω 0.1%
Shunt resistor
415921
for the screw terminal (standard)
415922
438920
Shunt resistor
438921
for the clamped input terminal (/H2)
438922
Software (Sold Separately)
Item
Note
Model
RD100B-SW1
RD100B-SW2
RD100B Configuration software
With interface unit
*
The new functions of the RD100B version 1.11 are planned to be supported on the
configuration software to be released after November 2005.
vi
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Checking the Contents of the Package
Removing the Packing Materials
Open the door, put your finger on the tab at the lower left of the display, and open the
display.
Tab on the display
Open
Display
Open
Remove all packing materials.
• Pen Model
Hinge
• Dot Model
Hinge
CAUTION
To protect the hinges, do not apply vertical force on the display.
vii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Use This Manual
This user’s guide consists of the following sections.
For details on communication functions, see the RD100B/RD1800B Communication
Interface User’s Manual on the CD-ROM.
Chapter Title and Description
1
Functional Description
Describes the functions of the RD100B Recorder. Refer to this chapter when you
are unsure of the details of the function that you are operating.
2
3
4
Before Using the Recorder
Describes the installation and wiring procedures.
Names of Parts and Run Operations
Describes the names of each part of the recorder and the daily operations.
Common Operations for Setting Functions and Setup Guide
Describes the execution modes of the recorder, basic setup operations using keys,
and provides a function setup guide.
5
6
Frequently Used Setup Operations (Setting Mode)
Describes how to change the input range, alarms, chart speed, etc.
Setup Operations for Convenient Functions (Setting Mode)
Describes the setup operations for convenient functions such as how to assign tags
to channels and how to set message strings that are to be printed.
7
Setup Operations for Changing/Adding Functions (Basic Setting Mode)
Describes the setup operations for changing or adding functions such as setting the
recorder to detect sensor burnouts and changing the contents that are printed on the
chart paper.
8
Setup Operations for Changing the Displayed Contents
Describes how to select the display type suitable for the application.
9
Operations Related to the Computation Function (/M1 Option)
Describes all operations related to the computation function.
10
11
Troubleshooting
Describes error message and troubleshooting measures of the RD100B Recorder.
Maintenance
Describes periodic inspection, calibration, pen adjustment/printer carriage
adjustment, and recommended replacement period for worn parts.
12
Specifications
Gives the specifications of the RD100B Recorder.
Appendix Describes the printout contents.
Index
Note
•
This user’s manual covers information regarding the recorders with English as the display/
recording language (suffix code “2”).
•
For the procedure of setting the display/recording language, see section 7.14, “Changing the
Display/Recording Language.”
viii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Use This Manual
1
2
Conventions Used in This Manual
Unit
K ........ Denotes 1024. Example: 768 KB (file size)
k ........ Denotes 1000.
Safety Markings
The following markings are used in this manual.
3
Improper handling or use can lead to injury to the user or
damage to the instrument. This symbol appears on the
instrument to indicate that the user must refer to the user’s
manual for special instructions. The same symbol appears in
the corresponding place in the user’s manual to identify those
instructions. In the manual, the symbol is used in conjunction
with the word “WARNING” or “CAUTION.”
4
5
Calls attention to actions or conditions that could cause serious
or fatal injury to the user, and precautions that can be taken to
prevent such occurrences.
WARNING
CAUTION
6
Calls attentions to actions or conditions that could cause light
injury to the user or damage to the instrument or user’s data,
and precautions that can be taken to prevent such occurrences.
7
Calls attention to information that is important for proper
operation of the instrument.
Note
8
Subheadings
On pages that describe the operating procedures in Chapter 3 through 9, the following
symbols are used to distinguish the procedures from their explanations.
Bold characters denote keys or character strings that are displayed on the screen.
Example: Range, Unit
9
10
11
12
App
Index
Follow the numbered steps. All procedures are written with
Procedure
inexperienced users in mind; depending on the operation, not
all steps need to be taken.
This subsection describes the setting parameters and the
Explanation
limitations on the procedures. It does not give a detailed
explanation of the function. For details on the function, see
chapter 1.
ix
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents
Foreword ......................................................................................................................................... i
Recorder’s Version and Functions Described in This Manual.........................................................ii
Safety Precautions ......................................................................................................................... iii
Checking the Contents of the Package .......................................................................................... v
How to Use This Manual .............................................................................................................. viii
Chapter 1 Functional Description
1.1
Overview of the Recorder ................................................................................................ 1-1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
Measuring Input Section ................................................................................................. 1-2
Alarms .............................................................................................................................. 1-7
Recording....................................................................................................................... 1-13
Display ........................................................................................................................... 1-22
Computation Function (/M1 Option) ............................................................................... 1-24
FAIL/Chart End Detection and Output Function (/F1 Option) ........................................ 1-27
Remote Control Function (/R1 Option) .......................................................................... 1-28
Other Functions ............................................................................................................. 1-30
Chapter 2 Before Using the Recorder
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
Handling Precautions ....................................................................................................... 2-1
Installation ........................................................................................................................ 2-2
Input Signal Wiring ........................................................................................................... 2-5
Optional Terminal Wiring .................................................................................................. 2-9
Power Supply Wiring...................................................................................................... 2-12
Turning ON/OFF the Power Switch................................................................................ 2-14
Chapter 3 Names of Parts and Run Operations
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
3.8
3.9
Names of Parts ................................................................................................................ 3-1
Installing or Replacing the Chart Paper ........................................................................... 3-4
Installing/Replacing Felt Pens or Plotter Pen (Pen Model) .............................................. 3-7
Installing/Replacing the Ribbon Cassette (Dot Model) .................................................... 3-9
Starting/Stopping the Recording .................................................................................... 3-11
Switching the Display Screen ........................................................................................ 3-12
Printing Measured Values (Manual Printout) ................................................................. 3-13
Printing the Recorder Settings ....................................................................................... 3-14
Clearing the Alarm PrinAtout Buffer ............................................................................... 3-15
3.10 Printing Messages ......................................................................................................... 3-16
3.11 Resetting the Report Data of the Periodic Printout ........................................................ 3-17
3.12 Releasing the Alarm Output (Alarm ACK Operation) ..................................................... 3-18
3.13 Activating/Releasing the Key Lock................................................................................. 3-19
Chapter 4 Common Operations for Setting Functions and Setup Guide
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
Run Modes....................................................................................................................... 4-1
Key Operations ................................................................................................................ 4-2
Menu Structure, Settings, and List of Default Values....................................................... 4-5
Function Setup Guide .................................................................................................... 4-13
Chapter 5 Frequently Used Setup Operations (Setting Mode)
5.1
5.2
5.3
Setting the Input Range ................................................................................................... 5-1
Setting the Alarm.............................................................................................................. 5-9
Setting the Unit on Scaled Channels ............................................................................. 5-12
x
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents
1
2
5.4
5.5
Changing the Chart Speed ............................................................................................ 5-13
Setting the Date/Time .................................................................................................... 5-14
Chapter 6 Setup Operations for Convenient Functions (Setting Mode)
6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
6.5
6.6
6.7
6.8
6.9
Setting the Trend Recording Interval (Dot Model)............................................................ 6-1
Setting the Filter (Pen Model) .......................................................................................... 6-2
Setting the Moving Average (Dot Model) ......................................................................... 6-3
Setting Recording Zones for Each Channel (Zone Recording)........................................ 6-4
Setting the Partial Expanded Recording .......................................................................... 6-5
Turning Trend Recording (Dot Model) and Periodic Printout ON/OFF for Each Channel 6-6
Setting Tags on Channels ................................................................................................ 6-7
Setting the Message String .............................................................................................. 6-8
Setting the Secondary Chart Speed (Remote Control Function, /R1) ............................. 6-9
3
4
6.10 Setting the Alarm Delay Duration ................................................................................... 6-10
6.11 Setting the Brightness of the Display and Internal Light ................................................ 6-11
6.12 Applying a Bias on the Measuring Input Signal ............................................................. 6-12
6.13 Setting the Date/Time When Switching between Standard Time and DST ................... 6-13
5
Chapter 7 Setup Operations for Changing/Adding Functions (Basic Setting
Mode)
6
7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4
7.5
7.6
7.7
7.8
7.9
Changing the Auxiliary Alarm Function ............................................................................ 7-1
Changing the Integration Time of the A/D Converter ....................................................... 7-4
Setting the Burnout Detection Function of Thermocouples ............................................. 7-5
Setting the RJC Function on Channels Set to TC Input................................................... 7-6
Changing the Channel Recording Color (Dot Model) ...................................................... 7-8
Recording by Compensating for the Pen Offset along the Time Axis (Pen Model).......... 7-9
Turning Printouts ON/OFF.............................................................................................. 7-10
Setting the Periodic Printout Interval and the Type of Measured Values to Be Printed . 7-12
Setting the Bar Graph Display Mode ............................................................................. 7-15
7
8
7.10 Setting the Key Lock Function ....................................................................................... 7-16
7.11 Enabling the Moving Average Function (Dot Model)...................................................... 7-19
7.12 Enabling the Filter Function (Pen Model)....................................................................... 7-20
7.13 Enabling the Partial Expanded Recording Function ...................................................... 7-21
7.14 Changing the Display/Recording Language .................................................................. 7-22
7.15 Enabling the Bias Function, Low-Cut Function, and Alarm Delay Function ................... 7-23
7.16 Changing the Time Printout Format ............................................................................... 7-25
7.17 Initializing the Settings ................................................................................................... 7-27
7.18 Assigning Functions to the Remote Control Input Terminals (/R1 Option)..................... 7-28
7.19 Changing the Printout/Display Format of the Date ........................................................ 7-30
7.20 Changing the Temperature Unit ..................................................................................... 7-31
9
10
11
12
App
Index
Chapter 8 Setup Operations for Changing the Displayed Contents
8.1
Key Operations for Changing the Displayed Information ................................................. 8-1
8.2
Changing the Displayed Information ................................................................................ 8-3
Chapter 9 Operations Related to the Computation Function (/M1 Option)
9.1
9.2
9.3
9.4
9.5
9.6
9.7
Starting/Stopping/Resetting the Computation .................................................................. 9-1
Setting the Computing Equation ...................................................................................... 9-2
Setting the Unit ................................................................................................................ 9-9
Setting the Constants Used in Equations ...................................................................... 9-10
Setting the Alarm............................................................................................................ 9-11
Specifying the Timer Used in Statistical Calculations (TLOG) ....................................... 9-13
Setting Recording Zones for Each Channel (Zone Recording)...................................... 9-15
xi
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents
9.8
9.9
Setting the Partial Expanded Recording ........................................................................ 9-16
Turning Trend Recording (Dot Model) and Periodic Printout ON/OFF
for Each Channel ................................................................................................ 9-17
9.10 Setting Tags on Channels .............................................................................................. 9-18
9.11 Setting the Alarm Delay Duration ................................................................................... 9-19
9.12 Setting the Timer Used in TLOG Computation and Periodic Printout ............................ 9-20
9.13 Changing the Channel Recording Color (Dot Model) .................................................... 9-23
9.14 Changing the Channel Assignments of Recording Pens (Pen Model)........................... 9-24
9.15 Changing the Type of Report Data Printed in Periodic Printout ..................................... 9-25
9.16 Setting the Bar Graph Display Mode ............................................................................. 9-27
9.17 Setting the Procedure Taken When the Computed Result Is in Error ............................ 9-28
Chapter 10 Troubleshooting
10.1 A List of Error Messages ................................................................................................ 10-1
10.2 Troubleshooting Flow Charts ......................................................................................... 10-4
Chapter 11 Maintenance
11.1 Periodic Inspection......................................................................................................... 11-1
11.2 Cleaning the Recorder ................................................................................................... 11-2
11.3 Replacing the Internal Light LED ................................................................................... 11-3
11.4 Calibrating the Recorder ................................................................................................ 11-4
11.5 Adjusting the Pen Position (Pen Model) ........................................................................ 11-6
11.6 Adjusting the Dot Printing Position (Dot Model) ............................................................. 11-7
11.7 Recommended Replacement Periods for Worn Parts ................................................... 11-9
Chapter 12 Specifications
12.1 Input Specifications ........................................................................................................ 12-1
12.2 Alarm Function Specifications........................................................................................ 12-3
12.3 Recording Function Specifications................................................................................. 12-4
12.4 Display Function Specifications ..................................................................................... 12-7
12.5 Specifications of Optional Functions ............................................................................ 12-13
12.6 General Specifications ................................................................................................. 12-17
12.7 Dimensional Drawings ................................................................................................. 12-21
Appendix
Appendix 1 Periodic Printout and Printout Using the TLOG Timer (/M1 Option) .................App-1
Index
xii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1 Functional Description
1
1.1 Overview of the Recorder
The RD100B Recorder (hereafter referred to as the recorder) can be used to assign DC
voltage, 1-5V, thermocouple, RTD, and contact or voltage ON/OFF signal to channels for
measurement. The measured results are recorded with pens or dots on a chart paper
that is fed at a constant speed. The pen model can record up to 4 channels; the dot
model can record up to 6 channels.
RD100B Recorder
Recording example (dot model)
Alarms
For each channel, various alarms such as high limit alarm and low limit alarm can be
assigned to monitor the measured values. Alarm output relays can be used to output
contact signals when alarms occur (/A1, /A2, and /A3 options).
Recording
The measured results are recorded with pens or dots on a chart paper (trend recording).
The chart speed can be selected from 5 to 12000 mm/h on the pen model and 1 to 1500
mm/h on the dot model.
In addition to trend recording, various types of information can be printed or recorded on
the chart paper such as numeric measured values, alarm occurrence/release, and
predefined messages.
Also, the recorder settings can be printed.
Internal Light
A light is provided for easier viewing of the recording area of the chart paper.
Display
Measured values can be displayed numerically or using bar graphs on the large display.
Also, alarm status and chart speed can be displayed.
Communication Function
Using the Ethernet communication interface (/C7 option) or the RS-422A/485
communication interface (/C3 option), the measured values on the recorder can be
output to a PC or a PC can be used to control the recorder.
This manual does not cover the communication functions. For details on communication
functions, see the RD100B/RD1800B Communication Interface User’s Manual on the
CD-ROM.
Other Main Functions
The computation function (/M1 option) can be used to perform various computations from
four arithmetic operations to statistical calculations on 8 and 12 computation channels on
the pen model and dot model, respectively. The computed results can be recorded.
The remote control function (/R1 option) can be used to control the start/stop and other
operations of the recorder by applying contact signals to the dedicated terminals.
The FAIL/chart end detection and output function (/F1 option) can be used to output
contact signals when errors are detected on the recorder or when the chart paper runs
out.
1-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1.2 Measuring Input Section
Input Section
Number of Measurement Channels and Scan Interval
The recorder samples the input signals on the measurement channels at the scan
interval to obtain the measured values.
Model
Number of Channels
Scan Interval
1-pen model
2-pen model
3-pen model
4-pen model
Dot model
1
2
3
4
6
125 ms
125 ms
125 ms
125 ms
1 s
(However, the scan interval is 2.5 s when the
integration time of the A/D converter is 100 ms.)
Input Type, Measurable Range, and Computation
The recorder can measure the following types of inputs.
Input Type
Measurable Range
DC voltage
1-5V
DC voltage in the range of ±20 mV to ± 50 V
See “1-5V” below.
Thermocouple Temperature range corresponding to each type: R, S, B, K, E, J, T, N, W, L, U,
and WRe
RTD
Temperature range corresponding to each type: Pt100Ω and JPt100Ω
ON/OFF input Contact input: Open contact is OFF (0). Closed contact is ON (1).
Voltage input: Less than 2.4 V is OFF (0). Greater than or equal to 2.4 V is ON (1)
• 1-5V
1-5V is scaled to values in the appropriate unit to be used as measured values. Also,
the low-cut function (input less than 0% is fixed to 0 (scale left value)) can be used.
• Current Input
A shunt resistor is attached to the input terminal. The current signal is converted to a
voltage signal and measured. The measurable range is the range equivalent to the
“DC voltage” range indicated above after converting the current to the voltage signal.
Note
Three types of shunt resistors (250 Ω, 100 Ω, and 10 Ω) are available for current input (see
“Optional Accessories (Sold Separately)” on page v). For example, a 250-Ω shunt resistor is
used to convert the signal to the range of 1 to 5 V for 4 to 20 mA input.
• Range Type, Measurable Range, and Recording Span
Various “range type” are available for the different types of inputs (for example
thermocouple R). Each range type has a preset measurable range (0.0 to 1760.0°C
for thermocouple R). Measurement can be made by specifying an arbitrary range
within the measurable range as the input range. The measured values in the input
range are recorded on the chart paper. The range of measured values that are
recorded is called the recording span.
Measurable range
(Thermocouple R example)
Input range or
recording span
1760.0°C
1500.0°C (rightmost value of span)
300.0°C (leftmost value of span)
0.0°C
<Related Topics>
Setting the input range: Section 5.1
1-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1.2 Measuring Input Section
1
• Delta Computation
The value obtained by subtracting the measured value of another channel (called the
reference channel) from the input value of the channel set to delta computation is used
as the measured value of that channel. The reference channel must be assigned to a
channel whose channel number is less than that of the channel on which delta
computation is specified. The channel on which delta computation is specified is
automatically set to the same range type as the reference channel.
Channel set to delta computation
Input
Measured value
value
–
Measured value on the reference channel
DC voltage
Note
A channel whose input type is set to DC voltage, TC, or RTD can be designated as a
reference channel. However, channels set to scaling or square root computation cannot be
designated.
• Scaling
The input values are scaled to values in the appropriate unit to be used as measured
values.
Input value
10 V
Measured value
300.0°C
0 V
−100.0°C
• Square Root Computation
When the input type is DC voltage, the square root of the input value is calculated, the
result is scaled to a value in the appropriate unit, and used as the measured value of
the channel. Also, the low-cut function (input less than a given measured value is
fixed to 0 (scale left value)) can be used.
Channel set to square root computation
Input value
Scaling
Measured value
√
Measured value
Low-cut value
Result of square
root computation
Note
The square root computation on the recorder uses the following formula.
min
- V
V
x
F
x
= ( F
- F
)
+ F
min
max
min
max
min
V
-
V
where Vmin (leftmost value of span) < Vmax (rightmost value of span)
Fmin (leftmost value of scale after scaling) < Fmax (rightmost value of scale after
scaling)
Vx is the input voltage and Fx is the scaled value
1-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1.2 Measuring Input Section
Bias
A given value (bias value) is added to the input value and used as the measured value of
that channel.
Biased channel
+
Input value
Measured value
+
Bias value
<Related Topics>
Setting the bias: Section 7.15 and 6.12
Burnout Detection of Thermocouples
This function makes the recording go off the scale to the right or left when the
thermocouple burns out while measuring temperature with a thermocouple. This
function can also be used on 1-5V. The burnout detection function can be set for each
channel.
By default, this function is disabled.
Note
For 1-5V, a burnout occurs when the input value is less than or equal to 0.2 V.
<Related Topics>
Setting the burnout detection function: Section 7.3
Reference Junction Compensation of Thermocouple Input
When measuring the temperature using a thermocouple, the reference junction
compensation on the recorder can be used. When using external reference junction
compensation, you can set the reference voltage. The reference junction compensation
can be set for each channel.
By default, the recorder is configured to use the internal reference junction compensation
function.
Note
When using external reference junction compensation, set an appropriate reference junction
compensation voltage. For example, if the reference junction temperature of the external
reference compensation is T0 °C, set the reference compensation junction voltage to the
thermoelectromotive force of the 0°C reference of T0 °C.
Example when using external reference junction compensation
External reference junction compensation
(Hold the contact point of the thermocouple
and copper wire at T0°C)
Recorder
Copper wire
Thermocouple
<Related Topics>
Setting the reference junction compensation function: Section 7.4
1-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1.2 Measuring Input Section
1
Noise Elimination from Input Signals
Filter and Moving Average
This function used to suppress the effects of noise that is riding on the signal. The pen
model and dot model are equipped with a filter function and a moving average function,
respectively. The function can be set for each measurement channel. However, it does
not operate on channels set to ON/OFF input.
• Filter (Pen Model)
The filter is a low-pass filter. The time constant can be set to 2 s, 5 s, or 10 s.
Filter result (output for a step input)
Input
63.2% of the output value
Output response curve
(when using the filter)
2, 5, 10 s (time constant, the time it takes
to reach 63.2% of the output value)
• Moving Average (Dot Model)
The average value of the m most recent values acquired at the scan interval is used
as the measured value of the channel. The number of moving-averaged data points
(m) can be set in the range 2 to 16. The figure below shows an example indicating
the operation of the buffer for the moving average computation when the number of
moving averaged data points is set to 5.
Buffer data for the
n+2th sampling time
Buffer data for the
nth sampling time
Buffer data for the
n+1th sampling time
Most recent data
Most recent data
10.0 mV
5.0 mV
15.0 mV
10.0 mV
5.0 mV
10.0 mV
15.0 mV
10.0 mV
5.0 mV
1
2
3
4
5
0.0 mV
–5.0 mV
–10.0 mV
0.0 mV
–5.0 mV
0.0 mV
Deleted
Deleted
Moving
average
0.0 mV
5.0 mV
8.0 mV
<Related Topics>
Setting the filter: Section 7.12 and 6.2
Setting the moving average: Section 7.11 and 6.3
1-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1.2 Measuring Input Section
Integration Time of the A/D Converter
The recorder uses an A/D converter to convert the sampled analog signal to a digital
signal. By setting the integration time of the A/D converter to match the time period
corresponding to one cycle of the power supply or an integer multiple of one cycle, the
power supply frequency noise can be effectively suppressed.
The integration time of the A/D converter is selected according to the model from the
table below.
Model
Integration Time of the A/D Converter
Pen model
Dot model
Select 16.7 ms (60 Hz), 20 ms (50 Hz), or Auto
Select 16.7 ms (60 Hz), 20 ms (50 Hz), 100 ms or Auto
•
•
•
If Auto is selected, the recorder detects the power supply frequency and automatically
selects 16.7 ms or 20 ms.
Because 100 ms is an integer multiple of 16.7 ms and 20 ms, this setting can be used
to suppress the power frequency noise for either frequency, 50 Hz or 60 Hz.
The scan interval on the dot model is 1 s when the integration time is set to 16.7 ms or
20 ms and 2.5 s when the integration time is set to 100 ms.
<Related Topics>
Setting the A/D integration time: Section 7.2
1-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1
1.3 Alarms
This function generates an alarm when the measured data meets a certain condition.
The alarm occurrence/release can be recorded on the chart paper. The alarm status can
be displayed on the screen.
Also, alarm output relays can be used to output contact signals when alarms occur (/A1,
/A2, and /A3 options).
Alarm Types
Number of Alarm Point Marks
Up to four alarms can be set for each channel.
Alarm Conditions
The eight conditions below are available. The character inside the parentheses is the
symbol used to denote each alarm on the recorder.
• High Limit Alarm (H)
An alarm occurs when the input value exceeds the alarm value.
• Low Limit Alarm (L)
An alarm occurs when the input value falls below the alarm value.
High limit alarm
Low limit alarm
Alarm
value
Alarm occurrence
Measured Alarm release
value
Alarm release
Measured value
Alarm value
Alarm occurrence
• Difference High Limit Alarm (h)*
An alarm occurs when the difference in the input values of two channels is greater
than or equal to the specified value.
• Difference Low Limit Alarm (l)*
An alarm occurs when the difference in the input values of two channels is less than
or equal to the specified value.
*
Can be specified on channels set to delta computation.
• High Limit on Rate-of-Change Alarm (R)
The rate-of-change of the measured values is checked over a certain time (interval).
An alarm occurs if the rate-of-change of the measured value in the rising direction is
greater than or equal to the specified value.
• Low Limit on Rate-of-Change Alarm (r)
The rate-of-change of the measured values is checked over a certain time (interval).
An alarm occurs if the rate-of-change of the measured value in the falling direction is
greater than or equal to the specified value.
High limit on rate-of-change alarm
Low limit on rate-of-change alarm
Change in the
measured value
Measured
Measured
T
T
1
2
T
T
2
1
value
value
Amount of change
in the setting
Amount of change
in the setting
T
−T
2
|
|
1
|T −T
|
2
1
Change in the
measured value
t
1
t
2
t
1
t
2
Time
Time
t −t
2
t −t
2 1
1
Interval
Interval
The alarm value of the rate-of-change alarm is set using an absolute value. The
interval is derived using the following equation and set using the number of samples.
Interval = the scan interval × the number of samples
1-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1.3 Alarms
• Delay High Limit Alarm (T)
An alarm occurs when the measured value remains above the alarm value for a
specified time period (alarm delay period).
• Delay Low Limit Alarm (t)
An alarm occurs when the measured value remains below the alarm value for a
specified time period (alarm delay period).
Delay High Limit Alarm Example (T is the specified delay)
Measured value
X1
X2
X3
X4
Alarm value
T1
T
Alarm occurrence Alarm release
•
•
Alarm does not occur at T1, because the time period is shorter than the specified
alarm delay period (T).
The measured value exceeds the alarm value at time X2, and the alarm occurs at
time X3 at which the specified alarm delay period elapses (the time when the alarm
occurs is the time at X3).
•
The measured value falls below the alarm value at time X4, and the alarm is
released.
Note
•
•
The alarm detection operation is reset when a power failure occurs. The operation
restarts after the power recovers.
If the alarm value is changed while a delay alarm is occurring, the alarm is released if the
new alarm value does not meet the alarm condition.
Alarm Hysteresis
Hysteresis can be specified to the values for activating and releasing the alarm. The
hysteresis applies only to high limit alarm (H) and low limit alarm (L). The hysteresis
width can be set in the range of 0.0% (Off) to 1.0% of the recording span in 0.1 steps.
The setting applies to all high limit alarms and low limit alarms. By default, the hysteresis
width is set to 0.5%.
High limit alarm
Alarm occurrence
Low limit alarm
Alarm
value
Alarm release
Measured
value
Hysteresis
(1% or less)
Alarm value
Alarm release
Alarm occurrence
Measured value
<Related Topics>
Setting alarms: Section 5.2
Setting the alarm delay function: Section 7.15 and 6.10
Setting the alarm hysteresis: Section 7.1
1-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1.3 Alarms
1
Alarm Indication
The alarm status can be displayed on the screen. For details on the display, see section
1.5.
Non-Hold/Hold Operation of the Alarm Indication
The alarm indication can be set to operate in the following fashion when the alarm
condition is no longer met.
•
•
Clear the alarm indication (non-hold).
Hold the alarm indication until the alarm ACK operation is executed (hold).
The default setting is non-hold.
Non-hold
Hold
or
Alarm ACK
Alarm ACK
Alarm occurrence
Alarm
Alarm release
Blinking
Blinking
ON
ON
Alarm
indication
or
OFF
OFF
OFF
<Related Topics>
Setting the non-hold/hold operation of the alarm indicator: Section 7.1
Alarm Recording
The alarm occurrence/release can be recorded on the chart paper. See section 1.4.
Alarm Output Relay (/A1, /A2, and /A3 Options)
Contact signals can be generated from alarm output relays when alarms occur. The
number of output relays is 2 (/A1), 4 (/A2), or 6 (/A3). The alarm output relays are
denoted as I01 to I06 on the recorder.
The following functions can be assigned to the alarm output relay.
Diagnosis Output
The diagnosis output can be assigned to alarm output relay I01.
The relay is activated when there is an error in the plotter operation on the pen model,
when a burnout is detected, or when there is an error in the A/D converter. Output relay
I01 is normally energized and de-energizes when an error is detected (de-energized
operation and non-hold operation).
NO
C
NC
NO
C
NC
NO
C
NC
Normal
Malfunction
Power-OFF
NO: Normally Opened, C: Common, NC: Normally Closed
Note
If diagnosis output is enabled, I01 becomes a relay dedicated to diagnosis output.
<Related Topics>
Setting the diagnosis output: Section 7.1
1-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1.3 Alarms
Reflash Alarm
When multiple alarms are assigned to one alarm output relay, this function notifies the
occurrence of subsequent alarms after the relay is activated by the first alarm. When
subsequent alarms occur, the output relay is released temporarily (approximately 500
ms).
The reflash alarm function is set to three output relays (I01, I02, and I03 (I01 and I02 for
the /A1 option)).
By default, the reflash alarm is disabled.
Alarm
Channel 1
Channel 2
Channel 3
Alarm output relay
(Reflash alarm ON)
Approx. 500 ms Approx. 500 ms
Alarm output relay
(Reflash alarm OFF)
Note
•
If the reflash alarm is enabled, I01 to I03 are set to reflash alarm operation. In this case, I01
to I03 are set to OR operation and non-hold operation regardless of the settings specified in
“AND/OR Operation of Alarm Output Relays” and “Non-Hold/Hold Operation of Alarm Output
Relays” described below.
•
If diagnosis output is enabled, I01 is set to diagnosis output.
<Related Topics>
Setting the reflash alarm: Section 7.1
1-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1.3 Alarms
1
AND/OR Operation of Alarm Output Relays
When multiple alarms are assigned to one alarm output relay, the condition for activating
the alarm output relay can be selected from the following:
•
•
AND: Activated when all assigned alarms are occurring simultaneously.
OR: Activated when any of the specified alarms is occurring.
Channel 01
Alarm
Channel 02
AND
Alarm output relay
OR
The alarm output relays assigned to AND operation are specified as follows: “I01 (first
relay) to Ixx (where xx is the relay number).”
The default setting is “no AND relay.”
Note
•
•
If the reflash alarm is enabled, I01 to I03 are fixed to OR operation. Specifying AND
produces no effect.
If diagnosis output is enabled, I01 is set to diagnosis output. Specifying AND produces no
effect.
<Related Topics>
Setting the AND operation: Section 7.1
Energized/De-energized Operation of Alarm Output Relays
You can select whether the alarm output relay is energized or de-energized when an
alarm occurs. If de-energized is selected, the status of the alarm output relay when an
alarm occurs is the same as the status that results when the power is shut down. The
setting applies to all alarm output relays.
The default setting is energized.
NO
C
NC
NO
NO
C
C
NC
NC
NO
NO
C
C
NC
NC
Energize
De-energize
NO
C
NC
When power is
shut down
When alarm is
not occurring
When alarm is
occurring
NO : Normally Opened, C : Common, NC : Normally Closed
Note
If diagnosis output is enabled, I01 is fixed to de-energized operation.
<Related Topics>
Setting the energized/de-energized operation of alarm output relays: Section 7.1
1-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1.3 Alarms
Non-Hold/Hold Operation of Alarm Output Relays
The alarm output relay can be set to operate in the following fashion when the alarm
condition is no longer met.
•
•
Turn off the relay output (non-hold).
Hold the relay output until the alarm ACK operation is executed (hold).
The setting applies to all alarm output relays.
The default setting is non-hold.
Non-hold
Hold
or
Alarm
ACK
Alarm Alarm
ACK ACK
Alarm occurrence
Alarm
Alarm release
Activated
Alarm output
relay
or
Released
Note
•
If the reflash alarm is enabled, I01 to I03 are fixed to non-hold operation. Specifying Hold
produces no effect.
•
If diagnosis output is enabled, I01 is fixed to non-hold operation. Specifying Hold produces
no effect.
<Related Topics>
Setting the non-hold/hold operation of alarm output relays: Section 7.1
Alarm ACK Operation
The alarm acknowledge (alarm ACK) operation releases all alarm indications and relay
outputs (/A1, /A2, and /A3 options) that are activated when the alarm indication or alarm
output relay is set to hold operation. This operation can be executed from the front panel
key.
<Related Topics>
Alarm ACK operation: Section 3.12
1-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1
1.4 Recording
The recorder is capable of recording the measured values with pens or dots (trend
recording) as well as various other types of information.
Recording Example on the Pen Model
Recording Example on the Dot Model
The recording examples may appear differently from the actual recording as a result of functional
improvements made on the recorder after this manual was written.
<Related Topics>
Starting/Stopping recording: Section 3.5
1-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1.4 Recording
Trend Recording
The measured values are printed within a width of 100 mm.
Recording Method (Pen Model)
•
•
The measured value is updated every scan interval and continuously recorded.
The recording colors in order from channel 01 are red, green, blue, and violet.
Recording Method (Dot Model)
•
The most recent measured value is recorded with a dot every dot printing interval.
The dot printing interval is in the range of 10 s to 90 s. There are two recording
methods from which you can select. One method automatically adjusts the dot
printing interval according to the chart speed so that the dots do not overlap. The
other method records at the fastest dot printing interval at all times.
•
•
The recording colors in order from channel 01 are purple, red, green, blue, brown, and
black. The recording color of each channel can be changed among these six colors.
For each channel, trend recording can be enabled or disabled.
<Related Topics>
Setting the dot printing interval: Section 6.1
Changing the recording color: Section 7.5
Enabling/Disabling trend recording for each channel: Section 6.6
Chart Speed
On the pen model, the chart speed can be selected from 82 settings in the range of 5 to
12000 mm/h.
On the dot model, the chart speed can be set in the range of 1 to 1500 mm/h in 1-mm
steps.
The default setting is 20 mm/h.
<Related Topics>
Setting the chart speed: Section 5.4
Zone Recording
A recording zone is assigned to each channel.
Zone 1
Zone 2
Zone 3
<Related Topics>
Setting the zone recording: Section 6.4
1-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1.4 Recording
1
Partial Expanded Recording
This function expands a section of the recording range. By default, partial expanded
recording is disabled.
Compressed
Expanded
<Related Topics>
Setting the partial expanded recording: Section 7.13 and 6.5
Pen Offset Compensation (Pen Model)
This function compensates for the pen offset (phase difference) along the time axis.
On 2-pen, 3-pen, and 4-pen recorders, there are offsets along the time axis (phase
difference) between the pens. This offset is corrected when pen offset compensation is
used.
Same time
Below is an explanation for the 2-pen model.
The recording of these two pens are offset by an amount of phase P. If pen offset
compensation is enabled, the measured values of pen 1 are stored in the memory, and
recorded when the chart paper is fed by an amount corresponding to P.
Reference pen (pen 2)
Pen 1
Recorder front panel
P
Chart paper
Chart feeding direction
By default, this function is disabled.
<Related Topics>
Setting the pen offset compensation: Section 7.6
1-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1.4 Recording
Printout
The figure below is used to explain the printout contents. The actual printout and font
are different from those illustrated in the figure. The printout positions are also slightly
different.
Printout Example on the Pen Model
Manual printout
Nov.09.04 15:00
223.5mg/cm3
1
3 H 591.6˚C
2
4
437.2µS/cm
−0.222V
New chart speed printout
50mm/h*14:55
Time tick cancel mark
Periodic printout
Nov.09.04!
13:50*
1
2
Offset compensation mark
218.7mg/cm3
Scale
390.6µS/cm
−0.222V
Alarm
3
H 598.4˚C
4
0.0
d
500.0
mg/cm3
1CH
RED
50mm/h_
Delta computation
Time tick
Recording color
Buffer overflow mark
Alarm printout
1H3*10:09
1H3 10:05
Message printout
09:52*START#205 ABCDEF
Recording start printout
08:00*25mm/h
Time tick
The time ticks are marks that indicate the positions of the date/time on the chart paper.
Time tick cancel mark
An exclamation point (!) is printed when the periodic printout time tick was not printed at the
correct position.
<Related Topics>
Setting the channel printout (dot model)/pen color printout (pen model): Section 7.7
Setting the alarm printout, new chart speed printout, and recording start printout:
Section 7.7 and 7.16
Clearing the alarm printout buffer: Section 3.9
Setting the periodic printout: Section 6.6, 7.7, and 7.8
Executing manual print: Section 3.7
Printing messages: Section 6.8 and 3.10
Printing settings: Section 3.8
1-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1.4 Recording
1
Printout Example on the Dot Model
Manual printout
Nov.09.04 16:00
223.5mg/cm3
1
2
437.2µS/cm
−0.222V
3 H 591.6˚C
−0.665V
4
6 L −0.448V
5
New chart speed printout
_50mm/h*14:55
Periodic printout
Nov.09.04
13:50
1
2
Time tick
218.7mg/cm3
390.6µS/cm
3
H 598.4˚C
4
5
d
−0.222V
−0.995V
L −0.448V
Scale
6
0.0
1CH
50mm/h_
500.0
mg/cm3
Delta computation
Alarm
Buffer overflow mark
Alarm printout
Time tick
1H3*10:09
1H3 10:05
Message printout
09:52*START#205 ABCDEF
Recording start printout
_08:00*25mm/h
Channel printout
Time tick
Channel Printout (Dot Model Only)
Prints the channel No. or tag by the trend recording. The channel No. or tag is printed
every approximately 25 mm on the chart paper. The channel printout can be enabled or
disabled. By default, the channel printout is enabled.
1-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1.4 Recording
Alarm Printout
Alarm information is printed when an alarm occurs or releases.
Time of alarm occurrence/release
Indicates that there are alarms that are not
printed because the alarm printout buffer is full.
Level number
Alarm type
Channel No. or tag
: Alarm occurrence,
: Alarm release
•
•
The print condition can be set to (1) print when alarms occur and release, (2) print
only when alarms occur, or (3) do not print.
Alarms that occur while an alarm printout is in progress are temporarily saved to the
buffer memory in a printout-wait condition. Alarms are cleared from the buffer
memory when they are printed.
•
•
The number alarms that can be stored in the buffer is 8 and 12 on the pen model and
dot model, respectively. Alarms that occur while the buffer is full are not printed. A
buffer overflow mark is printed when there are alarms that cannot be printed because
the buffer is full.
The time printout format can be selected.
Type
Printout format
10 : 00
Type
Printout format
Hour:Minute
Hour:Minute:Second
10 : 00 : 00
Nov. 09
Nov. 09
Month:Day:
Hour:Minute
Month:Day:
Hour:Minute:Second
10 : 00
00 : 00 : 00
Nov. 09. 2004
10 : 00 : 00
Year:Month:Day:
Hour:Minute:Second
* The format of year, month, and day varies depending on the setting (see the next page).
Periodic Printout
Measured values and other items are printed at the preset interval.
• Printout Contents (for details, see appendix 1)
•
Date/time, time ticks (marks that indicate the positions of the date/time on the chart
paper); measured values, alarm status, scale (leftmost and rightmost values of
span) and recording color (pen model) for each channel; and chart speed can be
printed. When pen offset is being executed on the pen model, the pen offset marks
are printed. On the pen model, if a time tick is not printed at the correct position, a
time tick cancel mark (!) is printed.
•
•
•
Printout of measured values and alarm status can be enabled or disabled for each
channel.
Printout of the scale and recording colors (pen model) can be enabled or disabled.
The scale can be printed when the recording zone is greater than or equal to 40 mm.
The measured values for each channel can be selected from the following data types.
Instantaneous value (measured value at the time of periodic printout)
Average value (average of the measured values over an interval)
Minimum value (minimum value of the measured values over an interval)
Maximum value (maximum value of the measured values over an interval)
Minimum value, maximum value, and average value
Sum value (summed value of the measured values over an interval)
• Interval
The printout interval can be set by specifying the value or set automatically in sync
with the chart speed. Periodic printout is disabled at the following chart speeds.
Pen model: Less than or equal to 9 mm/h or greater than or equal to 1600 mm/h
Dot model: Less than or equal to 9 mm/h or greater than or equal to 101 mm/h
1-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1.4 Recording
1
• Turning ON/OFF the Periodic Printout
Periodic printout can be turn ON/OFF. By default, periodic printout is enabled with the
interval synchronized to the chart speed. Also, the measured values that are printed
are the instantaneous values.
Manual Printout
Measured values and alarm status can be printed manually using the keys. When
manual printout is executed, trend recording stops and restarts when manual printout is
complete.
Message Printout
Preset messages can be printed on the chart paper using the keys. Five messages,
each within 16 characters, can be registered in advance.
•
•
•
If message printout is executed while another message is being printed, the most
recent message is temporarily stored to the buffer memory in a printout-wait condition.
Messages are cleared from the buffer memory when they are printed.
The number of messages that can be stored in the buffer is 5. If message printout is
executed when the buffer is full, the message is not printed. A buffer overflow mark is
printed when there are messages that cannot be printed because the buffer is full.
The time printout format can be selected.
New Chart Speed Printout
•
•
When the chart speed is changed, the time tick (dot model), the date/time of change,
and the new chart speed are printed. An asterisk (*) shows there are messages that
cannot be printed.
The time printout format can be selected.
Recording Start Printout
When recording is started, the time tick (dot model), the time, and the chart speed can
be printed. An asterisk (*) shows there are messages that cannot be printed.
•
The recording start printout can be enabled or disabled. By default, the recording
start printout is disabled.
•
The time printout format can be selected.
Printout/Display Format of the Date
The printout/display format of the date can be selected from the list below. The setting
applies to all dates printed and shown on the display.
Type
Printout/Display Format
2005/08/31
Y/M/D
M/D/Y
D/M/Y
D.M.Y
M.D.Y
08/31/2005
31/08/2005
31.08.2005
Aug.31.2005
<Related Topics>
Setting the printout/display format of the date: Section 7.19
1-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1.4 Recording
Setting Printout
List or Setup List can be printed. When setting printout is executed, trend recording
stops and restarts when the printout is complete.
List contains settings such as the input range and alarm for each channel.
Setup List contains settings of basic specifications such as the alarm output relay
operation and printout method.
• Printout Example of List on the Pen Model
The printout examples may appear differently from the actual printout as a result of functional
improvements made on the recorder after this manual was written.
1-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1.4 Recording
1
• Printout Example of List on the Dot Model
The printout examples may appear differently from the actual printout as a result of functional
improvements made on the recorder after this manual was written.
1-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1.5 Display
Displayed Information
Main Display
The recorder is capable of displaying measured values, alarm information, and so on the
VFD (Vacuum Fluorescent Display). Using normal fonts, 17 characters × 2 lines can be
displayed. Using large fonts, 11 characters can be displayed.
Status display
Main display
RECORD KEY LOCK
MATH
CHART END ALARM
1
2
3
4
5
6
There are 22 display types available. Also, different displays can be assigned to the top
and bottom sections of the main display. These display types can be registered to
screens 1 to 15 and switched during operation using the keys.
Status Display
A status display is available at the bottom of the main display. The indicators below turn
ON/OFF.
• RECORD
This indicator turns ON when recording is started and turns OFF when stopped.
• ALARM 1 2 3 4 5 6
The numbers correspond to measurement channel numbers. The indicator turns ON
when an alarm occurs and turns OFF when the alarm is released.
If the alarm indication is set to hold operation, the indicator blinks when an alarm
occurs. When alarm ACK operation is performed, the indicator turns ON or OFF.
• MATH
This indicator turns ON when computation on the computation function (/M1 option) is
started and turns OFF when stopped.
• KEYLOCK
This indicator turns ON when key lock is enabled and turns OFF when disabled.
• CHART END
This indicator turns ON when the remaining amount of chart paper falls to
approximately 2 cm on models with the FAIL/chart end function (/F1 option).
Display Types
The following display types are available.
•
Displays that show measured values
Measured values can be displayed numerically or using bar graphs. The channels
that are displayed can be switched automatically at constant intervals.
The bar graph displays 0 to 100% using 101 points.
101 dots
0%
100%
•
•
•
•
•
Displays that show alarms
Displays that show the date/time and chart speed
Displays that show the remote control input and alarm output relay statuses
Displays that show the status
System display
Different display types can be assigned to the top and bottom sections of the main display.
1-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1.5 Display
Several display examples are shown below. For details on the display types, see
1
“Display Function Specifications” in section 12.4.
1 Channel Digital + 1 Bar Graph Display
Channel No.
Alarm status Measured value
Unit
Bar graph
Scale
Alarm point mark
Flag Display
Flag (the number indicates the channel No.)
Scale
Alarm Status Display
Symbol indicating
an alarm
Measurement channel
Computation
channel
Channel on which an alarm is occurring
Channel on which an alarm is not occurring
Channel on which an alarm is not set
Date/Time and Chart Speed
The date format can be specified.
Date
Aug.31.2005 12000
11:26:37
mm/h
Time
Chart speed
Status Display
Alarm status
Remaining amount of chart paper is less than approx. 2 cm (/F1 option)
<Related Topics>
Assigning display types to screens: Chapter 8
Switching displays: Section 3.6
Setting the bar graph display mode: Section 7.9
Changing the date format: Section 7.19
Setting the display brightness: Section 6.11
Displaying measured values: Section 12.4.
1-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1.6 Computation Function (/M1 Option)
Computation Function
Computing equations can be set up using measured values and other computed values
as variables in computation-dedicated channels, and the computation can be executed.
The computed result can be recorded. Computation is performed every scan interval.
Channels Dedicated to Computations
The computation-dedicated channels below can be used.
Model
Number of Channels
Channel Names
Pen model
Dot model
8
0A, 0B, 0C, 0D, 0E, 0F, 0G, and 0J
0A, 0B, 0C, 0D, 0E, 0F, 0G, 0J, 0K, 0M, 0N, and 0P
12
Types of Computations
In the table below, y represents the computed result. X and n represent the measured
value, a constant, etc.
Type
Syntax in the Equation Description
Four arithmetic operation +, –, *, /
Determines addition, subtraction, multiplication, and division.
Determines the power. y = Xn
Power
**
Square root
SQR()
ABS()
LOG()
EXP()
Determines the square root.
Absolute value
Common logarithm
Exponent
Determines the absolute value.
Determines the common logarithm. y=log10
Determines the exponent. y = ex
x
Relational computation
.LT., .LE., .GT., .GE.,
.EQ., .NE.
Determines <, ≤, >, or ≥ of two elements and outputs “0” or “1.”
Logical computation
TLOG computation
AND, OR, XOR, NOT
Determines the AND (logical product), OR (logical sum),
XOR (exclusive logical sum) of two elements,
NOT (negation) of an element and outputs “0” or “1.”
TLOG.SUM(), TLOG.
MAX(), TLOG.MIN(),
TLOG.AVE(),
Determines the sum (SUM), the maximum (MAX),
the minimum (MIN), the average (AVE),
and the maximum – minimum (P-P) at specified time
intervals. There are three timers for setting the interval.
TLOG.P-P(),
Data That Can Be Used in Equations
In TLOG computation, the measured values of measurement channels or computed
values of computation channels can only be used. For all other computations, all of the
data types below can be used.
• Measured Values on Measurement Channels
Specified by the channel No. For channels that have scaling enabled, the scaled
values are used in the computation.
• Computed Values on Computation Channels
Specified by the channel No.
• Constants (K01 to K30)
The values assigned to K01 to K30 can be used as constants.
Range of values (maximum significant digits is 5):
–9.9999E+29 to –1.0000E–30, 0, 1.0000E–30 to 9.9999E+29
1-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1.6 Computation Function (/M1 Option)
1
• Communication Input Data (Pen model: C01 to C08, dot model: C01 to C12)
This data type is set using the communication interface (/C7 or /C3 option).
Range of values (maximum significant digits is 5):
–9.9999E+29 to –1.0000E–30, 0, 1.0000E–30 to 9.9999E+29
For the procedure of setting the communication input data, see the RD100B/RD1800B
Communication Interface User’s Guide M-4233.
• Status of the Remote Control Input Terminal (D01 to D05, /R1 option)
The status of the remote control input signal (1 or 0) can be used in the computation.
Use D01 to D05 (the number following the letter D is the remote control input terminal
number) to specify the status in the equations.
<Related Topics>
Setting the computing equation, constant, and unit: Section 9.2 to 9.4
Setting the TLOG timer: Section 9.6 and 9.12
Handing of the Unit in Computations
In computations, measured/computed values are handled as values without units. For
example, if the measured value of channel 01 is 20 mV and the measured value of
channel 02 is 20 V, the computed result of 01 + 02 is 40.
Recording Computation Channels
Trend Recording
Trend recording is possible by setting the recording span for each computation channel.
The recording span of computation channels can be set in the range of –9999999 to
99999999 excluding the decimal.
Zone recording and partial expanded recording are also possible.
Assignment of Computation Channels to the Pens (Pen Model)
Trend recording is possible by assigning computation channels to arbitrary pens. Only
display or printout is possible for measurement channels or computation channels that
are not assigned to a pen. Assignment of pens is possible only on models with the
computation function.
Pen
1
2
3
4
Channel 01 02 03 04 0A 0B 0C 0D 0E 0F 0G 0J
Measurement channels Computation channels
<Related Topics>
Changing the channel assignment of recording pens: Section 9.14
Changing the Channel Recording Color (Dot Model)
The recording colors of computation channels can be changed. The default recording
colors of channels are indicated below.
Recording color
Purple Red
Green
Blue
Brown Black
Computation channels 0A
0G
0B
0J
0C
0K
0D
0M
0E
0N
0F
0P
1-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1.6 Computation Function (/M1 Option)
• The Number of Channels Being Trend Recorded and the Fastest Recording
Interval
The fastest recording interval varies depending on the number of channels being
trend recorded. Only display or printout is possible on measurement channels or
computation channels that are not trend recorded.
Number of Channels Being Trend Recorded
Fastest Recording Interval
6 channels or less
7 to 12 channels
13 to 18 channels
10 s
15 s
20 s
<Related Topics>
Changing the channel recording color: Section 9.13
Enabling/Disabling trend recording for each channel: Section 9.9
Printout
Various printouts can be executed in the same fashion as measurement channels.
The computed values of computation channels can be printed at constant intervals by
using the periodic printout timer or the two TLOG timers. The TLOG timers can be used
only on the computation channels. For the printout contents when printing using the
TLOG timer, see appendix 1.
<Related Topics>
Setting the periodic printout: Section 7.8, 9.6, and 9.15
Setting the printout using the TLOG timer: Section 9.6 and 9.12
Alarms
Up to 4 alarms can be assigned to each computation channel.
•
The alarm types are high limit alarm (H), low limit alarm (L), delay high limit alarm (T),
and delay low limit alarm (t).
•
Hysteresis can be specified to the values for activating and releasing the alarm. The
hysteresis applies only to high limit alarm (H) and low limit alarm (L). The hysteresis
width can be set in the range of 0.0% (Off) to 1.0% of the recording span in 0.1 steps.
The setting applies to all high limit alarms and low limit alarms. By default, the
hysteresis width is set to 0% (Off).
<Related Topics>
Setting alarms: Section 9.5
Setting the alarm delay function: Section 7.15 and 9.11
Setting the alarm hysteresis: Section 7.1
Display
Computation channels can be displayed on the VFD as with the measurement channels.
<Related Topics>
Setting the bar graph display mode: Section 9.16
Starting/Stopping Computation
Computation can be started or stopped using keys.
<Related Topics>
Starting/Stopping computation: Section 9.1
1-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1
1.7 FAIL/Chart End Detection and Output Function
(/F1 Option)
FAIL Output
When a failure occurs in the CPU of the recorder, a relay contact signal (1 signal) is
output. The relay is energized when the CPU is normal and de-energizes when a CPU
failure occurs. Therefore, relay output is carried out also when the power is turned OFF
(including a power failure). This relay behavior cannot be changed.
• FAIL Relay Output
NO
C
NC
NO
C
NC
NO
C
NC
Normal
Failure
Power-OFF
NO: Normally Opened, C: Common, NC: Normally Closed
Chart End Output
When the remaining amount of chart paper falls to approximately 2 cm, recording is
stopped, and the relay contact signal (1 relay) is output. The relay is energized in this
case. This relay behavior cannot be changed.
NO
C
NC
NO
C
NC
NO
C
NC
Normal
Chart end
Power-OFF
NO: Normally Opened, C: Common, NC: Normally Closed
1-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1.8 Remote Control Function (/R1 Option)
Specified operations can be carried out by applying remote signals (contact or open
collector signals) to the remote control input terminals.
There are five remote control input terminals. An action can be assigned to each
terminal.
µR10000 Recorder
Contact
Open collector
Assignable Functions
• Recording start/stop
•
•
•
Remote input signal: Rising edge signifies start; falling edge signifies stop
Starts/stops recording.
Applying a rising edge signal when recording is already in progress produces no
effect. Applying a falling edge signal when recording is stopped produces no
effect.
• Chart Speed Switch
•
•
Remote input signal: Level
The chart paper is fed at the secondary chart speed while a level signal is applied
to the terminal. The secondary chart speed is set in advance.
• Message 1 Printout to Message 5 Printout
•
•
Remote input signal: Trigger
Prints message 1 to 5 on the chart paper.
• Manual Printout
•
•
Remote input signal: Trigger
Executes a manual printout.
• Alarm ACK
•
•
Remote input signal: Trigger
Alarm ACK is executed on all alarms that are occurring. This is valid only when the
alarm indication or output relay operation is set to hold.
• Internal Clock Adjustment
•
•
Remote input signal: Trigger
The internal clock of the recorder is adjusted to the nearest hour depending on the
time when the remote signal is applied.
Time When Signal Is Input
Adjustment
00 min 00 s to 01 min 59 s
Truncates the minutes and seconds.
Example: 10 hours 01 min 50 s becomes 10 hours 00 min 00 s.
02 min 00 s to 57 min 59 s
58 min 00 s to 59 min 59 s
The time is not changed.
Rounds up the minutes and seconds.
Example: 10 hours 59 min 50 s becomes 11 hours 00 min 00 s.
1-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1.8 Remote Control Function (/R1 Option)
1
• Computation Start/Stop
•
•
Remote input signal: Rising edge signifies start; falling edge signifies stop
Starts/stops the computation. This is valid only on models with the computation
function (/M1 option).
•
If the computation is started, applying a rising edge signal produces no effect. If
the computation is stopped, applying a falling edge signal produces no effect.
• Computation Reset
•
•
Remote input signal: Trigger
The computed results of computation channels are reset. This is valid only on
models with the computation function (/M1 option) and while the computation is
stopped. For all other cases, applying the remote signal produces no effect.
Remote Signal (Edge, Trigger, and Level)
The above actions are carried out on the rising or falling edge of the remote signal
(edge), the ON signal lasting at least 250 ms (trigger), or the ON/OFF signal (level).
Rising/Falling edge
Rising Falling
Trigger
Level
250 ms or more
250 ms or more
Operates at the
secondary chart speed
For contact inputs, the remote signal rises when the contact switches from open to
closed and falls when the contact switches from closed to open. For open collector
signals, the remote signal rises when the collector signal (voltage level of the remote
control terminal) goes from high to low and falls when the collector signal goes low to
high.
<Related Topics>
Assigning functions to the remote control input terminals: Section 7.18
Setting the secondary chart speed: Section 6.9
1-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1.9 Other Functions
Key Lock
Key lock is a function that prohibits key operations. When key lock is enabled, pressing
keys produces no effect. To release the key lock, a password is entered.
Key Lock Items
Each of the following keys can be included or excluded from the key lock function.
CHARACTER
ESC/?
MENU
SHIFT
RCD MENU DISP
FUNC
1
FEED
CH UP
Keys that can be locked
In the case of the FUNC key, each function of the FUNC key can be included or
excluded from the key lock function.
FUNC key functions: Alarm ACK execution, computation start/stop, manual printout and
setting printout, message printout, printout buffer clear, resetting of
the periodic printout report data (the average, etc.), and pen
replacement (pen model), ribbon cassette replacement (dot model)
<Related Topics>
Setting the key lock function: Section 7.10
Using the key lock function: Section 3.13
Language
DST
The display and recording language can be set to English or Japanese.
<Related Topics>
Changing the language: Section 7.14
If the recorder is used in a region that has DST, time can be switched automatically
between DST and standard time by setting the date/time when switching from the
standard time to DST and the date/time when switching back from DST to standard time.
When switching from standard time to DST, the clock is set ahead by 1 hour. When
switching back from DST to standard time, the clock is set back by 1 hour.
<Related Topics>
Using the DST: Section 6.13
Temperature Unit
The temperature unit can be set to Celsius or Fahrenheit. The setting applies to all
channels.
<Related Topics>
Changing the temperature unit: Section 7.20
1-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2 Before Using the Recorder
2.1 Handling Precautions
This section describes the precautions to be taken when using the recorder. Read this
section before use.
2
Handling Precautions
•
Use care when cleaning the recorder, especially any plastic parts. When cleaning,
wipe using a dry soft cloth. Do not use chemicals such as benzene or thinner, since
these may cause discoloring and deformation.
•
•
Keep electrically charged objects away from the recorder as this may cause
malfunction.
Do not apply volatile chemicals to the door glass, display, panel keys, etc. Do not
allow rubber and vinyl products to remain in contact with the recorder for long periods
of time. This may damage the recorder.
•
•
When not in use, make sure to turn OFF the power switch.
If there are any symptoms of trouble such as strange odors or smoke coming from the
recorder, immediately turn OFF the power switch and the power supply source. Then,
contact OMEGA.
2-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.2 Installation
Installation Location
Install the recorder indoors in a location that meets the following conditions. See also
the normal operating conditions described in section 12.6, “General Specifications.”
• Instrument Panel
The recorder is designed for panel mounting.
• Well-Ventilated Location
To prevent overheating, install the recorder in a well-ventilated location.
For the panel cut dimensions when arranging multiple recorders, see page 2-4.
Follow the panel cut dimensions providing adequate space between instruments
when other instruments are arranged on the panel.
• Minimum Mechanical Vibrations
Choose an installation location with the minimum mechanical vibration.
Installing the recorder in a location with large mechanical vibration not only causes
adverse effects on the mechanism but also may hinder normal recording.
• Horizontal
Install the recorder horizontally (However, the recorder can be inclined up to 30
degrees backwards for panel mounting).
Note
•
Condensation may occur if the recorder is moved to another place where both the ambient
temperature and humidity are higher, or if the temperature changes rapidly. In addition,
measurement errors will result when using thermocouples. In this case, let the recorder
adjust to the new environment for at least one hour before using it.
The chart paper may be adversely affected by a rapid change in the ambient temperature and
humidity.
•
Do not install the instrument in the following places.
• Outdoors
• In direct sunlight or near heat sources
Install the recorder in a place with small temperature fluctuations near room
temperature (23°C). Placing the recorder in direct sunlight or near heat appliances
can cause adverse effects on the internal circuitry.
• Where an excessive amount of soot, steam, moisture, dust, or corrosive gases
are present
Soot, steam, moisture, dust, and corrosive gases will adversely affect the recorder.
Avoid such locations.
• Near Strong Magnetic Field Sources
Do not bring magnets or instruments that produce electromagnetic fields close to the
recorder. Operating the recorder in strong magnetic fields can cause errors in the
measurements.
2-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.2 Installation
Installation Procedure
The recorder should be mounted on a steel panel of thickness 2 mm to 26 mm.
1. Insert the recorder from the front side of the panel.
2.
As shown in the figure below, mount the recorder to the panel using the
mounting brackets that come with the package.
2
• Use two brackets to support the top and bottom or the left and right sides of
the case. (Remove the seal that is covering the holes for the mounting
brackets beforehand.)
• The proper torque for tightening the mounting screws is 0.7 to 0.9 Nm.
• Mount the recorder to the panel according to the procedure below.
• First, attach the two mounting brackets and temporarily fasten the
attachment screws.
• Next, fix the recorder in place by tightening the attachment screws with the
appropriate torque. When the recorder is approximately perpendicular to
the panel as you fasten the screws, press the mounting bracket against the
case so that they are in contact with each other.
Screw temporarily
Fix in place
Panel
Mounting bracket
Attachment screw
Panel Case
Mounting bracket
In contact
with each other
Front
Torque driver
(flat blade)
Attachment screw
(The figure shows the case when the mounting
brackets are used on the top and bottom of the case.)
CAUTION
Tightening the screws too much can deform the case or damage the bracket.
2-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.2 Installation
External Dimensions of the Recorder
Unit: mm (approx. inch)
Unless otherwise specified, tolerance is 3%
(however, tolerance is 0.3 mm when below 10 mm).
220 (8.66)
178 (7.01)
(1.08) 27.5
151.5 (5.96)
Mounting panel
thickness
2 to 26
144 (5.67)
(Dimensions before attaching
the mounting bracket)
9.4
(0.37)
144
(5.67)
136.5 +2
(5.37)
0
151.5
(5.96)
7.5 (Dimensions after attaching
the mounting bracket)
(0.30)
Panel Cutout
Single-Unit Mounting
Side-by-Side Mounting (horizontally)
Side-by-Side Mounting
(vertically, max. 3 units)
+2
0
137
+2
137
0
(5.39)
(5.39)
+2
0
137
175 min.
(6.89)
(5.39)
+2
0
137
L +2
0
(5.39)
L +2
0
Units
L (mm)
282
2
3
426
175 min.
(6.89)
4
570
5
714
6
858
Attach the mounting brackets to the top and
bottom when mounting the recorders side-by-side
horizontally or right and left when mounting the
recorders side-by-side vertically.
7
1002
1146
1290
1434
(144xn)-6
8
9
Unit: mm (approx. inch)
Unless otherwise specified, tolerance is 3%
(however, tolerance is 0.3 mm when below 10 mm).
10
n
2-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.3 Input Signal Wiring
General Precautions to Be Taken While Wiring
2
WARNING
To prevent the possibility of electric shock when wiring, make sure that the
power supply source is turned OFF.
CAUTION
•
•
If a strong tension is applied to the cable wired to the recorder, the terminals of
the recorder and/or the cable can be damaged. In order to prevent tension from
being applied directly on the terminals, fasten all wiring cables to the rear of the
mounting panel.
Do not apply a voltage exceeding the following value to the input terminals as
this may damage the recorder.
• Maximum input voltage
Voltage range less than or equal to 200 mVDC, TC, RTD, and DI: ±10 VDC
Ranges other than those listed above: ±60 VDC
• Maximum common-mode voltage
±60 VDC (under measurement category II conditions)
The recorder is an INSTALLATION CATEGORY II product.
•
Precautions to Be Taken While Wiring
Take the following precautions when wring the input signal cables.
It is recommended that crimp-on lug with insulation sleeves (designed for 4-mm
screws) be used when connecting the input/output signal wires to the terminals.
However, this does not apply clamped terminals (/H2).
Crimp-on lug with insulation
sleeves (for 4 mm screws)
For clamped terminals (/H2), the following wire is recommended.
•
Conductive cross-sectional area for single wire: 0.14 mm2 to 1.5 mm2, stranded wire:
0.14 mm2 to 1.0 mm2
•
Length of the stripped section of the wire: Approx. 5 mm
Take measures to prevent noise from entering the measurement circuit.
•
Move the measurement circuit away from the power cable (power circuit) and ground
circuit.
•
It is desirable that the object being measured does not generate noise. However, if
this is unavoidable, isolate the measurement circuit from the object. Also, ground the
object being measured.
•
Shielded wires should be used to minimize noise caused by electrostatic induction.
Connect the shield to the ground terminal of the recorder as necessary (make sure
you are not grounding at two points).
•
•
To minimize noise caused by electromagnetic induction, twist the measurement circuit
wires at short, equal intervals.
Make sure to earth ground the protective ground terminal through minimum resistance
(less than 100 Ω).
2-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.3 Input Signal Wiring
When using internal reference junction compensation on the thermocouple input,
take measures to stabilize the temperature at the input terminal.
•
•
Always use the terminal cover.
Do not use thick wires which may cause large heat dissipation (cross sectional area of
0.5 mm2 or less recommended).
•
Make sure that the ambient temperature remains reasonably stable. Large
temperature fluctuations can occur if a nearby fan turns ON or OFF.
Connecting the input wires in parallel with other devices can cause signal
degradation, affecting all connected devices.
If you need to make a parallel connection, then
•
•
•
Turn the burnout detection function OFF.
Ground the instruments to the same point.
Do not turn ON or OFF another instrument during operation. This can have adverse
effects on the other instruments.
•
RTDs cannot be wired in parallel.
Arrangement of the Measuring Input Terminals
A terminal cover is screwed in place on the measuring input terminal block on the rear
panel. A label indicating the terminal arrangement is affixed to the cover.
Measuring input terminal block
Terminal cover
attachment screws
Pen Model
b
+/A
Channel 1
Channel 2
Channel 3
Channel 4
+/A
b
+/A
Channel 1
Channel 3
Channel 2
Channel 4
b
Screw input terminal
Clamped input terminal
(/H2 option)
2-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.3 Input Signal Wiring
Dot Model
b
+/A
+A
+/A
Channel 1
Channel 2
Channel 3
Channel 4
Channel 5
Channel 6
Channel 2
Channel 4
Channel 6
Channel 1
2
b
b
Channel 3
Channel 5
Screw input terminal
Clamped input terminal
(/H2 option)
1.
2.
Turn OFF the recorder and remove the terminal cover.
Connect the signal wires to the terminals.
Screw input terminal
Clamped input terminal
Signal wire
Crimp-on lug with
insulation sleeves
Signal wire
Flat-blade
screwdriver
Philips
screwdriver
Note
Input signal wires of diameter less than or equal to 0.3 mm may not be secured firmly for
clamped terminals (/H2). Fold over the conducting section of the wire, for example, to make
sure that the wire is securely connected to the clamped terminal.
3.
Replace the terminal cover and fasten it with screws.
The proper torque for tightening the screws is 0.6 N-m.
2-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.3 Input Signal Wiring
Measuring Input Wiring
Thermocouple input
Resistance temperature detector input
b
–/B +/A
b
–/B +/A
Leadwire resistance:
Extension leadwire
10 Ω max./wire. The resistance
of the three wires should be
equal.
b
B
A
DC voltage input, 1-5V input,
and ON/OFF input
DC current input
b
b
–/B +/A
–/B +/A
Shunt resistor
Example: For a 4 to 20 mA
input, a shunt resistor of
250 Ω 0.1% can be used to
convert to 1-5V input.
+
+
–
–
DC voltage
1-5V
DC current
ON/OFF
Note
RTD input terminals A and B on the dot model are isolated on each channel. Terminal b is
shorted internally across all channels. However, for 3 legs isolated RTDs (/N2 option), input b
is also isolated for each channel.
2-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.4 Optional Terminal Wiring
General Precautions to be Taken While Wiring the Input/Output Signal Wires
2
WARNING
•
•
To prevent electric shock while wiring, ensure that the power supply source is
turned OFF.
If a voltage of more than 30 VAC or 60 VDC is to be applied to the output
terminals, use ring-tongue crimp-on lugs with insulation sleeves on all terminals
to prevent the wires from slipping out when the screws become loose.
Furthermore, use double-insulated wires (dielectric strength of 2300 VAC or
more) for the signal wires on which a voltage of more than 30 VAC or 60 VDC is
to be applied. For all other wires, use basic insulated wires (dielectric strength
of 1390 VAC). To prevent electric shock, attach the terminal cover after wiring
and make sure not to touch the terminals.
Crimp-on lug with insulation sleeves
(for 4 mm screws)
CAUTION
•
•
To prevent fire, use signal wires having a temperature rating of 70°C or more.
If a strong tension is applied to the cable wired to the recorder, the terminals of
the recorder and/or the cable can be damaged. In order to prevent tension from
being applied directly on the terminals, fasten all wiring cables to the rear of the
mounting panel.
Arrangement of the Optional Terminals
As shown in the figure below, the optional terminal block is located on the rear panel.
The optional terminal block is provided on the recorder when an option that requires
input/output is installed such as the alarm output relay (/A1, /A2, or /A3 option), FAIL/
chart end output (/F1 option), and remote control function (/R1 option). A terminal cover
is screwed in place on the optional terminal block. A label indicating the terminal
arrangement is affixed to the terminal block.
Optional terminal block
Terminal cover
attachment screws
2-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.4 Optional Terminal Wiring
/A1
NO
/A1/F1
NO
/A1/R1
C
/A1/F1/R1
C
C
C
NC
NC
C
NC
NC
NO
NC
NC
NO
NC
I01
I02
I01
I02
I01
I02
I01
I02
NO
NO
C
NO
C
NO
C
NC
NO
NO
C
C
NC
NC
NO
NO
1
C
C
2
NC
NC
3
CE
CE
(/F1)
(/F1)
FAIL
FAIL
1
4
2
5
3
(/R1)
(/R1)
C
4
5
C
/A2
NO
/A2/F1
/A2/R1
/A2/F1/R1
C
C
C
C
NC
NC
NC
NC
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
C
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NO
NO
NO
NO
C
C
C
C
NC
NC
NC
NC
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
1
C
C
C
C
C
C
2
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
3
I01
I02
I03
I04
I01
I02
I03
I04
CE
I01
I02
I03
I04
I01
I02
I03
I04
CE
NO
NO
NO
C
C
C
C
C
(/F1)
(/F1)
FAIL
FAIL
1
4
2
5
3
(/R1)
(/R1)
C
4
5
C
/A3
NO
/A3/R1
/F1
/R1
C
C
C
C
C
C
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
1
C
C
C
C
C
C
2
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
3
I01
I02
I03
I04
I05
I06
I01
I02
I03
I04
I05
I06
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
C
C
NC
NC
CE
(/F1)
FAIL
1
4
2
5
3
(/R1)
(/R1)
4
5
C
C
/F1/R1
CE: Chart end
NO
NO
1
C
C
2
NC
NC
3
CE
(/F1)
FAIL
(/R1)
4
5
C
Alarm Output Relay Terminals and FAIL/Chart End Output Relay Terminals
NC (Normally Closed), C (Common), NO (Normally Opened)
Remote Control Input Terminals
1 to 5 (remote control input terminals), C (Common)
Alarm output terminals correspond to I01 to I06 in the alarm output relay settings.
Remote control input terminals 1 to 5 correspond to numbers 1 to 5 in the remote control
input settings.
2-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.4 Optional Terminal Wiring
Wiring Procedure
1.
2.
Turn OFF the recorder and remove the terminal cover.
Connect the input signal wires to the terminals.
2
Philips
screwdriver
Crimp-on lug with
insulation sleeves
3.
Replace the terminal cover and fasten it with screws.
The proper torque for tightening the screws is 0.6 N-m.
Alarm output
Remote control input
FAIL/chart end output
Relay contact input
(Voltage-free contact)
Transistor input
(Open collector)
Relay contact output
1
2
3
1
2
3
NO
C
NC
C
C
4
5
4
5
Note
To reduce noise, use a shielded cable for the wiring of the remote control input terminals.
Connect the shield to the ground terminal of the recorder.
• Relay Contact Output Specifications
Output type:
Relay
Contact rating:
Dielectric strength:
250 VAC (50/60 Hz)/3 A, 250 VDC/0.1 A (resistive load)
1500 VAC at 50/60 Hz for one minute (between output
terminals and the ground terminal)
• Relay Contact Input/Transistor Input Specifications
Input signal:
• Voltage-free contact: Contact closed at 200 Ω or less and
contact open at 100 kΩ or greater
• Open collector: 0.5 V or less (30 mADC) when turned ON,
leakage current of 0.25 mA or less when turned OFF
Photocoupler isolation (shared common)
500 VDC for one minute between input terminals and the
ground terminal
Input format:
Dielectric strength:
2-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.5 Power Supply Wiring
Precautions to Be Taken While Wiring the Power Supply
Make sure to follow the warnings below when wiring the power supply. To prevent
electric shock and damage to the recorder, observe the following warnings.
WARNING
•
•
•
•
•
•
To prevent electric shock when wiring, ensure the main power supply is turned
OFF.
To prevent the possibility of fire, use 600 V PVC insulated wire (JISC3307) or an
equivalent wire for power wiring.
Make sure to earth ground the protective earth terminal through a grounding
resistance less than 100 Ω before turning ON the power.
Use crimp-on lugs (designed for 4 mm screws) for power and ground wiring
termination.
To prevent electric shock, make sure to close the transparent cover for the
power supply wires.
Make sure to provide a power switch (double-pole type) on the power supply
line in order to separate the recorder from the main power supply. Put an
indication on this switch as the breaker on the power supply line for the recorder
and indications of ON and OFF.
Switch specifications
Rated power current: 1 A or more
Rated rush current: 60 A or more
Use a switch complied with IEC 60947-1, 3.
•
•
Connect a fuse between 2 A and 15 A in the power supply line. Use a fuse
approved by CSA (for the use in North America) or VDE (for the use in Europe).
Do not add a switch or fuse to the ground line.
Use a power supply that meets the following conditions:
Item
Power Supply Specifications
Rated supply voltage
100 to 240 VAC
Allowable power supply voltage range
Rated supply voltage frequency
Allowable power supply frequency range
Maximum power consumption
90 to 132/180 to 264 VAC
50/60 Hz
50/60 Hz±2%
Pen model: 40 VA, dot model: 40 VA
Note
Do not use a supply voltage in the range 132 to 180 VAC, as this may have adverse effects
on the measurement accuracy.
2-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.5 Power Supply Wiring
Wiring Procedure
The power supply terminals and a protective ground terminal are located on the rear
panel.
1.
Turn OFF the recorder and open the transparent power terminal cover.
2
Power terminal block
Screw for fixing the power
terminal cover in place
Power terminal cover
Open
2.
Wire the power cord and the protective ground cord to the power supply
terminals.
Use ring-tongue crimp-on lugs (designed for 4 mm screws).
Crimp-on lug with insulation sleeves
L
Power cord
N
Philips screwdriver
Protective ground cord
3.
Replace the power terminal cover, and fasten it with screws.
The proper torque for tightening the screws is 0.6 N-m.
2-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.6 Turning ON/OFF the Power Switch
CAUTION
Check the following points before turning ON the power switch.
• The power cord/wires are connected correctly to the recorder.
• The recorder is connected to the correct power supply (see section 2.5).
The power switch is located inside the door at the lower right.
The power switch is a push button. Press once to turn it ON and press again to turn it
OFF.
When the power switch is turned ON, a self-diagnosis program runs for a few seconds,
and the recorder is ready for operation.
Note
•
If the input wires are connected in parallel with other devices, do not turn ON/OFF the power
switch of the recorder or another device during operation. This can have adverse effects on
the measured values.
•
If nothing is displayed when the power switch is turned ON, turn OFF the power switch and
check the points listed above one more time. After checking the points, turn ON the power
switch again. If the unit still does not work, it is probably malfunctioning. Contact OMEGA for
repairs.
•
•
If an error message is displayed on the screen, take measures according to the description in
chapter 10, “Troubleshooting.”
Turn ON the power switch, let the recorder warm up for at least 30 minutes, and then start the
measurements.
Checking the Date/Time
DISP
The date/time is shown on the display when the
key is pressed several times. To
correct the date/time, see the reference indicated below.
<Related Topics>
Setting the date/time: See section 5.5
2-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3 Names of Parts and Run Operations
3.1 Names of Parts
Front
Name plate
The model name is written
on the name plate.
3
Display and key panel
Hold the tab at the lower
left and pull to open.
Door
Mounting hole
Tag plate
Used to write
channel names.
There is one hole on each of the
top, bottom, left, and right panels.
The hole is covered with a seal.
Chart cassette
Holds the chart paper.
Power switch
Turns ON/OFF the power each
time the switch is pressed.
Pen model
Dot model
Recording pen
Records the measured value.
Ink ribbon
Six-color ink.
Printer carriage
Plotter pen
Prints various types
of information.
Records measured values
and prints various types of
information.
Display and key panel (see the next page)
There is an internal light on the bottom section
of the display and key panel. It lights up the
recording area of the chart paper.
3-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.1 Names of Parts
Display and Key Panel
Status display
Displays the following information.
RECORD
KEY LOCK
MATH
Illuminates while recording measured values.
Illuminates when key lock is enabled.
Illuminates when computation on the computation function (/M1 option)
is in progress.
CHART END
Illuminates when the chart paper is out (/F1 option).
ALARM 1 to 6 Illuminates when an alarm is occurring on channels 1 to 6.
Main display
Displays the measured values. Also, displays the setup screen when
setting functions.
RECORD KEY LOCK
CHARACTER
MATH
CHART END ALARM
ESC/?
1
2
3
4
5
6
SHIFT
RCD MENU DISP
FUNC
1
MENU
FEED
CH UP
Seven keys are available.
For all keys except RCD, functions marked above the keys are enabled when
setting functions or when the FUNC key or the DISP MENU key is pressed.
<While setting functions, when the FUNC key/DISP MENU key is pressed>
CHARACTER Key: Changes the character type when entering a character. Press
this key while holding down the SHIFT key to switch the character type in reverse
order.
UP/DOWN Key: Switches the setup item or the value.
Press this key while holding down the SHIFT key to switch the setup item
or the value in reverse order.
LEFT/RIGHT Key: Moves the cursor to the right when entering a value
or character. Press this key while holding down the SHIFT key to move
the cursor to the left..
ESC Key: Cancels the operation.
When pressed with the SHIFT key, the display of the comment
on the setting turns ON/OFF.
SHIFT Key: Used with the
CHARACTER key.
key,
key, or the
ENTER Key: Confirms the setup item or value.
CHARACTER
ESC/?
MENU
SHIFT
RCD MENU DISP
FUNC
1
FEED
CH UP
<During normal operation>
CH UP key
Switches the displayed channel.
(when manual switching is specified)
FEED key
Feeds the chart paper.
DISP MENU key
Hold this key down for 3 seconds to switch to the data display
setup screen. Hold this key down for 3 seconds also to exit
from the data display setup screen.
FUNC key
Used when executing manual printout, message printout, etc.
DISP key
Switches the screen in the main display.
MENU key
Hold this key down for 3 seconds to enter Setting mode. Hold this key down for
3 seconds also to exit from Setting mode.
RCD key
Starts/stops recording.
Note
This manual denotes the operation of pressing a key while holding down the SHIFT key as
SHIFT + the other key (for example: SHIFT + key).
3-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.1 Names of Parts
Rear Panel
Heatsink
Dissipates the internal heat.
Power terminal block
The power terminal and protective ground terminal.
Optional terminal block
This is where terminals or ports used by options such
as alarm output relays and communication interface
are installed.
3
Measuring input terminal block
Measuring input terminals
Ethernet port (/C7 option)
3-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.2 Installing or Replacing the Chart Paper
CAUTION
•
•
Do not install or remove the chart cassette with the chart paper guide open.
This may damage the stopper.
Continuing to record or print without the chart paper on the dot model can cause
damage to the chart cassette platen (the cylindrical section that holds the paper
during the recording operation). Be sure to replace the chart paper ahead of
time.
Loading the Chart Paper
1.
Open the door.
If recording is in progress, press the
key to stop the recording.
RCD
2.
Remove the chart cassette.
Gently pressing the left and right stoppers inward. The bottom section of the
chart cassette comes out. Gently lift the chart cassette and pull it out from the
recorder case.
Stopper
3-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.2 Installing or Replacing the Chart Paper
Open the chart holder and the chart paper guide.
3.
Chart holder
This sheet is provided on models
with the chart end detection
function (/F1 option).
3
Do not remove or bend this sheet.
Chart paper guide
4.
Load the chart paper.
Riffle the chart thoroughly before loading.
Make sure that the sprocket teeth of the chart drives are properly engaged in the
chart paper perforations. Make sure not to load the chart paper backwards.
Z-fold chart paper
Sprocket teeth
5.
Close the chart holder and close the chart paper guide.
Chart holder
The side with the
long rectangular
Chart paper guide
holes is the right side.
3-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.2 Installing or Replacing the Chart Paper
6. Replace the chart cassette back into the recorder case.
Align the left and right projections of the sprocket section with the guide grooves
of the recorder and press the entire chart cassette into the recorder case. The
chart cassette is fixed in place with the stoppers.
Stopper
Feeding the Chart Paper
7. Press the key to assure that the chart moves two or more folds smoothly
FEED
into the chart receiver.
If it moves unsteadily, do the installing procedure again.
3-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.3 Installing/Replacing Felt Pens or Plotter Pen
(Pen Model)
CAUTION
•
•
Do not press or pinch the felt tip to prevent deformation.
Do not move the penholder left or right by force to protect the driving
mechanism.
3
•
•
Make sure to remove the pen cap before installation.
Use pen caps of the same ink color. If a pen cap of a different ink color is used
on the pen, the remaining ink in the cap may be absorbed through the pen tip,
and the ink may change its color.
Replacing Felt Pens
1.
2.
Open the door.
If recording is in progress, press the
key to stop the recording.
RCD
Open the display and key panel section.
You can open the display and key panel section by holding the tab at the lower
left and pulling it toward you.
3.
4.
Hold the felt pen cartridge and pull it out from the pen holder.
If the pen (pen holder) is at a position that is not easily accessible, see “When
the Pen (Pen Holder) Is at a Position That Is Not Easily Accessible” on the next
page.
Remove the cap from the new felt pen and insert the pen firmly into the pen
holder.
From the top: pen 1 (red),
pen 2 (green), pen 3 (blue),
and pen 4 (violet).
Display and key panel
3-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.3 Installing/Replacing Felt Pens or Plotter Pen (Pen Model)
When the Pen (Pen Holder) Is at a Position That Is Not Easily Accessible
If the pen (pen holder) is at a position that is not easily accessible, carry out the
procedure below to move it near the center position.
1.
2.
Turn ON the power switch and press the
key.
FUNC
Press the DISP ) key several times to display the Pen exchange screen.
(
Func=Pen exchange
3.
Press the
(
CH UP ) key.
The pen (pen holder) moves near the center position, and the Pen exchange
= End appears.
Note
When the pen moves, a line is drawn on the chart paper.
4.
5.
Replace the pen.
Press the
(
CH UP ) key.
The screen returns to the data display screen.
Replacing the Plotter Pen
1.
Open the door.
If recording is in progress, press the
key to stop the recording.
RCD
2.
3.
4.
Open the display and key panel section.
Hold the plotter pen cartridge and pull it out from the pen holder.
Remove the cap from the new plotter pen and insert the pen firmly into the pen
holder.
3-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.4 Installing/Replacing the Ribbon Cassette (Dot
Model)
CAUTION
•
•
Improper cassette insertion may cause the color to change or damage the ribbon.
Do not apply upward force to the printer carriage. If you do, the carriage position
may be offset, and the recorder may not print correctly.
3
1.
Open the door.
If recording is in progress, press the
key to stop the recording.
RCD
2.
3.
Press the
Press the
key.
FUNC
(
DISP ) key several times to display R. exchange.
Func=R. exchange
4.
5.
Press the
(
CH UP ) key.
The printer carriage moves near the center position, and R. exchange = End is
displayed.
Open the display and key panel section.
You can open the display and key panel section by holding the tab at the lower
left and pulling it toward you.
Note
If the recorder is OFF, pinch the printer carriage and move it near the center position.
Printer carriage
6.
Remove the ribbon cassette.
Pull the left-hand part of the ribbon cassette so that the cassette holder tab
disengages, and pull the ribbon cassette out from the recorder case.
Holder tab
3-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.4 Installing/Replacing the Ribbon Cassette (Dot Model)
7.
Install a new ribbon cassette.
First, insert the right-hand part and then the left-hand part into the cassette holder.
Check that the cassette is properly engaged with the cassette holder tab.
If inserting the ribbon cassette is difficult, turn the ribbon feeding knob in the
direction of the arrow to align the ribbon feeding shaft of the cassette with the
ribbon feeding shaft hole of the holder.
Holder tab
Cassette holder
Hole for the ribbon
feed shaft
Ribbon feeding knob
8.
9.
Turn the ribbon feeding knob in the direction of the arrow a half turn or more to
check that the ribbon is feeding properly. If the ribbon is loose, turn the knob in
the direction of the arrow to tighten it.
Return the display and key panel section to its original position, and press the
(
CH UP ) key.
The screen returns to the data display screen.
3-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.5 Starting/Stopping the Recording
This section describes the procedures for starting/stopping the recording and checking
the recorded result.
Procedure
Starting the Recording
3
Press the
key to start recording.
RCD
The status display shows the word “RECORD.”
Stopping the Recording
While recording is in progress, press the
key to stop recording.
RCD
The word “RECORD” on the status display clears.
Feeding the Chart Paper
The chart paper is fed while the
key is held down.
FEED
Viewing the Recorded Results
Pull the front cover tab of the chart cassette to open the front cover. The recorded chart
paper can be pulled out for viewing.
Recorded chart paper can
be pulled out.
Front cover tab
<Related Topics>
Changing the chart speed: Section 5.4
3-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.6 Switching the Display Screen
This section describes the procedure for switching the display screen.
To change the displayed content, see chapter 8.
Procedure
Switching the Display Screen
The display screen switches each time the
key is pressed.
DISP
Screen 01 through 15 are switched in order. Screens that are set to “Skip” are skipped.
Channel Auto Switching
On screens that show the measured values and computed values, the displayed channel
is automatically switched in ascending order. The switching interval can be set to 1 s, 2
s, 3 s, 4 s, or 5 s.
Measurement channels set to Skip and computation channels set to OFF are not
displayed.
Switching the Displayed Channel Using Keys
If auto switching is not specified, the channel switches each time the
in ascending order. All channels are displayed in order.
key is pressed
CH UP
Note
The operation is different between auto channel switching and manual switching using keys
on the 2-channel digital display.
01
02
03
04
05
06
During auto switching
01
02
02
03
03
04
When switching using keys
3-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.7 Printing Measured Values (Manual Printout)
The measured values of all channels are printed.
Procedure
Starting the Manual Printout
1.
2.
Press the
Press the
key.
FUNC
3
key to select Print out and then press the
key.
Func=Print out
3.
Press the
key with ManualStart shown on the screen.
Manual printout starts. The screen returns to the data display screen.
Print=ManualStart
Note
•
When manual printout is executed, trend recording is suspended. However, the recorder
continues the measurement and alarm detection (in the background).
When manual printout is complete, trend recording resumes.
If an alarm occurs during the manual printout, the alarm is printed after the trend recording
resumes.
•
•
Aborting the Manual Printout
The following procedure is for aborting the manual printout that is in progress.
1.
2.
3.
Press the
Press the
Press the
key.
FUNC
key to select Print out and then press the
key with Manual Stop shown on the screen.
key.
Manual printout stops. The screen returns to the data display screen.
Print=Manual Stop
* When the
key or
key is pressed while holding down the SHIFT key, the operation is
reversed as when the respective key is pressed by itself.
3-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.8 Printing the Recorder Settings
This section explains the procedure for printing the recorder settings. There are two sets
of settings that can be printed: List and Setup.
List: Prints the settings of Setting mode (input range for each channel, etc.)
Setup: Prints the settings of Basic Setting mode
Note
•
The printout takes several minutes to tens of minutes to complete.
•
When this printout is executed, trend recording is suspended. However, the recorder
continues the measurement and alarm detection (in the background).
When the printout is complete, trend recording resumes.
•
•
If an alarm occurs during the printout, the alarm is printed after the trend recording resumes.
Procedure
Starting the List Printout
1.
2.
3.
Press the
Press the
Press the
key.
FUNC
key to select Print out and then press the
key to display List Start and then press the
key.
key.
The List printout starts. The screen returns to the data display screen.
Print=List Start
Aborting the List Printout
1.
2.
3.
Press the
Press the
Press the
key.
FUNC
key to select Print out and then press the
key to display List Stop and then press the
key.
key.
The List printout stops. The screen returns to the data display screen.
Print=List Stop
Starting the Setup Printout
1.
2.
3.
Press the
Press the
Press the
key.
FUNC
key to select Print out and then press the
key to display Setup Start and then press the
key.
key.
The Setup printout starts. The screen returns to the data display screen.
Print=Setup Start
Aborting the Setup Printout
1.
2.
3.
Press the
Press the
Press the
key.
FUNC
key to select Print out and then press the
key to display Setup Stop and then press the
key.
key.
The Setup printout stops. The screen returns to the data display screen.
Print=Setup Stop
* When the
key or
key is pressed while holding down the SHIFT key, the operation is
reversed as when the respective key is pressed by itself.
3-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.9 Clearing the Alarm Printout Buffer
Alarm information waiting to be printed is temporarily stored in the buffer memory. This
operation clears all of the alarm information in the buffer. This function can be used to
prevent unneeded alarm printouts from being executed.
Procedure
3
1.
2.
Press the
Press the
key.
FUNC
key to select Buffer clear and then press the
key.
Func=Buffer clear
3.
Press the
key to select Alarm and then press the
key.
The data in the alarm printout buffer is cleared. The screen returns to the data
display screen.
Buf.clear=Alarm
* When the
key or
key is pressed while holding down the SHIFT key, the operation is
reversed as when the respective key is pressed by itself.
3-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.10 Printing Messages
This section explains the procedure for printing the preset character strings. For the
procedure of setting the character strings, see section 6.8.
Note
•
Messages can be printed only during trend recording. However, regardless of whether trend
recording is ON or OFF, messages waiting to be printed are temporarily stored in the buffer
memory.
•
Message printouts are not performed when the chart speed is greater than or equal to 1600
mm/h and 101 mm/h on the pen model and dot model, respectively.
Procedure
Printing a Message
1.
2.
Press the
Press the
key.
FUNC
key to select Message and then press the
key.
Func=Message
3.
Press the
key to select message number and then press the
key.
The message printout starts. The screen returns to the data display screen.
Message=Message1
Displays the preset message.
Clearing the Message Printout Buffer
Messages waiting to be printed are temporarily stored in the buffer memory. This
operation clears the messages in the buffer.
1.
2.
3.
Press the
Press the
Press the
key.
FUNC
key to select Buffer clear and then press the
key to select Message and then press the
key.
key.
The messages in the printout buffer are cleared. The screen returns to the data
display screen.
Buf.clear=Message
* When the
key or
key is pressed while holding down the SHIFT key, the operation is
reversed as when the respective key is pressed by itself.
3-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.11 Resetting the Report Data of the Periodic
Printout
This operation resets the past report data when the recorder is configured to print the
report data (the average, the minimum, the maximum, or the sum) of the measured
values in periodic printout.
Procedure
3
Resetting the Report Data
1.
2.
Press the
Press the
key.
FUNC
key to select Periodic and then press the
key.
Func=Periodic
3.
Press the
key to select Reset and then press the
key.
The report data is reset, and the calculation of the report data starts again from
that point. The screen returns to the data display screen.
Log data=Reset
* When the
key or
key is pressed while holding down the SHIFT key, the operation is
reversed as when the respective key is pressed by itself.
3-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.12 Releasing the Alarm Output (Alarm ACK
Operation)
This operation releases the alarm indication or relay output (/A1, /A2, or /A3 option)
when the alarm indication or output relay is set to hold operation.
Procedure
Releasing the Alarm Output
1.
2.
Press the
Press the
key.
FUNC
key with Alarm ACK shown on the screen.
The alarm indication or relay output is released. The screen returns to the data
display screen.
Func=Alarm ACK
Explanation
Alarm Output Relay Operation
•
When the alarm is released
The alarm output is released when the alarm ACK operation is carried out.
When an alarm is occurring
•
The alarm output is held even after the alarm ACK operation. If the alarm ACK
operation is carried out again after the alarm is released, the alarm output is released.
Indication (Status Display)
Blinks when an alarm occurs.
•
•
When the alarm is released
The alarm indication turns OFF when the alarm ACK operation is carried out.
When an alarm is occurring
The alarm indication turns ON after the alarm ACK operation. The alarm indication
turns OFF when the alarm is released.
Alarm ACK
Alarm ACK
Alarm ACK
Alarm
or
or
Alarm output
relay
Blinking
Blinking
OFF
ON
Alarm indication
or
OFF
3-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.13 Activating/Releasing the Key Lock
When the recorder is configured to use the key lock function, this operation activates or
releases the key lock.
Note
DISP
Key lock does not apply to the
and CH UP keys.
3
Procedure
Activating the Key Lock
1.
2.
Press the
Press the
key.
FUNC
key to select Keylock and then press the
key.
The key lock is activated. The screen returns to the data display screen.
Func=Keylock
Releasing the Key Lock
Note
A password is required to release the key lock.
1.
2.
3.
Press the
Press the
key.
FUNC
key to select Keylock and then press the
key.
Enter the password for releasing the key lock. The password values are shown
with asterisks.
Press the
key to increment the value.
key to decrement the value.
Press the SHIFT +
Press the
key to move the cursor to the right.
key to move the cursor to the left.
Press SHIFT +
Password=
4.
Press the
key.
The key lock is released. The screen returns to the data display screen.
<Related Topics>
Changing the password: Section 7.10
* When the
key or
key is pressed while holding down the SHIFT key, the operation is
reversed as when the respective key is pressed by itself.
3-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Common Operations for Setting Functions and Setup Guide
4.1 Run Modes
The recorder has three run modes.
Operation Mode
This mode is used for normal recording operation. The recorder enters this mode when
the power is turned ON. The operations that can be carried out in this mode are
described in chapter 3. The details on the data display setup screen are explained in
chapter 8.
Setting Mode
4
This mode is used to set the input range, alarms, chart speed, and other parameters.
These settings can be changed while recording is in progress. However, the input range
of measurement channels and the computing equation, unit, constant, and TLOG setting
of computation channels cannot be changed while computation (/M1 option) is in
progress. The operations that can be carried out in this mode are described in chapter 5
and 6.
Basic Setting Mode
This mode is used to set the basic specifications of the recorder such as the
thermocouple burnout detection function and the alarm output relay operation. This
mode cannot be entered while the recorder is recording or while computation is in
progress on the computation function (/M1 option). Measurement, recording, and alarm
detection cannot be carried out in this mode. The operations that can be carried out in
this mode are described in chapter 7.
Power ON
Display “End=Store” and press
Setting mode
Basic Setting mode
Operation mode
1
MENU
for 3 s
Hold down
Data display setup screen
Hold down
for 3 s
Hold down
+
MENU
for 3 s
4-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.2 Key Operations
This section describes basic operations on the panel keys to change various settings.
Functions are set in Setting mode or Basic Setting mode.
Entering Setting Mode
Hold down the
key for 3 seconds.
MENU
The Setting mode display appears. The top and bottom lines are the setup item and
comment, respectively.
The section that is blinking in the setup item that you change. In this manual, the section
that you change appears shaded.
Set=Range
Input range and
Setup item
Comment
The item to be controlled blinks.
The panel keys are set to the functions marked above the keys.
CHARACTER
ESC/?
MENU
SHIFT
RCD MENU DISP
FUNC
1
FEED
CH UP
Exiting from Setting Mode (Returning to Operation Mode)
Hold down the key for 3 seconds.
MENU
The screen returns to operation mode.
Entering Basic Setting Mode
Basic Setting mode is entered from Setting mode.
Hold down the key for 3 seconds to enter Setting mode. Next, hold down both the
MENU
(
DISP ) key and the
(
FUNC
) key for 3 seconds.
The Basic Setting mode display appears. The top and bottom lines are the setup item
and comment, respectively.
The section that is blinking in the setup item that you change. In this manual, the section
that you change appears shaded.
Basic=Alarm
Auxiliary alarm
Setup item
Comment
The item to be controlled blinks.
Exiting from Basic Setting Mode (Returning to Operation Mode)
This operation is used to return to Operation mode after changing the settings in Basic
Setting mode.
Press the ESC key several times to return to the Basic= screen.
Press the
key or SHIFT +
key to select End and then press the
key. The
setup save screen appears.
Basic=End
Save Settings
Press the
key to select Store and then press the
key. The setting is applied,
and the screen returns to Operation mode. If you select Abort and press the
key,
the setting is discarded, and the screen returns to Operation mode.
End=Store
Save settings and
4-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.2 Key Operations
Changing the Settings
Note
The comment line shows useful information such as a description of the setup item and the
range of selectable values. Read the comment and change the items as necessary.
The selected item change each time you press the
key. The selected item changes
in reverse order if you press the key while holding down the SHIFT key.
SHIFT key +
key
Skip
Volt
Mode=TC
4
RTD
1-5V
key
This manual denotes the operation of pressing a key while holding down the SHIFT key
as SHIFT + the other key (for example: SHIFT + key).
After you make a selection, press the key. The next screen appears.
When the Setting complete screen appears, the changed item is applied.
01-01 Channel
Setting complete
Using the ESC Key
Entering Values
If you press the ESC (MENU ) key, the operation is cancelled, and the display returns to a
higher level menu. In other words, if you do not show the Setting Complete screen, the
changes you made up to that point are discarded.
Press the ESC ( 1 MENU ) key while holding down the SHIFT ( FEED ) key to show or hide the
comment that is displayed at the bottom half of the screen.
Use the
key or SHIFT +
key to move the cursor. Use the
key or SHIFT +
key to change a digit value. You repeat these steps to enter the value.
SHIFT key +
key
key
Span_L= -2.000
-2.000/ 2.000V
Cursor
8
7
key
6
Span_L= -1.500
-2.000/
4
3
2
SHIFT key +
key
When you press the
key, the change is applied and the next screen is displayed.
4-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.2 Key Operations
Entering Characters
Use the
key or SHIFT +
key to move the cursor.
SHIFT key +
key
key
Unit=ppm
CHR:a-z
Cursor
Use the CHARACTER key or SHIFT + CHARACTER key to select the character type.
Use the
key or SHIFT +
key to select a character. You repeat these steps to
set the character string.
Unit=ppm
CHR:a-z
Character type
The character type changes in the following order: uppercase alphabet, lowercase
alphabet, numbers, and symbols.
p
o
key
n
Unit=ppm
CHR:a-z
l
k
j
SHIFT key +
key
When you press the
key, the change is applied and the next screen is displayed.
Inserting Characters
Press the
key or SHIFT +
key to move the cursor to the position where the
character is to be inserted.
Press the CHARACTER key or SHIFT + CHARACTER key to show Ins DISP and then
press the
key. A space for one character is inserted. Enter the character.
Position to insert the character
Unit=ppm
CHR:Ins DISP
Display Ins DISP
Deleting a Character
Use the
key or SHIFT +
key to move the cursor to the character to be deleted.
Press the CHARACTER key or SHIFT + CHARACTER key to show Del DISP and then
press the key. The character is deleted.
Deleting an Entire Character String
Press the CHARACTER key or SHIFT + CHARACTER key to show Clear DISP and
then press the
key. The entire character string is deleted.
Copying & Pasting a Character String
Show the copy source character string.
Press the CHARACTER key or SHIFT + CHARACTER key to show Copy DISP and
then press the
key. The character string is saved to the memory.
Show the copy destination.
Press the CHARACTER key or SHIFT + CHARACTER key to show Paste DISP and
then press the
key. The character string is pasted.
4-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.3 Menu Structure, Settings, and List of Default
Values
Operation Menus Using the FUNC Key (Operation Mode)
Below are the items that are operated using the
FUNC
key. Information indicated inside
the parentheses is references.
FUNC
key
:
:
Use the
Use the
key.
key.
Alarm ACK
(section 3.12)
Math
(section 9.1)
Start/Stop
Reset
4
Print out
ManualStart/Manual Stop
List Start/List Stop
(sections 3.7, 3.8)
Setup Start/Setup Stop
Message
(section 3.10)
Message 1
Message 2
Message 3
Message 4
Message 5
Alarm
Buffer clear
(sections 3.9, 3.10)
Message
Keylock
Password
(section 3.13)
Periodic
Reset
(section 3.11)
Pen exchange
(section 3.3)
Pen exchange = End
R. exchange = End
R. exchange
(section 3.4)
Alarm ACK
Alarm output release operation. This operation is valid only when the alarm indication or
relay output is set to hold operation.
Math (Models with the Computation Function (/M1 Option))
Starts/stops the computation.
Print out
Starts/Stops the manual printout or setting printout (List or Setup).
Message
Prints messages.
Buffer clear
Clears the data waiting to be printed in the alarm printout buffer or the message printout
buffer.
Keylock
Activates or releases the key lock. This operation is possible only when the use of the
key lock function is enabled.
Periodic
Resets the computed value when printing of the report data (average, etc.) is specified in
periodic printout.
4-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.3 Menu Structure, Settings, and List of Default Values
Pen exchange (Pen Model)
Moves the recording pen to a position that is easily accessible for replacement on the
pen model.
R. exchange (Dot Model)
Moves the printer carriage near the center position when replacing the ribbon cassette
on the dot model.
4-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.3 Menu Structure, Settings, and List of Default Values
Menu Structure of Setting Mode
Below are the setup items in Setting mode. Information indicated inside the parentheses
is references.
Range
CH
Volt
TC
Range
Range
Range
Span_L
Type
Span_L
Span_L
Span_L
Span_R
Span_R
Span_R
(section 5.1)
RTD
1-5V
Scale
Delta
DI
Span_R
Range Span_L
Span_L
Scale_L
Scale_R
Low-cut
Scale_R
Span_R
Scale_L
Ref.CH
Range
Range
Span_R
Span_R
Span_R
4
Span_L
Span_L
SQRT
Skip
Bias
Level
Unit
Scale_L
Scale_R
Low-cut
Low-cut point
Bias
CH
Bias
(section 6.12)
Alarm
(section 5.2)
CH
Alarm
Type
Value
Relay
Relay_No.
Unit
(section 5.3)
CH
Key operation
Hold down the MENU key for 3 seconds
in Operation mode to enter Setting mode.
Chart
mm/h
(section 5.4)
Clock
(section 5.5)
(Date/Time)
: Use the
: Use the
key.
key.
Aux
Trend
(section 6.1)
Mode
CH
Zone
Left
Right
Expand
Periodic
Hold down the MENU key for 3 seconds
in Setting mode to return to Operation mode.
(section 6.4)
Partial
(section 6.5)
CH
CH
CH
Partial
Trend
Tag
Boundary
Hold down both the
for 3 seconds in Setting mode to enter
Basic Setting mode.
and
keys
Print out
(section 6.6)
Tag
(section 6.7)
Message
Message No.
mm/h
(Message)
(section 6.8)
Chart 2
(section 6.9)
Moving_AVE
(section 6.3)
CH
CH
CH
No. of samples
Filter
(section 6.2)
Resp.Time
Duration
Alarm delay T
(section 6.10)
Brightness
(section 6.11)
DST
(section 6.13)
Display
DST
Light
Start month
Start day
Span_L
Start time
End month
End day
End time
Math
Formula
CH
CH
Mode
Unit
f.
Span_R
(section 9.2)
Unit
(section 9.3)
Constant
Number
K##
(section 9.4)
Alarm
(section 9.5)
CH
Level
Alarm
Type
Value
Relay
Relay_No.
TLOG
(section 9.6)
CH
Timer_No.
SUM scale
Aux
Zone
CH
CH
Left
Right
Expa
Periodic
(section 9.7)
nd
Partial
Partial
Bound
(section 9.8)
are not displayed in the default
condition. To display these items,
settings must be changed in Basic
Setting mode.
Print out
CH
Trend
(section 9.9)
Tag
CH
CH
Tag
(section 9.10)
Alarm delay T
(section 9.11)
Duration
4-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.3 Menu Structure, Settings, and List of Default Values
Menu Structure of Basic Setting Mode
Below are the setup items in Basic Setting mode. Information indicated inside the
parentheses is references.
Alarm
(section 7.1)
Diagnosis
Integrate
Reflash
Indicator
AND
Act
Behavior
Increase
Decrease
Hysteresis
M_hysteresis
and
A/D
(section 7.2)
Key operation
Hold down both the
Burnout
(section 7.3)
RJC
(section 7.4)
Color
(section 7.5)
CH
Burnout
RJC
keys for 3 seconds in
Setting mode to enter this mode.
CH
Volt
Color
: Use the
: Use the
key.
key.
Channel
POC
POC
(section 7.6)
Print
(section 7.7)
Print 1
(section 7.8)
CH/Tag
Periodic
Channel
Ref.Time
Alarm
Record On
Mode
Chart speed
Scale
Pen color
Interval
Print 2
(section 7.8)
CH
Mode
Graph
Password
SUM scale
Bar graph
(section 7.9)
CH
Keylock
(section 7.10)
Keylock
(Free/Lock)
Moving_AVE
(section 7.11)
Moving_AVE
Filter
Filter
(section 7.12)
Partial
Partial
Lang
(section 7.13)
Language
(section 7.14)
Date format
(section 7.19)
Type
Temperature
(section 7.20)
Temp
Personalize
(section 7.14)
Add function
(section 7.15)
Bias
SQRT low-cut
Message
1-5V low-cut
Alarm delay
Time print
(section 7.16)
Alarm
RCD On
C.Speed
Initialize
(section 7.17)
Mode
Are you sure?
Remote
(section 7.18)
Remote No.
(No.)
Math
Timer (TLOG)
(section 9.12)
Timer No.
Channel
Pen CH
Mode
Color
Interval
Ref.Time
Reset
Print
Color
(section 9.13)
Output pen
(section 9.14)
Print 2
CH
Mode
Graph
Over
SUM scale
(section 9.15)
Bar graph
(section 9.16)
CH
Error data
Error
(section 9.17)
RS422/485
Address
Host
Baud rate
Data length
Domain
M
Parity
Protocol
(Communication)
Ethernet
(Communication)
Host
A
Local IP
G
IP address
Subnet mask
Gateway
DNS
DNS
P
S
Suffix_P
Suffix primary Suffix secondary
Suffix_S
Primary server Secondary server
Login
Login
Login set
Timeout
K.Alive
Level
Register
User
Password
Timeout
Duration
Keep alive
(Value)
P_Adj
(sections 11.5, 11.6)
P_Adj
Pen No.
End
(section 4.2)
End
4-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.3 Menu Structure, Settings, and List of Default Values
Setup Items in Setting Mode and Their Default Values
Items with an asterisk on the left are not displayed in the default condition. To display
these items, settings must be changed in Basic Setting mode.
Setup Item
Pen/Dot
Selectable Range or Selections
Default Value
Range > CH
Range > Mode
-
-
01 to 06
Volt/TC/RTD/1-5V/Scale
01
Volt
/Delta/DI/SQRT/Skip
Range > Mode > Range
-
20mV/60mV/200mV/2V/6V/20V/50V/1-5V
/R/S/B/K/E/J/T/N/W/L/U/WRe/Pt/JPt/Level/Cont
/(Slections for /N1 and /N3 options)
2V
*Bias > CH
*Bias > Bias
*Bias > Bias
-
-
-
01 to 06
On/Off
01
Off
-
±10 % of the span of the measurable range
4
Alarm > CH
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
01 to 06
1/2/3/4
On/Off
H/L/h/l/R/r (*/T/t)
Depends on the alarm type.
On/Off
01
1
Off
H
Alarm > Level
Alarm > Alarm
Alarm > Type
Alarm > Value
Alarm > Relay
Alarm > Relay No.
-
Off
I01
I01 to I06
Unit > CH
Unit > Unit
-
-
01 to 06
6 characters or less
01
Blank
Chart
Pen Model 82 types (pen model)
Dot Model 1 to 1500 mm/h (dot model)
20 mm/h
20 mm/h
Clock
-
Date/Time
-
Aux > Trend
Dot Model Auto/Fix
Auto
Aux > Zone > CH
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
01 to 06
01
Aux > Zone > Left, Right
*Aux > Partial > CH
*Aux > Partial > Partial
*Aux > Partial > Expand
*Aux > Partial > Boundary
Aux > Print out > CH
Aux > Print out > Trend
Aux > Print out > Periodic
Aux > Tag > CH
Within the recording span range (mm)
01 to 06
On/Off
1 to 99%
Within the recording span range
01 to 06
Left: 0, Right: 100
01
Off
50
-
01
On
On
01
1 to 6
1
Blank
20 mm/h
20 mm/h
01
Dot Model On/Off
-
-
-
-
-
On/Off
01 to 06
7 characters or less
1 to 5
16 characters or less
Aux > Tag > Tag
Aux > Message > Message No.
Aux > Message > (Message)
Aux > Chart2
Pen Model 82 types (pen model)
Dot Model 1 to 1500 mm/h (dot model)
Dot Model 01 to 06
Dot Model Off, 2 to 16
Pen Model 01 to 06
*Aux > Moving_AVE > CH
*Aux > Moving_AVE > No. of samples
*Aux > Filter > CH
Off
01
*Aux > Filter > Resp. Time
*Aux > Alm delay T > CH
*Aux > Alm delay T > Duration
Aux > Brightness > Display
Aux > Brightness > Light
Aux > DST
Aux > DST > Start month
Aux > DST > Strt day
Aux > DST > Start time
Aux > DST > End month
Aux > DST > End day
Pen Model 2s/5s/10s
Off
01
10s
4
2
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
01 to 06
0 to 3600s
1/2/3/4/5/6/7/8
1/2/3/4
Not/Use
Not
Apr/May/Jun/Jul/Aug/Sep/Oct/Nov/Dec/Jan/Feb/Mar Apr
1st-Sun/.../Last-Mon
0:00 to 23:00
Apr/May/Jun/Jul/Aug/Sep/Oct/Nov/Dec/Jan/Feb/Mar Apr
1st-Sun/.../Last-Mon
0:00 to 23:00
1st-Sun
0:00
Last-Mon
0:00
Aux > DST > End time
Computation function (/M1 option)
Setup Item
Pen/Dot
Selectable Range or Selections
Default Value
Math > Formula > CH
Math > Formula > Mode
Math > Formula > f.
Math > Unit > CH
-
-
-
-
0A/0B/0C/0D/0E/0F/0G/0J/0K/0M/0N/0P
On/Off
120 characters or less
0A
Off
01
0A/0B/0C/0D/0E/0F/0G/0J/0K/0M/0N/0P
0A
4-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.3 Menu Structure, Settings, and List of Default Values
Setup Item
Pen/Dot
Selectable Range or Selections
Default Value
Math > Unit > Unit
Math > Constant > No.
Math > Alarm > CH
Math > Alarm > Level
Math > Alarm > Alarm
Math > Alarm > Type
Math > Alarm > Value
Math > Alarm > Relay
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
6 characters or less
K01 to K30
0A/0B/0C/0D/0E/0F/0G/0J/0K/0M/0N/0P
1/2/3/4
On/Off
H/L (*/T/t)
–9999999 to 99999999 excluding the decimal
On/Off
I01 to I06
0A/0B/0C/0D/0E/0F/0G/0J/0K/0M/0N/0P
Periodic/1/2
Off, /s, /min, /h, /day
0A/0B/0C/0D/0E/0F/0G/0J/0K/0M/0N/0P
Within the recording span range (mm)
0A/0B/0C/0D/0E/0F/0G/0J/0K/0M/0N/0P
On/Off
Blank
K01
0A
1
Off
H
-
Off
101
0A
Periodic
Off
0A
Math > Alarm > Relay No.
Math > TLOG > CH
Math > TLOG > Timer No.
Math > TLOG > SUM scale
Math > Aux > Zone > CH
Math > Aux > Zone > Left, Right
*Math > Aux > Partial > CH
*Math > Aux > Partial > Partial
*Math > Aux > Partial > Expand
*Math > Aux > Partial > Bound
Math > Aux > Print out > CH
Math > Aux > Print out > Trend
Math > Aux > Print out > Periodic
Math > Aux > Tag > CH
Math > Aux > Tag > Tag
*Math > Aux > Alm delay T > CH
*Math > Aux > Alm delay T > Duration
Left: 0, Right: 100
0A
Off
50
1 to 99%
Within the recording span range
0A/0B/0C/0D/0E/0F/0G/0J/0K/0M/0N/0P
-
0A
On
On
0A
A to P
0A
10s
Dot Model On/Off
-
-
-
-
-
On/Off
0A/0B/0C/0D/0E/0F/0G/0J/0K/0M/0N/0P
7 characters or less
0A/0B/0C/0D/0E/0F/0G/0J/0K/0M/0N/0P
0 to 3600s
Setup Items in Basic Setting Mode and Their Default Values
Setup Item
Pen/Dot
Selectable Range or Selections
Default Value
Alarm > Diagnosis
Alarm > Reflash
Alarm > AND
-
-
-
On/Off
On/Off
Off
Off
None
None/I01/I01-I02/I01-I03/I01-I04/I01-I05
/I01-I06
Alarm > Act
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Energize/De_energize
Nonhold/Hold
Nonhold/Hold
01 to 15
01 to 15
Off/0.1% to 1.0%
Off/0.1% to 1.0%
Energize
Nonhold
Nonhold
01
01
0.5%
Off
Alarm > Behavior
Alarm > Indicator
Alarm > Increase
Alarm > Decrease
Alarm > Hysteresis
Alarm > M_Hysteresis
A/D > Integrate
-
Auto/50Hz/60Hz/100ms
Auto
Burnout > CH
Burnout > Burnout
-
-
01 to 06
Off/Up/Down
01
Off
RJC > CH
RJC > RJC
RJC > RJC > Volt
-
-
-
01 to 06
Internal/External
–20000 to 20000 µV
01
Internal
0 µV
Color > Channel
Color > Color
Dot Model 01 to 06
Dot Model Purple/Red/Green/Blue/Brown/Black
01: Purple, 02: Red,
03: Green, 04: Blue,
05: Brown, 06: Black
POC > POC
Pen Model On/Off
Off
Print > CH/Tag
Print > Channel
Print > Alarm
Print > Record On
Print > Chart speed
Print > Scale
-
CH/Tag
CH
On
On1
Off
On
On
On
Dot Model On/Off
-
-
-
-
On1/On2/Off
On/Off
On/Off
On/Off
Print > Pen color
Pen Model On/Off
Print1 > Periodic
Print1 > Ref. Time
Print1 > Interval
-
-
-
Auto/Manual
Auto
00:00
1h
Hour 0 to 23 (1 hour steps)
10min/15min/20min/30min/1h/2h/3h/4h
/6h/8h/12h/24h
Print1 > Mode
-
Inst/Report/Off
Inst
4-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.3 Menu Structure, Settings, and List of Default Values
Setup Item
Pen/Dot
Selectable Range or Selections
Default Value
Print2 > CH
Print2 > Mode
Print2 > SUM scale
-
-
-
01 to 06
AVE/MIX/SUM/MIN/MAX/INST
Off, /s, /min, /h, /day
01
AVE
Off
Bar graph > CH
Bar graph > Graph
-
-
01 to 06
Normal/Center
01
Normal
Keylock > Keylock
Keylock > Password
Keylock > RCD
Keylock > Feed
Keylock > Menu
Keylock > Disp Menu
Keylock > Alarm ACK
Keylock > Math
Keylock > Print out
Keylock > Message
Keylock > Buffer clear
Keylock > Periodic
Keylock > Pen exchange
Keylock > R. exchange
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Not/Use
Not
Numbers and spaces within 4 digits
Free/Lock
Free/Lock
Free/Lock
Free/Lock
Free/Lock
Free/Lock
Free/Lock
Free/Lock
Blank
Free
Free
Free
Free
Free
Free
Free
Free
Free
Free
Free
Free
4
Free/Lock
Free/Lock
Pen Model Free/Lock
Dot Model Free/Lock
Moving_AVE > Moving_AVE
Filter > Filter
Dot Model Not/Use
Pen Model Not/Use
Not
Not
Partial > Partial
-
-
-
-
-
Not/Use
Not
Language > Lang
English/Japanese
English
M.D.Y
C
Date format > Type
Temperature > Temp
Personalize > Add function > Bias
Personalize > Add function > SQRT low-cut -
Personalize > Add function > 1-5V low-cut
Personalize > Add function > Alarm delay
Y/M/D M/D/Y D/M/Y D.M.Y M.D.Y
C/F
Not/Use
Not/Use
Not/Use
Not/Use
Not
Use
Not
Not
-
-
Personalize > Time print > Alarm
Personalize > Time print > Message
Personalize > Time print > RCD On
Personalize > Time print > C.Speed
-
-
-
-
HH:MM, HH:MM:SS, M/D H:M, M/D H:M:S,
YMD H:M:S
HH:MM, HH:MM:SS, M/D H:M, M/D H:M:S,
YMD H:M:S, None
HH:MM, HH:MM:SS, M/D H:M, M/D H:M:S,
YMD H:M:S
HH:MM, HH:MM:SS, M/D H:M, M/D H:M:S,
YMD H:M:S
HH:MM
HH:MM
HH:MM
HH:MM
Setting initialization
Initialize > Mode
Initialize > Mode > Are you sure?
-
-
Setup+Set/Set
No/Yes
Setup+Set
No
Remote control function (/R1 option)
Remote > Remote No.
Remote > Remote No. > No.
-
-
1/2/3/4/5
1
Record On Off /Chart speed/Time adjust/
Math start stop/Math reset/Manual print/
Alarm ACK/Message1/Message2/Message3/
Message4/Message5/None
Record On/Off
Computation function (/M1 option)
Setup Item
Pen/Dot
Selectable Range or Selections
Default Value
Math > Timer (TLOG) > Timer No.
Math > Timer (TLOG) > Mode
Math > Timer (TLOG) > Interval (Relative)
-
-
-
1/2
1
Off/Relative/Absolute
10 min to 24 h (1 min steps)
10min/12min/15min/20min/30min/1h/2h/3h
/4h/6h/8h/12h/24h
Absolute
01:00
1h
Math > Timer (TLOG) > Interval (Absolute) -
Math > Timer (TLOG) > Ref. Time
Math > Timer (TLOG) > Reset
Math > Timer (TLOG) > Print
Math > Color > Channel
-
-
-
Hour 0 to 23 (1 hour steps)
On/Off
On/Off
00:00
On
On
Dot Model 0A/0B/0C/0D/0E/0F/0G/0J/0K/0M/0N/0P
0A
4-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.3 Menu Structure, Settings, and List of Default Values
Setup Item
Pen/Dot
Selectable Range or Selections
Default Value
Math > Color > Color
Dot Model Purple/Red/Green/Blue/Brown/Black
Purple: 0A/0G
Red: 0B/0J
Green: 0C/0K
Blue: 0D/0M
Brown: 0E/0N
Black: 0F/0P
1pen: 01, 2pen: 02,
3pen: 03, 4pen: 04,
0A
AVE
Off
0A
Normal
Math > Output pen > Pen ← CH
Pen Model Pen: 1 to 4, Channel: 01 to 04/0A to 0J
Math > Print2 > CH
Math > Print2 > Mode
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
0A/0B/0C/0D/0E/0F/0G/0J/0K/0M/0N/0P
AVE/MIX/SUM/MIN/MAX/INST
Off, /s, /min, /h, /day
0A/0B/0C/0D/0E/0F/0G/0J/0K/0M/0N/0P
Normal/Center
Math > Print2 > SUM scale
Math > Bar graph > CH
Math > Bar graph > Graph
Math > Error data > Error
Math > Error data > Over
+Over/–Over
Skip/Limit
+Over
Skip
RS-422A/485 communication interface function (/C3 option).
Setup Item
Pen/Dot
Selectable Range or Selections
Default Value
RS-422/485 > Address
RS-422/485 > Baud rate
RS-422/485 > Data length
RS-422/485 > parity
-
-
-
-
-
1 to 32
1
9600
8
Even
NORMAL
1200/2400/4800/9600/19200/38400
7/8
Odd/Even/None
RS-422/485 > Protocol
NORMAL/MODBUS
Ethernet communication interface function (/C7 option)
Setup Item
Pen/Dot
Selectable Range or Selections
Default Value
Ethernet > Host > Host
Ethernet > Host > Domain
Ethernet > Local IP > A
Ethernet > Local IP > M
Ethernet > Local IP > G
Ethernet > DNS > DNS
Ethernet > DNS > P
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
64 characters or less
64 characters or less
IP address
IP address (Subnet mask)
IP address (Default gateway)
On/Off
IP address (Primary DNS sever)
IP address (Secondary DNS sever)
Primary domain suffix
Secondary domain suffix
Use/Not
Blank
Blank
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
Off
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
Blank
Blank
Not
Admin
Admin and User1
are On
Ethernet > DNS > S
Ethernet > DNS > Suffix_P
Ethernet > DNS > Suffix_S
Ethernet > Login > Login
Ethernet > LoginSet > Level
Ethernet > LoginSet > Register
Admin/User1 to User6
On/Off
Ethernet > LoginSet > User
-
-
16 characters or less
4 characters or less
Admin: admin
User1 to 6: user1 to
user6
Administrator: 0
User1 to 6: 1 to 6
Off
Ethernet > LoginSet > Password
Ethernet > Timeout > Timeout
Ethernet > Timeout > Duration
Ethernet > K. Alive > Keep alive
-
-
-
On/Off
1 to 120 min
On/Off
1 min
On
Adjustment
Setup Item
Pen/Dot
Selectable Range or Selections
Default Value
P_Adj > P_Adj
Dot Model Hysteresis/Zero/Full
Pen Model Zero/Full
Pen Model 1/2/3/4
Hysteresis
Zero
1
P_Adj > Pen No.
Store
Setup Item
Pen/Dot
Selectable Range or Selections
Store/Abort
Default Value
End > End
-
Store
4-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.4 Function Setup Guide
This section explains the settings necessary to use various functions of the recorder.
Read the section corresponding to the function you wish to use.
Note
This section contains all the settings related to each item. If the desired setting is the same
as the default value, you do not have to set it.
Item
Description
Reference
Section
4
Date/Time setting
DST
Use Clock in Setting mode
5.5
Sets the date/time for switching between DST and standard time using
Aux > DST in Setting mode.
6.13
Setting initialization
Use Initialize in Basic Setting mode to initialize the settings of Setting mode
and Basic Setting mode to their default values.
7.17
Measuring input functions
Item
Description
Reference
Section
Input range of each channel
Set Range in Setting mode.
5.1
5.3
1-5V
• Unit
Use Unit in setting mode to set the unit after scaling.
• Low-cut
Use Personalize > Add function > 1-5V low-cut in Basic Setting mode and
select Use or Not.
7.15
5.1
If Use is selected, turn On/Off the low-cut function using Range in Setting mode.
If Not is selected, the Low-cut item does not appear in the Range setting.
Scaling
• Unit
5.3
Use Unit in setting mode to set the unit after scaling.
Square Root Computation • Unit
Use Unit in setting mode to set the unit after scaling.
5.3
• Low-cut
7.15
Use Personalize > Add function > SQRT low-cut in Basic Setting mode
and select Use or Not.
If Use is selected, set the low-cut value using Range in Setting mode.
If Not is selected, the Low-cut item does not appear in the Range setting.
5.1
Bias
Use Personalize > Add function > Bias in Basic Setting mode and select Use
or Not.
7.15
6.12
If Use is selected, set the bias value that is added to the input using Bias in
Setting mode. If Not is selected, the Bias item does not appear.
Filter (pen model)
Use Filter in Basic Setting mode and select Use or Not.
If Use is selected, set the filter time constant using Aux > Filter in Setting mode.
If Not is selected, the Aux > Filter item does not appear.
7.12
6.2
Moving average (dot model)
Use Moving_AVE in Basic Setting mode and select Use or Not.
If Use is selected, set the number of samples of moving average using Aux >
Moving_AVE in Setting mode.
7.11
6.3
If Not is selected, the Aux > Moving_AVE item does not appear.
RJC of TC input
Use RJC in Basic Setting mode to select whether to use the recorder’s
RJC function or an external RJC function.
7.4
7.3
Burnout detection function of TC input and 1-5V input
Use Burnout in Basic Setting mode to set the burnout detection function for
each channel.
Integration time of the A/D converter
7.2
Use A/D in Basic Setting mode to set the integration time of the A/D converter.
Temperature Unit
Select the temperature unit using Temperature in Basic Setting mode.
7.20
4-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.4 Function Setup Guide
Alarm functions
Item
Description
Reference
Section
Alarms for each channel
Use Alarm in Setting mode.
5.2
Delay high limit alarm/delay low limit alarm
• Alarm type
7.15
Use Personalize > Add function > Alarm delay in Basic Mode and select Use or Not.
If Use is selected, delay high limit alarm and delay low limit alarm become
selectable under Alarm > Type in Setting mode.
If Not is selected, alarm delay cannot be selected.
• Alarm delay time
5.2
6.10
Use Aux > Alm delay T in Setting mode to set the alarm delay time.
High limit on rate-of-change alarm/low limit on rate-of-change alarm
Use Alarm in Setting mode and set the channel to rate-of-change alarm.
5.2
Use Alarm > Increase in Basic Setting mode to set the interval of the high limit on 7.1
rate-of-change alarm; use Alarm > Decrease in Basic Setting mode to set the
interval of the low limit on rate-of-change alarm.
Use the alarm ACK operation
• Relay operation and display operation
Set Alarm > Behavior in Basic Setting mode to Hold and set Alarm > Indicator
to Hold.
7.1
• Executing the alarm ACK operation
3.12
Use FUNC > Alarm ACK in Operation mode to execute the release of the
alarm output.
Set a hysteresis on the alarm occurrence/release value of high limit alarm and low limit alarm
Use Alarm > Hysteresis in Basic Setting mode to set the hysteresis to be applied
to the high limit alarm and low limit alarm of measurement channels.
7.1
Likewise, use Alarm > M_Hysteresis to set the hysteresis to be applied to the high
limit alarm and low limit alarm of computation channels (/M1 option).
Change the alarm output relay operation
If Alarm > Act in Basic Setting mode set to De_energize, alarm output relay is
energized during normal operation and de-energized when an alarm occurs.
7.1
7.1
Diagnosis output
Use Alarm > Diagnosis in Basic Setting mode to set the function.
Recording functions
Item
Description
Reference
Section
Chart speed
Use Chart in Setting mode to set the chart speed.
5.4
Turn trend recording ON/OFF (dot model)
Use Aux > Print out in Setting mode to set whether to trend record on each
6.6
measurement channel.
Change the recording color of measurement channels (dot model).
Use Color in Basic Setting mode to set the recording color of measurement channels. 7.5
Record by compensating for the pen offset along the time axis (pen model)
Use Aux > POC in Setting mode to turn On/Off offset compensation.
Record by setting recording zone for each channel
Use Aux > Zone in Setting mode to set the recording zone for each channel.
Partial expanded recording Use Partial in Basic Setting mode and select Use or Not.
If Use is selected, set the display mode using Aux > Partial in Setting mode.
7.6
6.4
7.13
6.5
If Not is selected, the Aux > Partial item does not appear.
4-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.4 Function Setup Guide
Item
Description
Reference
Section
Periodic printout
Mar.31.2004!
15:50*
Channel number
or tag
Measured value
1
1.000V
-1.000V
2
0.000
1
RED
2.000
V
Scale
Recording color
50mm/h_
• Printout interval
7.8
Use Print 1 in Basic Setting mode to set the periodic printout interval.
• Type of measured values to be printed/disable periodic printout
Use Print1 in Basic Setting mode to set the type of measured values to be
printed.
7.8
4
You can select Inst, Report (statistical calculation value), or Off.
If Report is selected, use Print2 in Basic Setting mode to select the report
data type.
• Scale printout and recording color printout (pen model)
Use Print > Scale in Basic Setting mode to turn scale printout On/Off.
Use Print > Pen color in Basic Setting mode to turn pen color printout On/Off
(pen model).
• Turn On/Off periodic printout for each channel
Use Aux > Print out in Setting mode to enable/disable the periodic printout on
each measurement channel.
7.7
6.6
Channel/tag selection
Use Print > CH/Tag in Basic Setting mode to select whether to use channel
numbers or tags in printouts.
7.7
7.7
Alarm occurrence/release printout
• Turn printout On/Off
Use Print > Alarm in Basic Setting mode to select whether to print the alarm
occurrence and release, print only the alarm occurrence, or not print.
• Time printout format
7.16
Use Personalize > Time print > Alarm in Basic Setting mode to set the time
printout format when printing alarm occurrence/release.
Recording Start Printout
New chart speed printout
• Turn printout On/Off
Use Print > Record On in Basic Setting mode to enable/disable the recording
start printout.
• Time printout format
Use Personalize > Time print > RCD On in Basic Setting mode to set the time
printout format.
7.7
7.16
• Turn printout On/Off
7.7
Use Print > Chart speed in Basic Setting mode to set whether to print the new
chart speed when the chart speed is changed.
• Time printout format
7.16
Use Personalize > Time print > C. Speed in Basic Setting mode to set the time
printout format.
Message printout
• Set the message string
6.8
Use Aux > Message to set the message string to be printed.
• Time printout format
7.16
Use Personalize > Time print > Message in Basic Setting mode to set the time
printout format.
• Execute the message printout
Use FUNC key > Message in Operation mode to execute the message printout.
3.10
7.7
Tag
• Channel/tag selection
Use Print > CH/Tag in Basic Setting mode to select whether to use channel
numbers or tags in printouts.
• Tag name
6.7
Use Aux > Tag in Setting mode to set the tag name.
Date format
Use Date format > Type in Basic Setting mode to set the printout/display format
of the date.
7.19
4-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.4 Function Setup Guide
Display functions
Item
Description
Reference
Section
Display brightness
Bar graph display mode
Display type
Use Aux > Brightness > Display in Setting mode to set the display brightness.
Use Bar graph in Basic Setting mode to set the bar graph display mode.
Assigns the display type on the data display setup screen.
6.11
7.9
Chapter 8
7.19
Date format
Same as the Date format in “Recording functions.”
Other functions
Item
Description
Reference
Section
Key lock
• Target keys and password
7.10
Use Keylock in Basic Setting mode to set the keys to be key-locked and the
password.
• Enable the key lock
3.13
Use FUNC key > Keylock in Operation mode to turn key lock ON/OFF.
Language
Use Language in Basic Setting mode to set the display and recording language.
Use Aux > Brightness > Light in Setting mode to set the internal light brightness.
7.14
6.11
Internal light brightness
Computation function (/M1 option)
Item
Description
Reference
Section
Computing equation and recording span
Use Math > Formula in Setting mode to set the computing equation and
9.2
recording span for each channel.
TLOG computation
If TLOG computation is selected, use Math > Timer in Basic Setting mode to
set the timer operation
Use Math > TLOG > Timer No. in Setting mode to set the timer used on each
computation channel.
9.12
9.6
Unit
Use Math > Unit in Setting mode to set the unit for each channel.
9.3
Constants
Use Math > Constant in Setting mode to define constants to be used in the
computing equations.
9.4
9.5
Alarms
Use Math > Alarm in Setting mode to set the alarm for each channel.
• Delay high limit alarm/delay low limit alarm
• Alarm type
7.15
9.11
Use Personalize > Add function > Alarm delay in Basic Mode and select
Use or Not (common with measurement channels).
If Use is selected, delay high limit alarm and delay low limit alarm become
selectable under Math > Alarm > Type in Setting mode. If Not is selected,
alarm delay cannot be selected.
• Alarm delay time
Use Math > Aux > Alm delay T in Setting mode to set the alarm delay time.
Record by setting recording zone for each channel
Use Math > Aux > Zone in Setting mode to set the recording zone for each channel. 9.7
Partial expanded recording Use Partial in Basic Setting mode and select Use or Not.
7.13
If Use is selected, set the display mode using Math > Aux > Partial in Setting mode. 9.8
If Not is selected, the Math > Aux > Partial item does not appear.
Change the recording color (dot model)
Use Color in Basic Setting mode to set the recording color of each computation
channel.
9.13
Recording pen assignment (pen model)
Assigns measurement/computation channels to the recording pens.
Turn trend recording ON/OFF (dot model)
9.14
Use Math > Aux > Print out > Trend in Setting mode to set whether to trend record 9.9
each computation channel.
4-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.4 Function Setup Guide
Item
Description
Reference
Section
Periodic printout
Mar.31.2004!
15:50*
Channel number
or tag
1
A
1.000V
-100.00UNIT
Computed value
Scale
-200.00
A
RED
200.00
UNIT
Recording color
50mm/h_
• Type of computed values to be printed/disable periodic printout
Common with measurement channels.
7.8
• If Report is selected, use Math > Print2 in Basic Setting mode to select
the report data type.
• Printout interval
9.15
9.6
4
Set Math > TLOG > Timer No. in Setting mode to Periodic.
The interval is common with measurement channels.
• Turn On/Off periodic printout for each channel
Use Math > Aux > Print out > Periodic in Setting mode to enable/disable the
periodic printout for each computation channel.
• Scale printout and recording color printout (pen model)
Common with measurement channels.
9.9
7.7
Periodic printout using TLOG timer (dedicated to computation channels)
Mar.31.2004!
15:50*
TAG-00A
B
Channel number
or tag
100.00UNITA
1.0
Computed value
-200.00
TAG-00A
RED
200.00
UNITA
Scale
Recording color
Timer number
TLOG1
• Use Math > Timer (TLOG) in Basic Setting mode to set the printout interval.
9.12
• Use Math > Timer (TLOG) > Print in Basic Setting mode to turn the printout On. 9.12
• Use Math > Aux > Print out > Periodic in Setting mode to enable/disable the
periodic printout for each computation channel.
• Set Math > TLOG > Timer No. in Setting mode to set the timer used on each
computation channel.
9.9
9.6
• Scale printout and recording color (pen model)
Common with periodic printout.
Alarm occurrence/release printout
Common with measurement channels.
7.7
7.7
Tag
• Channel/tag selection
Common with measurement channels.
• Tag name
Use Math > Aux > Tag in Setting mode to set the tag name.
9.10
9.16
Bar graph display mode
Use Math > Bar graph in Basic Setting mode to set the bar graph display mode.
Procedure when computed results are in error
Use Math > Error data in Basic Setting mode to set the procedure taken when the 9.17
computed results are in error.
Remote control function (/R1 option)
Item Description
Reference
Section
Remote control function (/R1 option)
• Assign functions to the remote control input terminals
7.18
6.9
Use Remote in Basic Setting mode to set the function to be assigned to the
remote control input terminal.
• Secondary chart speed
If “chart speed switching” is assigned, use Aux > Chart 2 in Setting mode to
set the secondary chart speed.
4-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 Frequently Used Setup Operations (Setting Mode)
5.1 Setting the Input Range
Input range is set for each measurement channel. Set unused channels to Skip.
•
The input range cannot be changed on models with the computation function (/M1
option) when computation is in progress.
•
If you change the input range, set the bias, alarm, and partial expanded recording
again.
Procedure
TC, RTD, and DC Voltage
MENU
1.
2.
3.
Hold down the
Press the key with Range shown on the screen.
Set each item and press the key.
Use the key or SHIFT + key to select values.
key for 3 seconds to enter Setting mode.
5
For the procedure on how to enter values or characters, see section 4.2.
If you press the ESC key in the middle of the operation, the settings entered up
to then are cancelled, and the display returns to a higher level menu.
When the Setting complete screen appears, do either of the following:
4.
5.
Press the
key to set other channels.
If you are done, press the ESC key.
MENU
Hold down the
key for 3 seconds to return to Operation mode.
Set=Range
Set the channel range.
Select TC, RTD, or Volt.
Select the range type.
CH=01-01
First channel
Last channel
Mode=TC
Range=R
Span_L= 0.0
Span_R= 1760.0
Select the left span value.
Select the right span value.
The new setting takes effect.
01-01 Channel
Setting complete
ESC/?
5-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.1 Setting the Input range
Description
• Selectable Range of Input Range, Span Left, and Span Right
The input range, span left, and span right can be set in the range shown below. Span
left and span right cannot be set to the same value.
DC voltage (Volt)
Range Type
20 mV
60 mV
200 mV
2 V
Selectable Span Range
–20.00 to 20.00 mV
–60.00 to 60.00 mV
–200.0 to 200.0 mV
–2.000 to 2.000 V
–6.000 to 6.000 V
–20.00 to 20.00 V
–50.00 to 50.00 V
6 V
20 V
50 V
Thermocouple (TC)
Range Type
Selectable Span Range (°C)
0.0 to 1760.0 °C
Selectable Span Range (°F)
32 to 3200 °F
R
S
0.0 to 1760.0 °C
32 to 3200 °F
B
0.0 to 1820.0 °C
32 to 3308 °F
K
−200.0 to 1370.0 °C
−200.0 to 800.0 °C
−200.0 to 1100.0 °C
−200.0 to 400.0 °C
0.0 to 1300.0 °C
−328 to 2498 °F
−328.0 to 1472.0 °F
−328.0 to 2012.0 °F
−328.0 to 752.0 °F
32 to 2372 °F
E
J
T
N
W
L
0.0 to 2315.0 °C
32 to 4199 °F
−200.0 to 900.0 °C
−200.0 to 400.0 °C
0.0 to 2400.0 °C
−328.0 to 1652.0 °F
−328.0 to 752.0 °F
32 to 4352 °F
U
WRe
RTD
Range Type
PT (Pt100)
Selectable Span Range (°C)
−200.0 to 600.0 °C
Selectable Span Range (°F)
−328.0 to 1112.0 °F
JPT (JPt100)
−200.0 to 550.0 °C
−328.0 to 1022.0 °F
RTD
Range Type
PT (Pt100)
Selectable Span Range (°C)
−200.0 to 600.0 °C
Selectable Span Range (°F)
−328.0 to 1112.0 °F
JPT (JPt100)
−200.0 to 550.0 °C
−328.0 to 1022.0 °F
/N1 Option
Selections
/N3 Option
Input Type
Cu10 (GE)
Cu10 (L&N)
Cu10 (WEED)
Cu10 (BAILEY)
Cu10: a = 0.00392 at 20°
Cu10: a = 0.00393 at 20°
Cu25*: a = 0.00425 at 0°
Selections
PR
PLATI
NiMo
W/WRe
N2
Kp
Pt4
Pt3
Input Type
PR40-20
PLATINEL
NiNiMo
W/WRe26
Type N (AWG14)
Kp vs Au7Fe
Pt25
Note
Thermo
couple
Cu1
Cu2
Cu3
Cu4
Cu5
Cu6
Cu25
C
C
C
RTD
Pt50
Ni1
Ni2
Ni3
Ni100 (SAMA)
Ni100 (DIN)
Ni120
J263
Cu8
Cu10
J263*B
Cu53
Cu100: a = 0.00425 at 0°C
5-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.1 Setting the Input range
Linear Scaling
Set=Range
CH=01-01
Set the channel range.
Last channel
First channel
Select Scale.
Mode=Scale
Select Volt, TC, RTD, or DI.
Type=Volt
Range=2V
Select the range type.
Set the left span value.
Set the right span value.
5
Span_L= -2.000
Span_R= 2.000
Scale_L= 0.00
Scale_R= 200.00
Set the left scale value.
Set the right scale value.
The new setting takes effect.
01-01 Channel
Setting complete
ESC/?
Description
• Scale Left and Scale Right
Selectable range (mantissa): –20000 to 30000
Decimal position: XXXXX, XXXX.X, XXX.XX, XX.XXX, X.XXXX
The decimal position is the position specified by scale left.
Note
The displayable/printable range of scale values is –19999 to 30000 excluding the decimal.
5-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.1 Setting the Input range
Delta Computation
Set=Range
Set the channel range.
Select Delta.
CH=02-02
First channel
Last channel
Mode=Delta
Set the reference channel.
Set the left span value.
Set the right span value.
The new setting takes effect.
Ref.CH=01
Span_L= -2.000
Span_R= 2.000
02-02 Channel
Setting complete
ESC/?
Description
• Reference Channel
The reference channel must be a channel that is smaller in channel number than the
channel being set.
• Span Left and Span Right
The range type is set to the same type as the reference channel. The span left and
span right can be set in the range shown below. Span left and span right cannot be
set to the same value.
Input Type
Range Type
Selectable Span Range (°C) Selectable Span Range (°F)
DC voltage
(Volt)
20 mV
60 mV
200 mV
2 V
6 V
20 V
–20.00 to 20.00 mV
–60.00 to 60.00 mV
–200.0 to 200.0 mV
–2.000 to 2.000 V
–6.000 to 6.000 V
–20.00 to 20.00 V
–50.00 to 50.00 V
50 V
Thermocouple R
−1760.0 to 1760.0 °C
–1760.0 to 1760.0 °C
–1820.0 to 1820.0 °C
–1570.0 to 1570.0 °C
–1000.0 to 1000.0 °C
–1300.0 to 1300.0 °C
–600.0 to 600.0 °C
–1300.0 to 1300.0 °C
–1999.9 to 2315.0 °C
–1100.0 to 1100.0 °C
–600.0 to 600.0 °C
–3168 to 3168 °F
–3168 to 3168 °F
–3276 to 3276 °F
–2826 to 2826 °F
–1800 to 1800 °F
–1999.9 to 2340.0 °F
–1080.0 to 1080.0 °F
–2340 to 2340 °F
–4167 to 4167 °F
–1980 to 1980 °F
–1080.0 to 1080.0 °F
–4320 to 4320 °F
(TC)
S
B
K
E
J
T
N
W
L
U
WRe
–1999.9 to 2400.0 °C
RTD
PT (Pt100)
–800.0 to 800.0 °C
–1440.0 to 1440.0 °F
JPT (JPt100)
–750.0 to 750.0 °C
–1350.0 to 1350.0 °F
5-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.1 Setting the Input range
ON/OFF Input
Set=Range
Set the channel range.
CH=01-01
First channel
Last channel
MOde=DI
Select DI.
Range=Level
Span_L=0
Span_R=1
Select Cont or Level.
Set the left span value.
Set the right span value.
The new setting takes effect.
5
01-01 Channel
Setting complete
ESC/?
Description
• Selectable Range Type, Span Left, and Span Right
The range type, span left, and span right can be set in the range shown below. Span
left and span right cannot be set to the same value.
Range Type
Level
Selectable Span Values
0: Less than 2.4 V, 1: 2.4 V or higher, within ±6 V
0: Open, 1: Closed
Contact
5-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.1 Setting the Input range
1-5V Input
Set=Range
Set the channel range.
Select 1-5V.
CH=01-01
First channel
Last channel
Mode=1-5V
Span_L= 1,000
Span_R= 5,000
Scale_L= 0.00
Scale_R= 200.00
Set the left span value.
Set the right span value.
Set the left scale value.
Set the right scale value.
(Select the right scale value.)
Low-cut=Off
Turn On or Off the low-cut function.
The new setting takes effect.
01-01 Channel
Setting complete
ESC/?
Description
• Span Left and Span Right
Selectable span left range: 0.8 to 1.2 V
Selectable span right range: 4.8 to 5.2 V
• Scale Left and Scale Right
Selectable range (mantissa): –20000 to 30000
Decimal position: XXXXX, XXXX.X, XXX.XX, XX.XXX, X.XXXX
The decimal position is the position specified by scale left.
Make sure that scale left is less than scale right.
• Low-cut
On: Cuts values below 0% of the recording span (set to 0% (scale left value)).
Off: Does not apply the low-cut function.
Note
•
The displayable/printable range of scale values is –19999 to 30000 excluding the decimal.
If the leftmost value of the scale is set to –20000 (excluding the decimal), the value when the
low-cut function is applied is displayed as “–Over.”
•
5-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.1 Setting the Input range
Square Root Computation
Set=Range
Set the channel range.
CH=01-01
First channel
Last channel
Select SQRT.
Mode=SQRT
Range=2V
Select the range type of DC voltage.
20 mV, 60 mV, 200 mV, 2 V, 6 V, 20 V,
or 50 V
Span_L= -2.000
Span_R= 2.000
Scale_L= 0.00
Scale_R= 200.00
Low-cut=Off
Set the left span value.
Set the right span value.
Set the left scale value.
5
Set the right scale value.
Turn On or Off the low-cut function.
Set the low-cut point.
Low-cut point=0.0
0.0 to 5.0% of the recording span, 0.1 steps.
The new setting takes effect.
01-01 Channel
Setting complete
ESC/?
Description
• Input Type in Which Square Root Computation Can Be Performed
Square root computation can be performed when set to DC voltage input.
• Span Left and Span Right
Same as the selectable span range of the DC voltage input.
Make sure that span left is less than span right.
• Scale Left and Scale Right
Selectable range (mantissa): –20000 to 30000
Decimal position: XXXXX, XXXX.X, XXX.XX, XX.XXX, X.XXXX
The decimal position is the position specified by scale left.
Make sure that scale left is less than scale right.
• Low-cut and Low-cut Point
If low-cut is set to On, set the low-cut point.
Selectable range of the low-cut point: 0.0 to 5.0% of the recording span
Values below the low-cut point is set to 0% (scale left value) of the recording span.
5-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.1 Setting the Input range
Note
•
The displayable/printable range of scale values is –19999 to 30000 excluding the decimal.
If the leftmost value of the scale is set to –20000 (excluding the decimal) and the low-cut
value is set to –20000, the value when the low-cut function is applied is displayed as “–Over.”
•
Skip (Unused Channels)
Set=Range
Set the channel range.
CH=01-01
First channel
Last channel
Mode=Skip
Select Skip.
The new setting takes effect.
01-01 Channel
Setting complete
ESC/?
Note
Do not use channels set to skip as a reference channel of delta computations or in computing
equations of the computation function (/M1 option).
5-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.2 Setting the Alarm
The alarm is set for each channel.
If you change the input range, set the alarm again.
Procedure
MENU
1.
2.
Hold down the
Press the
key.
key for 3 seconds to enter Setting mode.
key to select Alarm and then press the
key or SHIFT +
3.
Set each item and press the
Use the key or SHIFT +
key.
key to select values.
For the procedure on how to enter values or characters, see section 4.2.
If you press the ESC key in the middle of the operation, the settings entered up
to then are cancelled, and the display returns to a higher level menu.
When the Setting complete screen appears, do either of the following:
5
4.
5.
Press the
key to set other channels.
If you are done, press the ESC key.
MENU
Hold down the
key for 3 seconds to return to Operation mode.
Set=Alarm
Set the channel range.
CH=01-01
First channel
Last channel
Level=1
Select the level number between 1 and 4.
Select On to set the alarm.
When set to On, the settings below can
be entered.
Alarm=Off
Type=H
Select the alarm type.
Value= 1.000
Relay=Off
Relay_No.=I01
Select the value used to turn On the alarm.
Turn relay On when outputting alarms on
the relay. This setting is valid only on
models with the /A1, /A2, or /A3 option.
Specify the alarm relay No.
The new setting takes effect.
01-01 CH/level 1
Setting complete
ESC/?
5-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.2 Setting the Alarm
Explanation
Channel Range
The only case when an alarm can be set on multiple channels simultaneously is when
the channels are set to the same range type (for example channel 01 and 02 are set to 2
V range). For channels on which scaling is set, the channels must be set to the same
range type, same span values, and same scaling values.
Alarm Type
Symbol
Name
Note
H
L
h
High limit alarm
Low limit alarm
Difference high limit alarm
Can be specified on channels set to
delta computation.
l
Difference low limit alarm
Can be specified on channels set to
delta computation.
R
r
High limit on rate-of-change alarm
Low limit on rate-of-change alarm
Delay high limit alarm*
T
t
Delay low limit alarm*
*
Selectable only when the alarm delay function is enabled. See section 7.15.
Note
On channels set to delta computation, alarms can be detected on the values illustrated in the
figure below.
Alarm on a channel set to delta computation
Alarm
H, L, R, r, T, and t
Alarm
h and l
Input value
Measured value
–
Measured value on the reference channel
If high limit on rate-of-change alarm or low limit on rate-of-change alarm is specified, set
the interval over which the rate-of-change is calculated.
If delay high limit alarm or delay low limit alarm is specified, set the delay time.
<Related Topics>
Setting the interval of the high limit on rate-of-change alarm or low limit on rate-of-
change alarm: Section 7.1
Setting the delay time of delay high limit alarm or delay low limit alarm: Section 6.10
Enabling the alarm delay function: Section 7.15
Setting the alarm hysteresis: Section 7.1
Alarm Value
• High Limit Alarm/Low Limit Alarm and Delay High Limit Alarm/Delay Low Limit
Alarm
The following values can be specified.
•
For DC voltage, TC, and RTD input: Values within the measurable range in the
specified range (example: –2.000 to 2.000 V for the 2 V range).
For ON/OFF input (DI): 0 or 1.
•
•
For linear scaling (1-5V, scaling, and square root): A value within –5 to 105% of the
scaling span except within the range of –20000 to 30000 (excluding the decimal
point).
5-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.2 Setting the Alarm
Note
For channels whose the leftmost value of the scale is set to –20000 (excluding the decimal),
the alarm value of –20000 is invalid. Set a value that is greater than or equal –19999.
• Difference High Limit Alarm/Difference Low Limit Alarm
Values in the measurable range can be specified. Measurable range refers to
“Selectable Span Range” in the table on page 5-4.
• High Limit on Rate-of-Change Alarm/Low Limit on Rate-of-Change Alarm
A value greater than or equal to 1 digit can be specified. For example, 1 digit
corresponds 0.001 for the 2 V range (measurable range: –2.000 to 2.000 V). The
maximum value that can be specified is the width of the measurable range (4.000 V
for 2 V range).
For ON/OFF input, only “1” can be specified.
Relay No.
5
The selectable relay numbers are listed below.
I01 and I02 on the /A1 option
I01, I02, I03, and I04 on the /A2 option
I01, I02, I03, I04, I05, and I06 on the /A3 option
5-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.3 Setting the Unit on Scaled Channels
Units are set on channels whose input range is set to Scaling, 1-5V, or SQRT.
Procedure
MENU
1.
2.
Hold down the
Press the
key.
key for 3 seconds to enter Setting mode.
key to select Unit and then press the
key or SHIFT +
3.
Set each item and press the
Use the key or SHIFT +
key.
key to select values.
For the procedure on how to enter values or characters, see section 4.2.
If you press the ESC key in the middle of the operation, the settings entered up
to then are cancelled, and the display returns to a higher level menu.
When the Setting complete screen appears, do either of the following:
4.
5.
Press the
key to set other channels.
If you are done, press the ESC key.
MENU
Hold down the
key for 3 seconds to return to Operation mode.
Set=Unit
Set the channel range.
Set the unit.
CH=01-01
First channel
Last channel
Unit=
01-01 Channel
Setting complete
The new setting takes effect.
ESC/?
Explanation
Characters That Can Be Used for Units
A unit is set using up to six characters.
The available characters are as follows:
Alphabet, numbers, symbols (%, #, °, @, +, –, *, /, (, ), µ, Ω, 2, 3, .), and space
5-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.4 Changing the Chart Speed
This section explains the details of changing the chart speed.
Procedure
MENU
1.
2.
Hold down the
Press the
key.
key for 3 seconds to enter Setting mode.
key or SHIFT +
key to select Chart and then press the
3.
Set the chart speed and press the
Use the key or SHIFT +
key.
key to select values.
For the procedure on how to enter values or characters, see section 4.2.
If you press the ESC key in the middle of the operation, the settings entered up
to then are cancelled, and the display returns to a higher level menu.
When the Setting complete screen appears, do either of the following:
4.
5.
5
To correct the setting, press the
If you are done, press the ESC key.
MENU
key.
Hold down the
key for 3 seconds to return to Operation mode.
Set=Chart
mm/h= 20
Set the chart speed.
The new setting takes effect.
Chart speed
Setting complete
ESC/?
Explanation
Chart Speed
• Pen Model
The chart speed can be selected from 82 settings shown below.
Chart speed on the pen model (unit: mm/h)
5
24
6
25
8
30
9
32
10
36
12
40
15
45
16
48
18
50
20
54
60
64
72
75
80
90
96
100
120
125
135
320
720
1500
3600
150
360
750
1600
4000
160
375
800
1800
4320
180
400
900
2000
4500
200
450
960
2160
4800
225
480
1000
2250
5400
240
500
1080
2400
6000
250
270
300
540
600
675
1200
2700
7200
1350
2880
8000
1440
3000
9000
10800 12000
• Dot Model
The chart speed can be set in the range of 1 to 1500 mm/h in 1 mm steps.
5-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.5 Setting the Date/Time
This section explains the details of setting the date/time.
Procedure
MENU
1.
2.
Hold down the
Press the
key.
key for 3 seconds to enter Setting mode.
key or SHIFT +
key to select Clock and then press the
3.
Set the date and time and press the
key.
Use the
key or SHIFT +
key to select values.
For the procedure on how to enter values or characters, see section 4.2.
If you press the ESC key in the middle of the operation, the settings entered up
to then are cancelled, and the display returns to a higher level menu.
When the Setting complete screen appears, do either of the following:
4.
5.
To correct the setting, press the
If you are done, press the ESC key.
MENU
key.
Hold down the
key for 3 seconds to return to Operation mode.
Set=Clock
Set the time.
04/02/17 10:39:47
day
month
year
Clock
Setting complete
The new setting takes effect.
ESC/?
Explanation
Date/Time
The year is set with the lower two digits.
Values in the range 80 and 99 correspond to 1980 to 1999.
Recorders with Version 1.02 or Earlier
The following is the setting menu.
04/02/17 10:39:47
Set the time.
DST=Summer
Select Summer or Winter, whichever the set time belongs to.
5-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 Setup Operations for Convenient Functions (Setting Mode)
6.1 Setting the Trend Recording Interval (Dot
Model).
This section explains the details of setting the trend recording interval (dot printing
interval) on the dot model.
Procedure
MENU
1.
2.
3.
4.
Hold down the
Press the
key for 3 seconds to enter Setting mode.
key or SHIFT +
key or SHIFT +
key to select Aux and then press the
key.
key.
Press the
key to select Trend and then press the
Set the dot printing interval and press the
Use the key or SHIFT + key to select values.
For the procedure on how to enter values or characters, see section 4.2.
key.
If you press the ESC key in the middle of the operation, the settings entered up
to then are cancelled, and the display returns to a higher level menu.
When the Setting complete screen appears, do either of the following:
5.
6.
To correct the setting, press the
If you are done, press the ESC key.
MENU
key.
6
Hold down the
key for 3 seconds to return to Operation mode.
Set=Aux
Aux=Trend
Mode=Auto
Select the trend recording interval
mode.
The new setting takes effect.
Trend Interval
Setting complete
ESC/?
Explanation
Mode
Auto: The trend recording interval is set according to the chart speed in the range of 10
s to 90 s so that the dots do not overlap. The interval is displayed on the System
display (see page 12-9).
Fix:
The trend recording interval is fixed to 10 s/6 dots. On models with the
computation function (/M1 option), the dot printing interval varies depending on
the number of measurement and computation channels to be trend recorded.
Number of channels Trend recording
to be recorded
6 or less
7 to 12
interval
10 s
15 s
13 to 18
20 s
Dot
When set to Auto
When set to Fix
6-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.2 Setting the Filter (Pen Model)
This section explains the details of setting a filter on the measurement channels on the
pen model.
Procedure
MENU
1.
2.
Hold down the
key for 3 seconds to enter Setting mode.
Press the
key.
key or SHIFT +
key to select Aux and then press the
3.
4.
Press the
key.
key or SHIFT +
key to select Filter and then press the
Set each item and press the
Use the key or SHIFT +
key.
key to select values.
For the procedure on how to enter values or characters, see section 4.2.
If you press the ESC key in the middle of the operation, the settings entered up
to then are cancelled, and the display returns to a higher level menu.
When the Setting complete screen appears, do either of the following:
5.
6.
Press the
key to set other channels.
If you are done, press the ESC key.
MENU
Hold down the
key for 3 seconds to return to Operation mode.
Set=Aux
Aux=Filter
CH=01-01
Set the channel range.
First channel
Last channel
Set the filter time constant.
The new setting takes effect.
Resp.Time=Off
01-01 Channel
Setting complete
ESC/?
Explanation
Filter Time Constant
The time constant is selectable from 2 s, 5 s, and 10 s. Select Off when not using the
filter.
<Related Topics>
Enabling the filter function: Section 7.12
6-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.3 Setting the Moving Average (Dot Model)
This section explains the details of setting the moving average function on measurement
channels on the dot model.
Procedure
MENU
1.
2.
Hold down the
Press the
key.
key for 3 seconds to enter Setting mode.
key or SHIFT +
key to select Aux and then press the
3.
4.
Press the
key or SHIFT +
key to select Moving_AVE and then press
the
Set each item and press the
Use the key or SHIFT +
key.
key.
key to select values.
For the procedure on how to enter values or characters, see section 4.2.
If you press the ESC key in the middle of the operation, the settings entered up
to then are cancelled, and the display returns to a higher level menu.
When the Setting complete screen appears, do either of the following:
5.
6.
Press the
key to set other channels.
6
If you are done, press the ESC key.
MENU
Hold down the
key for 3 seconds to return to Operation mode.
Set=Aux
Aux=Moving_AVE
CH=01-01
Set the channel range.
First channel
Last channel
Set the number of samples of the
moving average. Moving average is
not performed when Off is selected.
No.of samples=Off
The new setting takes effect.
01-01 Channel
Setting complete
ESC/?
Explanation
The Number of Samples of Moving Average
The number of samples can be set to a integer between 2 and 16. Select Off when not
using the moving average function.
<Related Topics>
Enabling the moving average function: Section 7.11
6-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.4 Setting Recording Zones for Each Channel
(Zone Recording)
This section explains the details of setting the recording zone for each measurement
channel.
Procedure
MENU
1.
2.
Hold down the
Press the
key.
key for 3 seconds to enter Setting mode.
key or SHIFT +
key to select Aux and then press the
3.
4.
Press the
key.
key or SHIFT +
key to select Zone and then press the
Set each item and press the
Use the key or SHIFT +
key.
key to select values.
For the procedure on how to enter values or characters, see section 4.2.
If you press the ESC key in the middle of the operation, the settings entered up
to then are cancelled, and the display returns to a higher level menu.
When the Setting complete screen appears, do either of the following:
5.
6.
Press the
key to set other channels.
If you are done, press the ESC key.
MENU
Hold down the
key for 3 seconds to return to Operation mode.
Set=Aux
Aux=Zone
CH=01-01
Set the channel range.
Last channel
First channel
Set the leftmost value of the
recording zone.
Left= 0
Right=100
Set the rightmost value of the
recording zone.
The new setting takes effect.
01-01 Channel
Setting complete
ESC/?
Explanation
Zone
The recording zone can be set in the following range.
Leftmost position: 0 mm to 95 mm
Rightmost position: 5 mm to 100 mm
Set a larger value for the rightmost position than the leftmost position.
Set at least 5 mm for the zone width.
Note
If the zone is set to a value less than 40 mm, scale printout of periodic printout cannot be
executed.
6-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.5 Setting the Partial Expanded Recording
This section explains the details of expanding a section of the recording range.
If you change the input range, set the partial expanded recording again.
Procedure
MENU
1.
2.
Hold down the
Press the
key.
key for 3 seconds to enter Setting mode.
key or SHIFT +
key to select Aux and then press the
3.
4.
Press the
key.
key or SHIFT +
key to select Partial and then press the
Set each item and press the
Use the key or SHIFT +
key.
key to select values.
For the procedure on how to enter values or characters, see section 4.2.
If you press the ESC key in the middle of the operation, the settings entered up
to then are cancelled, and the display returns to a higher level menu.
When the Setting complete screen appears, do either of the following:
5.
6.
Press the
key to set other channels.
6
If you are done, press the ESC key.
MENU
Hold down the
key for 3 seconds to return to Operation mode.
Set=Aux
Aux=Partial
CH=01-01
Set the channel range.
First channel
Last channel
Partial=Off
Select On to use the partial expanded
recording function.
Expand=50
Set the boundary position as a
percentage where the recording span
is assumed to be 100%.
Boundary= 0.000
Set the boundary value within the
recording span.
The new setting takes effect.
01-01 Channel
Setting complete
ESC/?
Explanation
Expand
Set a value between 1 and 99.
<Related Topics>
Enabling the partial expanded recording function: Section 7.13
6-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.6 Turning Trend Recording (Dot Model) and
Periodic Printout ON/OFF for Each Channel
This section explains the details of setting the trend recording and periodic printout for
each measurement channel.
The following settings can be entered for each channel on the dot model.
•
•
Turn trend recording ON/OFF.
Turn the printing of measured values ON/OFF during periodic printout.
The following setting can be entered for each channel on the pen model.
•
Turn the printing of measured values ON/OFF during periodic printout.
Procedure
MENU
1.
2.
Hold down the
Press the
key.
key for 3 seconds to enter Setting mode.
key or SHIFT +
key to select Aux and then press the
3.
4.
Press the
key.
key or SHIFT +
key to select Print out and then press the
Set each item and press the
Use the key or SHIFT +
key.
key to select values.
For the procedure on how to enter values or characters, see section 4.2.
If you press the ESC key in the middle of the operation, the settings entered up
to then are cancelled, and the display returns to a higher level menu.
When the Setting complete screen appears, do either of the following:
5.
6.
Press the
key to set other channels.
If you are done, press the ESC key.
MENU
Hold down the
key for 3 seconds to return to Operation mode.
Set=Aux
Aux=Print out
CH=01-01
Set the channel range.
First channel
Last channel
Trend=On
Turn trend recording On/Off.
Select whether to print the measured
values during periodic printout (On/Off).
Periodic=On
01-01 Channel
Setting complete
The new setting takes effect.
ESC/?
Explanation
Trend Recording (Dot Model)
On: Turns On the trend recording of the specified channel.
Periodic Printout
On: Turns On the printing of the measured values of the specified channel during
periodic printout.
6-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.7 Setting Tags on Channels
This section explains the details of setting tags to measurement channels.
Procedure
MENU
1.
2.
Hold down the
Press the
key.
key for 3 seconds to enter Setting mode.
key or SHIFT +
key to select Aux and then press the
3.
4.
Press the
key.
key or SHIFT +
key to select Tag and then press the
Set each item and press the
Use the key or SHIFT +
key.
key to select values.
For the procedure on how to enter values or characters, see section 4.2.
If you press the ESC key in the middle of the operation, the settings entered up
to then are cancelled, and the display returns to a higher level menu.
When the Setting complete screen appears, do either of the following:
5.
6.
Press the
key to set other channels.
If you are done, press the ESC key.
6
MENU
Hold down the
key for 3 seconds to return to Operation mode.
Set=Aux
Aux=Tag
CH=01-01
Set the channel range.
Set the tag.
First channel
Last channel
Tag=
01-01 Channel
Setting complete
The new setting takes effect.
ESC/?
Explanation
Characters That Can Be Used for Tags
Set the tag using up to 7 characters.
The available characters are as follows:
Alphabet, numbers, symbols (%, #, °, @, +, –, *, /, (, ), µ, Ω, 2, 3, .), and space
<Related Topics>
Printing tags in place of channel numbers: Section 7.7
6-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.8 Setting the Message String
This section explains the details of setting the message strings to be printed on the chart
paper. Up to five message strings can be registered.
Procedure
MENU
1.
2.
Hold down the
Press the
key.
key for 3 seconds to enter Setting mode.
key or SHIFT +
key to select Aux and then press the
3.
4.
Press the
key.
key or SHIFT +
key to select Message and then press the
Set each item and press the
Use the key or SHIFT +
key.
key to select values.
For the procedure on how to enter values or characters, see section 4.2.
If you press the ESC key in the middle of the operation, the settings entered up
to then are cancelled, and the display returns to a higher level menu.
When the Setting complete screen appears, do either of the following:
5.
6.
To correct the setting, press the
If you are done, press the ESC key.
MENU
key.
Hold down the
key for 3 seconds to return to Operation mode.
Set=Aux
Aux=Message
Message No.=1
Select the message No.
Set message string.
CHR:A-Z
Message 1
Setting complete
The new setting takes effect.
ESC/?
Explanation
Characters That Can Be Used for Messages
Set the message using up to 16 characters.
The available characters are as follows:
Alphabet, numbers, symbols (%, #, °, @, +, –, *, /, (, ), µ, Ω, 2, 3, .), and space
<Related Topics>
Printing messages: Section 3.10
6-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.9 Setting the Secondary Chart Speed (Remote
Control Function, /R1)
This section explains the details of setting the secondary chart speed when the chart
speed is to be switched using the remote control function (/R1 option).
Procedure
MENU
1.
2.
Hold down the
Press the
key.
key for 3 seconds to enter Setting mode.
key or SHIFT +
key to select Aux and then press the
3.
4.
Press the
key.
key or SHIFT +
key to select Chart2 and then press the
Set each item and press the
Use the key or SHIFT +
key.
key to select values.
For the procedure on how to enter values or characters, see section 4.2.
If you press the ESC key in the middle of the operation, the settings entered up
to then are cancelled, and the display returns to a higher level menu.
When the Setting complete screen appears, do either of the following:
5.
6.
To correct the setting, press the
If you are done, press the ESC key.
MENU
key.
6
Hold down the
key for 3 seconds to return to Operation mode.
Set=Aux
Aux=Chart2
mm/h= 20
Set the chart speed.
Chart speed2
Setting complete
The new setting takes effect.
ESC/?
Explanation
Chart Speed
See section 5.4.
<Related Topics>
Setting the remote control function: Section 7.18
6-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.10 Setting the Alarm Delay Duration
This section explains the details of setting the duration of the delay alarm.
Procedure
MENU
1.
2.
Hold down the
Press the
key.
key for 3 seconds to enter Setting mode.
key or SHIFT +
key to select Aux and then press the
3.
4.
Press the
key or SHIFT +
key to select Alarm delay and then press
the
Set each item and press the
Use the key or SHIFT +
key.
key.
key to select values.
For the procedure on how to enter values or characters, see section 4.2.
If you press the ESC key in the middle of the operation, the settings entered up
to then are cancelled, and the display returns to a higher level menu.
When the Setting complete screen appears, do either of the following:
5.
6.
Press the
key to set other channels.
If you are done, press the ESC key.
MENU
Hold down the
key for 3 seconds to return to Operation mode.
Set=Aux
Aux=Alm delay T
CH=01-01
Set the channel range.
First channel
Last channel
Duration= 10
Set the alarm delay time.
The new setting takes effect.
01-01 Channel
Setting complete
ESC/?
Explanation
Duration
The duration can be set to a value in the range of 1 to 3600 s.
However, if the scan interval on the dot model is 2.5 s, the actual duration is an integer
multiple of 2.5 s. If the set value is not equal to an integer multiple of 2.5 s, the duration
is the smallest integer multiple of 2.5 s greater than the set value.
Example: The actual duration for 1 s and 2 s is 2.5 s.
<Related Topics>
Enabling the alarm delay function: Section 7.15
6-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.11 Setting the Brightness of the Display and
Internal Light
This section explains the details of setting the brightness of the display and the internal
light.
Procedure
MENU
1.
2.
Hold down the
Press the
key.
key for 3 seconds to enter Setting mode.
key or SHIFT +
key to select Aux and then press the
3.
4.
Press the
key.
key or SHIFT +
key to select Brightness and then press the
Set each item and press the
Use the key or SHIFT +
key.
key to select values.
For the procedure on how to enter values or characters, see section 4.2.
If you press the ESC key in the middle of the operation, the settings entered up
to then are cancelled, and the display returns to a higher level menu.
When the Setting complete screen appears, do either of the following:
5.
6.
To correct the setting, press the
If you are done, press the ESC key.
MENU
key.
6
Hold down the
key for 3 seconds to return to Operation mode.
Set=Aux
Aux=Brightness
Display=4
Light=Off
Brightness
Select the brightness of the display.
Select the brightness of the internal
light.
The new setting takes effect.
Setting complete
ESC/?
Explanation
Display Brightness
The brightness can be set to an integer between 1 and 8. The darkest setting is 1; the
brightest setting is 8.
Internal Light Brightness
The brightness of the internal light can be set to an integer between 1 and 4. The
darkest setting is 1; the brightest setting is 4. Select Off to turn Off the internal light.
6-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.12 Applying a Bias on the Measuring Input Signal
This section explains the details of setting a bias on the measuring input signal.
If you change the input range, set the bias again.
Procedure
MENU
1.
2.
3.
Hold down the
key for 3 seconds to enter Setting mode.
key to select Bias and then press the
key.
key to select values.
For the procedure on how to enter values or characters, see section 4.2.
Press the
key or SHIFT +
key.
Set each item and press the
Use the key or SHIFT +
If you press the ESC key in the middle of the operation, the settings entered up
to then are cancelled, and the display returns to a higher level menu.
When the Setting complete screen appears, do either of the following:
4.
5.
Press the
key to set other channels.
If you are done, press the ESC key.
MENU
Hold down the
key for 3 seconds to return to Operation mode.
Set=Bias
Set the channel range.
CH=01-01
First channel
Last channel
Bias=Off
Select whether to use the bias.
Set the bias value.
(When bias is On)
Bias= 0.000
The new setting takes effect.
01-01 Channel
Setting complete
ESC/?
Explanation
Channel Range
The only case when a bias can be set on multiple channels simultaneously is when the
channels are set to the same range type (for example channel 01 and 02 are set to 2 V
range). For channels on which scaling is set, the channels must be set to the same
range type, same span values, and same scaling values.
Bias
The range of bias that can be specified is ±10% of the span of the measurable range at the
specified range type. For example, the range is –0.4 V to 0.4 V for the range type 2 V.
For channels on which scaling is set, the range is ±10% of the scaling span.
Note
A bias cannot be set on channels set to ON/OFF input (DI).
<Related Topics>
Enabling the bias function: Section 7.15
6-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.13 Setting the Date/Time When Switching between
Standard Time and DST
This section explains the details of setting the date/time when switching from the
standard time to DST and the date/time when switching back from DST to standard time
if the recorder is used in a region that has DST. When the preset date/time arrives, the
recorder internal clock automatically switches.
Procedure
MENU
1.
2.
Hold down the
Press the
key.
key for 3 seconds to enter Setting mode.
key or SHIFT +
key to select Aux and then press the
3.
4.
Press the
key or SHIFT +
key to select DST and then press the
key.
key.
Set each item and press the
Press the key or SHIFT +
For the procedure on how to enter values or characters, see section 4.2.
key to select values.
If you press the ESC key in the middle of the operation, the settings entered up
to then are cancelled, and the display returns to a higher level menu.
When the Setting complete screen appears, do either of the following:
5.
6.
Press the
key to set other channels.
6
If you are done, press the ESC key.
MENU
Hold down the
key for 3 seconds to return to Operation mode.
6-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.13 Setting the Date/Time When Switching between Standard Time and DST
Set=Aux
Aux=DST
Select Use.
DST=Use
Month, day of the week, and time
when the DST starts.
Month
Start month=Apr
Strt day=1st-Sun
Strt day=1st-Sun
Start time=2:00
End month=Oct
End day=Last-Mon
End day=Last-Mon
End time=1:00
The n th day of the week
of the month
Time
Month, day of the week, and time
when the DST ends.
Month
The n th day of the week
of the month
Time
The new setting takes effect.
DST
Setting complete
ESC/?
Explanation
DST
Select Use to use DST.
Start month, Strt day, and Start time
Set the date/time for switching from standard time to DST. Specify the day as the n th
day of the week of the month.
End month, End day, and End time
Set the date/time for switching from DST to standard time. Specify the day as the n th
day of the week of the month.
6-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.13 Setting the Date/Time When Switching between Standard Time and DST
Recorders with Version 1.02 or Earlier
The following is the setting menu.
Time=Summer
Select standard time (Winter) or DST (Summer).
Summer=Off
Select On to set the time to switch between standard time and DST.
Time=04/07/05 00
Set the time to switch.
DST
Setting complete
The new setting takes effect.
6
6-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7 Setup Operations for Changing/Adding Functions (Basic Setting Mode)
7.1 Changing the Auxiliary Alarm Function
This section explains the details of setting the alarm system items listed below.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Diagnosis output using the alarm output relay (I01)
Reflash alarm operation of the alarm output relay (I01 to I03)
AND/OR operation of alarm output relays
Energized/De-energized operation of alarm output relays when alarms occur
Hold/Non-hold operation of alarm output relays
Hold/Non-hold operation of alarm indications
The interval of the rate-of-change alarm
Alarm hysteresis
Basic Setting mode cannot be entered when recording is in progress or when
computation is in progress on models with the computation function (/M1 option).
Procedure
Changing the Settings
1.
2.
Hold down the
Hold down the
Setting mode.
Press the
key for 3 seconds to enter Setting mode.
MENU
and
keys simultaneously for 3 seconds to enter Basic
3.
4.
key with Alarm shown on the screen.
key.
key to select values.
Set each item and press the
Use the key or SHIFT +
7
For the procedure on how to enter values or characters, see section 4.2.
If you press the ESC key in the middle of the operation, the settings entered up
to then are cancelled, and the display returns to a higher level menu.
When the Setting complete screen appears, do either of the following:
5.
To correct the setting, press the
key.
If you are done, press the ESC key.
7-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7.1 Changing the Auxiliary Alarm Function
Basic=Alarm
Diagnosis=Off
Select On to set relay I01 to diagnosis
output.
Reflash=Off
Select On to set relays I01, I02, and I03
to reflash alarm operation.
AND=None
Select the range of relays that are to
operate using AND logic.
Act=Energize
Behavior=Nonhold
Indicator=Nonhold
Increase=01
Select the relay’s energized or
de-energized operation.
Select the relay’s hold or non-hold
operation.
Select the relay’s hold or non-hold
operation.
Set the interval of the high limit on
rate-of-change alarm.
Set the interval of the low limit on
rate-of-change alarm.
Decrease=01
Hysteresis=0.5%
Set the hysteresis of the measurement
channels.
(models with /M1)
M_Hysteresis=0.0%
Set the hysteresis of the computation
channels.
The new setting takes effect.
Alarm
Setting complete
ESC/?
Applying the Changes and Returning to Operation Mode
Press the key or SHIFT + key to select End and then press the
the key to select Store and then press the
key. Press
key. The changes are applied, and
the screen returns to Operation mode. If you select Abort and press the
key, the
changes are discarded, and the screen returns to Operation mode. Press the ESC key
to return to the Basic= screen.
Explanation
Diagnosis
When set to On, alarm output relay I01 becomes a dedicated diagnosis output relay, and
the operation is fixed to OR, de-energized, and non-hold. Diagnosis output is a function
which outputs a relay signal when an error is detected in the recording section, burnout
detection function, or the A/D converter.
7-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7.1 Changing the Auxiliary Alarm Function
Reflash
Turns On/Off the reflash alarm operation of alarm output relays I01, I02, and I03.
When set to On, alarm output relays I01, I02, and I03 set to reflash alarm operation, and
the operation is fixed to OR, de-energized, and non-hold.
AND
Sets the AND/OR operation of alarm output relays.
None: No relays are set to AND operation. All relays are set to OR operation.
I01: Only I01 is set to AND operation.
I01-I02: I01 and I02 are set to AND operation.
I01-I03: I01 to I03 are set to AND operation.
I01-I04: I01 to I04 are set to AND operation.
I01-I05: I01 to I05 are set to AND operation.
I01-I06: I01 to I06 are set to AND operation.
Act
Sets whether the output relay is energized or de-energized when an alarm occurs.
Energize:
Energizes the relay when an alarm occurs. The relay is de-energized
during normal operation.
De_energize: De-energizes the relay when an alarm occurs. The relay is energized
during normal operation.
Behavior
Specifies whether to set the alarm output relay to hold operation or non-hold operation.
7
Nonhold:
Hold:
Releases the relay output at the same time the alarm is released.
Holds the relay output until the alarm ACK operation is executed.
Indicator
Specifies whether to set the alarm indication to hold operation or non-hold operation.
Nonhold:
Hold:
Releases the alarm indication at the same time the alarm is released.
Holds the alarm indication until the alarm ACK operation is executed.
Increase
Set the interval of the high limit on rate-of-change alarm to an integer between 1 and 15.
The interval is set to scan interval × (1 to 15).
Pen model: The scan interval is 125 ms. The maximum interval is 1.875 s.
Dot model: The maximum interval when the scan interval set to 1 s is 15 s. The
maximum interval when the scan interval set to 2.5 s is 37.5 s.
Decrease
Set the interval of the low limit on rate-of-change alarm to an integer between 1 and 15.
The setup procedure is the same as Increase.
Hysteresis
Sets the alarm hysteresis of the measurement channels.
The hysteresis width can be set in the range of 0.0% (Off) to 1.0% of the recording span
in 0.1 steps.
The hysteresis applies to all high limit and low limit alarms of measurement channels.
M_Hysteresis (Models with the Computation Function (/M1 Option))
Sets the alarm hysteresis of the computation channels.
The hysteresis width can be set in the range of 0.0% (Off) to 1.0% of the recording span
in 0.1 steps.
The hysteresis applies to all high limit and low limit alarms of computation channels.
7-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7.2 Changing the Integration Time of the A/D
Converter
This section explains the details of setting the integration time of the A/D converter.
Basic Setting mode cannot be entered when recording is in progress or when
computation is in progress on models with the computation function (/M1 option).
Procedure
Changing the Settings
1.
2.
Hold down the
Hold down the
Setting mode.
Press the
key for 3 seconds to enter Setting mode.
MENU
and
keys simultaneously for 3 seconds to enter Basic
3.
4.
key or SHIFT +
key to select A/D and then press the
key.
Set each item and press the
Use the key or SHIFT +
key.
key to select values.
For the procedure on how to enter values or characters, see section 4.2.
If you press the ESC key in the middle of the operation, the settings entered up
to then are cancelled, and the display returns to a higher level menu.
When the Setting complete screen appears, do either of the following:
5.
To correct the setting, press the
key.
If you are done, press the ESC key.
Basic=A/D
Select the integration time of the
A/D converter.
Integrate=Auto
A/D Integrate
Setting complete
The new setting takes effect.
ESC/?
Applying the Changes and Returning to Operation Mode
Press the key or SHIFT + key to select End and then press the
the key to select Store and then press the
key. Press
key. The changes are applied, and
the screen returns to Operation mode. If you select Abort and press the
key, the
changes are discarded, and the screen returns to Operation mode. Press the ESC key
to return to the Basic= screen.
Explanation
Integrate
Selects the integration time of the A/D converter.
50Hz: Sets the integration time to 20 ms.*
60Hz: Sets the integration time to 16.7 ms.*
Auto: Sets the integration time (20 ms or 16.7 ms) to a value synchronized with the
power supply frequency.*
100ms (dot model): Sets the integration time to 100 ms. The scan interval is set to
2.5 s.
*
The scan interval is 125 ms (pen model) and 1 s (dot model) when set to 50Hz, 60Hz, or
Auto.
7-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7.3 Setting the Burnout Detection Function of
Thermocouples
This section explains the details of setting the burnout detection function of
thermocouples to channels set to 1-5V or TC input.
Basic Setting mode cannot be entered when recording is in progress or when
computation is in progress on models with the computation function (/M1 option).
Procedure
Changing the Settings
1.
2.
Hold down the
Hold down the
Setting mode.
Press the
key for 3 seconds to enter Setting mode.
MENU
and
keys simultaneously for 3 seconds to enter Basic
3.
4.
key or SHIFT +
key to select Burnout and then press the
key.
Set each item and press the
Use the key or SHIFT +
key.
key to select values.
For the procedure on how to enter values or characters, see section 4.2.
If you press the ESC key in the middle of the operation, the settings entered up
to then are cancelled, and the display returns to a higher level menu.
When the Setting complete screen appears, do either of the following:
5.
Press the
key to set other channels.
If you are done, press the ESC key.
7
Basic=Burnout
CH=01-01
Set the channel range.
First channel
Last channel
Select the recording operation that is
carried out when a burnout is detected.
Burnout=Off
01-01 Channel
Setting complete
The new setting takes effect.
ESC/?
Applying the Changes and Returning to Operation Mode
Press the key or SHIFT + key to select End and then press the
the key to select Store and then press the
key. Press
key. The changes are applied, and
the screen returns to Operation mode. If you select Abort and press the
key, the
changes are discarded, and the screen returns to Operation mode. Press the ESC key
to return to the Basic= screen.
Explanation
Burnout
Selects the action taken when a burnout is detected at the 1-5V input or the
thermocouple input.
Up:
Records off the scale on the 100% side.
Down: Records off the scale on the 0% side.
Select Off when not using the burnout detection function.
7-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7.4 Setting the RJC Function on Channels Set to
TC Input
This section explains the details of setting RJC on channels set to TC input.
Basic Setting mode cannot be entered when recording is in progress or when
computation is in progress on models with the computation function (/M1 option).
Procedure
Changing the Settings
1.
2.
Hold down the
Hold down the
Setting mode.
Press the
key for 3 seconds to enter Setting mode.
MENU
and
keys simultaneously for 3 seconds to enter Basic
3.
4.
key or SHIFT +
key to select RJC and then press the
key.
Set each item and press the
Use the key or SHIFT +
key.
key to select values.
For the procedure on how to enter values or characters, see section 4.2.
If you press the ESC key in the middle of the operation, the settings entered up
to then are cancelled, and the display returns to a higher level menu.
When the Setting complete screen appears, do either of the following:
5.
Press the
key to set other channels.
If you are done, press the ESC key.
Basic=RJC
Set the channel range.
CH=01-01
First channel
Last channel
Select the RJC mode of the
thermocouple input.
RJC=Internal
(When RJC is set to External)
Set the compensation voltage when
using the external RJC function.
Volt=
0
01-01 Channel
Setting complete
The new setting takes effect.
ESC/?
Applying the Changes and Returning to Operation Mode
Press the key or SHIFT + key to select End and then press the
the key to select Store and then press the
key. Press
key. The changes are applied, and
the screen returns to Operation mode. If you select Abort and press the
key, the
changes are discarded, and the screen returns to Operation mode. Press the ESC key
to return to the Basic= screen.
7-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7.4 Setting the RJC Function on Channels Set to TC Input
Explanation
RJC
Sets the RJC mode.
Internal: Uses the RJC function on the recorder.
External: Uses an external RJC function. If external is selected, set the compensation
voltage.
Volt
Sets the compensation voltage when using an external RJC function.
The compensation voltage can be set in the range of –20000 µV to 20000 µV.
7
7-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7.5 Changing the Channel Recording Color (Dot
Model)
This section explains the details of changing the trend recording color on the dot model.
Basic Setting mode cannot be entered when recording is in progress or when
computation is in progress on models with the computation function (/M1 option).
Procedure
Changing the Settings
1.
2.
Hold down the
Hold down the
Setting mode.
Press the
key for 3 seconds to enter Setting mode.
MENU
and
keys simultaneously for 3 seconds to enter Basic
3.
4.
key or SHIFT +
key to select Color and then press the
key.
Set each item and press the
Use the key or SHIFT +
key.
key to select values.
For the procedure on how to enter values or characters, see section 4.2.
If you press the ESC key in the middle of the operation, the settings entered up
to then are cancelled, and the display returns to a higher level menu.
When the Setting complete screen appears, do either of the following:
5.
Press the
key to set other channels.
If you are done, press the ESC key.
Basic=Color
Select the channel.
Channel=01
Select the recording color.
The new setting takes effect.
Color=Purple
01 Channel Color
Setting complete
ESC/?
Applying the Changes and Returning to Operation Mode
Press the key or SHIFT + key to select End and then press the
the key to select Store and then press the
key. Press
key. The changes are applied, and
the screen returns to Operation mode. If you select Abort and press the
key, the
changes are discarded, and the screen returns to Operation mode. Press the ESC key
to return to the Basic= screen.
Explanation
Color
Sets the recording color of measurement channels.
By default, the recording colors are set as follows:
Channel01: Purple
Channel 02: Red
Channel 03: Green
Channel 04: Blue
Channel 05: Brown
Channel 06: Black
7-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7.6 Recording by Compensating for the Pen Offset
along the Time Axis (Pen Model)
This section explains the details of setting the compensation for the pen offset along the
time axis (pen model).
Basic Setting mode cannot be entered when recording is in progress or when
computation is in progress on models with the computation function (/M1 option).
Procedure
Changing the Settings
1.
2.
Hold down the
Hold down the
Setting mode.
Press the
key for 3 seconds to enter Setting mode.
MENU
and
keys simultaneously for 3 seconds to enter Basic
3.
4.
key or SHIFT +
key to select POC and then press the
key.
Set each item and press the
Use the key or SHIFT +
key.
key to select values.
For the procedure on how to enter values or characters, see section 4.2.
If you press the ESC key in the middle of the operation, the settings entered up
to then are cancelled, and the display returns to a higher level menu.
When the Setting complete screen appears, do either of the following:
5.
To correct the setting, press the
key.
If you are done, press the ESC key.
7
Basic=POC
POC=Off
POC
Select On to record by compensating
for the pen offset along the time axis.
The new setting takes effect.
ESC/?
Setting complete
Applying the Changes and Returning to Operation Mode
Press the key or SHIFT + key to select End and then press the
the key to select Store and then press the
key. Press
key. The changes are applied, and
the screen returns to Operation mode. If you select Abort and press the
key, the
changes are discarded, and the screen returns to Operation mode. Press the ESC key
to return to the Basic= screen.
Explanation
POC (Pen Offset Compensation)
On: Enables pen offset compensation.
Off: Disables pen offset compensation.
Note
When pen offset compensation is enabled, all pens are aligned with the reference pen (pen
that is furthest to the back: pen 2 on the 2-pen model, pen 3 on the 3-pen model, and pen 4
on the 4-pen model) for recording. When recording is started, only the reference pen moves
until the offset is compensated. This is not a malfunction.
When pen offset compensation is enabled, an asterisk is printed by the time on the periodic
printout.
7-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7.7 Turning Printouts ON/OFF.
This section explains the details of turning ON/OFF the printouts of various items.
Basic Setting mode cannot be entered when recording is in progress or when
computation is in progress on models with the computation function (/M1 option).
Procedure
Changing the Settings
1.
2.
Hold down the
Hold down the
Setting mode.
Press the
key for 3 seconds to enter Setting mode.
MENU
and
keys simultaneously for 3 seconds to enter Basic
3.
4.
key or SHIFT +
key to select Print and then press the
key.
Set each item and press the
Use the key or SHIFT +
key.
key to select values.
For the procedure on how to enter values or characters, see section 4.2.
If you press the ESC key in the middle of the operation, the settings entered up
to then are cancelled, and the display returns to a higher level menu.
When the Setting complete screen appears, do either of the following:
5.
To correct the setting, press the
key.
If you are done, press the ESC key.
Basic=Print
Select whether to use the channel
number or tags for the printout.
CH/Tag=Channel
(Dot model)
Channel=On
Select whether to print the channel
number beside the trend recording.
Select whether to print the alarm
occurrence/release.
Alarm=On1
Record On=Off
Chart speed=On
Scale=On
Select On to enable recording start
printout.
Prints when the chart speed is changed.
Select On to print the channel scale in
periodic printout.
(Pen model)
Pen color=On
Select On to print the pen color in
periodic printout.
Printout
Setting complete
The new setting takes effect.
ESC/?
7-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7.7 Turning Printouts ON/OFF.
Applying the Changes and Returning to Operation Mode
Press the key or SHIFT + key to select End and then press the
the key to select Store and then press the
key. Press
key. The changes are applied, and
the screen returns to Operation mode. If you select Abort and press the
key, the
changes are discarded, and the screen returns to Operation mode. Press the ESC key
to return to the Basic= screen.
Explanation
CH/Tag
Channel: Prints the channel number.
Tag: Prints the tag.
Channel (Dot Model)
When On is selected channel No. is printed by the trend recording.
Alarm
On1: Prints the alarm information when an alarm occurs or releases.
On2: Prints the alarm information only when an alarm occurs.
Off:
Does not print alarm information.
Pen Color Printout
When On is selected, the recording color of the channel whose scale is printed is printed.
This is valid on channels whose scale printout is turned On.
7
7-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7.8 Setting the Periodic Printout Interval and the
Type of Measured Values to Be Printed
This section explains the details of setting the periodic printout interval and the type of
measured values to be printed.
Basic Setting mode cannot be entered when recording is in progress or when
computation is in progress on models with the computation function (/M1 option).
Procedure
Periodic Printout Interval
Changing the Settings
1.
2.
Hold down the
Hold down the
Setting mode.
Press the
key for 3 seconds to enter Setting mode.
MENU
and
keys simultaneously for 3 seconds to enter Basic
3.
4.
key or SHIFT +
key to select Print1 and then press the
key.
Set each item and press the
Use the key or SHIFT +
key.
key to select values.
For the procedure on how to enter values or characters, see section 4.2.
If you press the ESC key in the middle of the operation, the settings entered up
to then are cancelled, and the display returns to a higher level menu.
When the Setting complete screen appears, do either of the following:
5.
To correct the setting, press the
key.
If you are done, press the ESC key.
Basic=Print1
Periodic=Auto
Select the periodic printout interval mode.
Set the reference time.
Ref.Time=00:00
(When Period is set to Manual)
Interval=1h
Select the periodic printout interval.
Mode=Inst
Set the type of measured values to print.
If report is selected, set the report data
type (next page). Select OFF to disable
periodic printout.
Printout1
Setting complete
The new setting takes effect.
ESC/?
Applying the Changes and Returning to Operation Mode
Press the key or SHIFT + key to select End and then press the
the key to select Store and then press the
key. Press
key. The changes are applied, and
the screen returns to Operation mode. If you select Abort and press the
key, the
changes are discarded, and the screen returns to Operation mode. Press the ESC key
to return to the Basic= screen.
7-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7.8 Setting the Periodic Printout Interval and the Type of Measured Values to Be Printed
Types of Report Data to Be Printed
Changing the Settings
1.
2.
Hold down the
Hold down the
Setting mode.
Press the
key for 3 seconds to enter Setting mode.
MENU
and
keys simultaneously for 3 seconds to enter Basic
3.
4.
key or SHIFT +
key to select Print2 and then press the
key.
Set each item and press the
Use the key or SHIFT +
key.
key to select values.
For the procedure on how to enter values or characters, see section 4.2.
If you press the ESC key in the middle of the operation, the settings entered up
to then are cancelled, and the display returns to a higher level menu.
When the Setting complete screen appears, do either of the following:
5.
Press the
key to set other channels.
If you are done, press the ESC key.
Basic=Print2
CH=01-01
Set the channel range.
First channel
Last channel
7
Select the type of report data to print.
Select the sum scale.
Mode=AVE
SUM scale=Off
Printout2
Setting complete
The new setting takes effect.
ESC/?
Applying the Changes and Returning to Operation Mode
Press the key or SHIFT + key to select End and then press the
the key to select Store and then press the
key. Press
key. The changes are applied, and
the screen returns to Operation mode. If you select Abort and press the
key, the
changes are discarded, and the screen returns to Operation mode. Press the ESC key
to return to the Basic= screen.
7-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7.8 Setting the Periodic Printout Interval and the Type of Measured Values to Be Printed
Explanation
Periodic Printout Interval
Periodic
Select the periodic printout interval mode.
Auto:
Automatically sets the printout interval in sync with the chart speed.
Manual: Set the printout interval manually.
Ref. Time
Sets the reference time for determining the times for executing the periodic printout.
The reference time is set in the range of 00 to 23 in 1 hour steps. Minutes cannot be
specified.
Interval
Select the interval from 10, 12, 15, 20, 30 minutes, 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 8, 12, and 24 hours.
Mode
Sets the type of measured values to be printed.
Inst:
Prints the measured value at that point.
Report: Prints the report data over the interval. If Report is selected, set the type of
report data. Proceed to “Type of Report Data to Be Printed” below.
Off:
Disables periodic printout.
Types of Report Data to Be Printed
Mode
Sets the type of report data to be printed.
AVE: Prints the average value over the interval.
MIX: Prints the minimum, maximum, and average values over the interval.
SUM: Prints the sum value over the interval. If SUM is selected, set the sum scale.
MIN: Prints the minimum value over the interval.
MAX: Prints the maximum value over the interval.
INST: Prints the instantaneous value.
SUM scale
Set this item only when SUM is selected.
SUM sums the data every computation interval. For flow values that have units /s, /min,
or /h, a simple summation results in the actual value not matching the computed result,
because the scan interval and the unit of the input values are different. In such cases,
set the sum scale to match the unit of the input value. In effect, the sum value with the
same unit as that of the input value is calculated.
For example, if the scan interval is 1 s, and the input value is 100 m3/min, a simple
summation would add 100 every 1 s resulting in 6000 after one minute. However, if the
sum scale is set to /min, then 1 s/60 s is multiplied every scan interval before the value is
added giving a result with an m3/min unit.
Off: Simply sums the measured values.
/s:
/min: Sums by converting the measured values to a value over 1 minute.
/h: Sums by converting the measured values to a value over 1 hour.
Sums by converting the measured values to a value over 1 second.
/day: Sums by converting the measured values to a value over 1 day.
7-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7.9 Setting the Bar Graph Display Mode
This section explains the details of setting the bar graph display mode.
Basic Setting mode cannot be entered when recording is in progress or when
computation is in progress on models with the computation function (/M1 option).
Procedure
Changing the Settings
1.
2.
Hold down the
Hold down the
Setting mode.
Press the
key for 3 seconds to enter Setting mode.
MENU
and
keys simultaneously for 3 seconds to enter Basic
3.
4.
key or SHIFT +
key to select Bar graph and then press the
key.
Set each item and press the
Use the key or SHIFT +
key.
key to select values.
For the procedure on how to enter values or characters, see section 4.2.
If you press the ESC key in the middle of the operation, the settings entered up
to then are cancelled, and the display returns to a higher level menu.
When the Setting complete screen appears, do either of the following:
5.
Press the
key to set other channels.
If you are done, press the ESC key.
7
Basic=Bar graph
CH=01-01
Set the channel range.
First channel
Last channel
Select the display mode of the bar graph.
The new setting takes effect.
Graph=Normal
01-01 Channel
Setting complete
ESC/?
Applying the Changes and Returning to Operation Mode
Press the key or SHIFT + key to select End and then press the
the key to select Store and then press the
key. Press
key. The changes are applied, and
the screen returns to Operation mode. If you select Abort and press the
key, the
changes are discarded, and the screen returns to Operation mode. Press the ESC key
to return to the Basic= screen.
Explanation
Graph
Normal: Sets the base point of the bar graph to the left or right of the recording span
whichever is smaller in value.
Center: Sets the base point of the bar graph to the 50% position of the recording span.
Starting point of the bar graph
Standard
Starting point of the bar graph
Center-zero
7-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7.10 Setting the Key Lock Function
This section explains the details of setting the keys that can be locked and the password
for releasing the key lock.
Basic Setting mode cannot be entered when recording is in progress or when
computation is in progress on models with the computation function (/M1 option).
Procedure
Changing the Settings
1.
2.
Hold down the
Hold down the
Setting mode.
Press the
key for 3 seconds to enter Setting mode.
MENU
and
keys simultaneously for 3 seconds to enter Basic
3.
4.
key or SHIFT +
key to select Keylock and then press the
key.
Set each item and press the
Use the key or SHIFT +
key.
key to select values.
For the procedure on how to enter values or characters, see section 4.2.
If you press the ESC key in the middle of the operation, the settings entered up
to then are cancelled, and the display returns to a higher level menu.
When the Setting complete screen appears, do either of the following:
5.
To correct the setting, press the
key.
If you are done, press the ESC key.
7-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7.10 Setting the Key Lock Function
Basic=Key Lock
Keylock=Use
Password=
Select whether to use the key lock
function.
Set the password for releasing the key
lock.
Select Lock to apply the key lock function
to the RCD key.
RCD=Free
Feed=Free
Select Lock to apply the key lock function
to the FEED key.
Select Lock to apply the key lock function
to the MENU key.
Menu=Free
Select Lock to apply the key lock function
to the DISP MENU.
Disp Menu=Free
Alarm ACK=Free
Math=Free
7
Select Lock to apply the key lock function
to the alarm ACK operation.
Select Lock to apply the key lock function
to the computation start/stop operation.
Select Lock to apply the key lock function
to the various printout operations.
Printout=Free
Message=Free
Buffer clear=Free
Periodic=Free
Select Lock to apply the key lock function
to the message printout operation.
Select Lock to apply the key lock function
to the operation of clearing the printout
buffer.
Select Lock to apply the key lock function
to the operation of resetting the report
data in periodic printout.
(Pen model)
Select Lock to apply the key lock function
to the operation of moving the pen to a
position where the pen can be easily
replaced.
Pen exchange=Free
(Dot model)
Select lock to apply the key lock to the
operation of replacing the ribbon cassette
with the power turned ON.
R. exchange=Free
Keylock
Setting complete
The new setting takes effect.
ESC/?
7-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7.10 Setting the Key Lock Function
Applying the Changes and Returning to Operation Mode
Press the key or SHIFT + key to select End and then press the
the key to select Store and then press the
key. Press
key. The changes are applied, and
the screen returns to Operation mode. If you select Abort and press the
key, the
changes are discarded, and the screen returns to Operation mode. Press the ESC key
to return to the Basic= screen.
Explanation
Keylock
Sets whether to use or not use the key lock function.
If Not is selected, the setup ends here.
Password
Sets the password for releasing the key lock. Set the password using numbers and
spaces within 4 digits.
Operation of Keys to Be Key-Locked
Sets the operation of the keys to be key-locked. Select Lock or Free for each key
operation.
RCD:
RCD key
Feed:
key
FEED
Menu:
key
MENU
Disp Menu:
Alarm ACK:
Math:
key
MENU
1
Alarm ACK operation under the
key
FUNC
Computation start/stop/reset operation under the
key
FUNC
Print out
Message
Buffer clear:
Periodic:
Printout start/stop/reset operation under the
key
FUNC
Message printout operation under the
Clear operation of the printout buffer memory under the
Clear operation of the report data of periodic printout under the
key
FUNC
key
FUNC
key
FUNC
Pen exchange: Operation of moving the pen to an easily accessible position of
replacement under the key (pen model)
R. exchange: Operation carried out when replacing the ribbon cassette with the power
turned ON under the key (dot model)
FUNC
FUNC
<Related Topics>
Activating/Releasing the key lock: Section 3.13
7-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7.11 Enabling the Moving Average Function (Dot
Model)
This section explains the details of enabling/disabling the moving average function on
the dot model.
Basic Setting mode cannot be entered when recording is in progress or when
computation is in progress on models with the computation function (/M1 option).
Procedure
Changing the Settings
1.
2.
Hold down the
Hold down the
Setting mode.
Press the
key for 3 seconds to enter Setting mode.
MENU
and
keys simultaneously for 3 seconds to enter Basic
3.
4.
key or SHIFT +
key to select Moving_AVE and then press
the
Set each item and press the
Use the key or SHIFT +
key.
key.
key to select values.
For the procedure on how to enter values or characters, see section 4.2.
If you press the ESC key in the middle of the operation, the settings entered up
to then are cancelled, and the display returns to a higher level menu.
When the Setting complete screen appears, do either of the following:
5.
To correct the setting, press the
key.
If you are done, press the ESC key.
7
Basic=Moving_AVE
Moving_AVE=Not
Move AVE
Enable/Disable moving average.
The new setting takes effect.
ESC/?
Setting complete
Applying the Changes and Returning to Operation Mode
Press the key or SHIFT + key to select End and then press the
the key to select Store and then press the
key. Press
key. The changes are applied, and
the screen returns to Operation mode. If you select Abort and press the
key, the
changes are discarded, and the screen returns to Operation mode. Press the ESC key
to return to the Basic= screen.
Explanation
Moving_AVE
Use: Enables the setting of the number of samples of the moving average in Setting
mode.
Not: The Moving_AVE item does not appear in Setting mode.
<Related Topics>
Setting the moving average function: Section 6.3
7-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7.12 Enabling the Filter Function (Pen Model)
This section explains details of enabling/disabling the input filter function on the pen
model.
Basic Setting mode cannot be entered when recording is in progress or when
computation is in progress on models with the computation function (/M1 option).
Procedure
Changing the Settings
1.
2.
Hold down the
Hold down the
Setting mode.
Press the
key for 3 seconds to enter Setting mode.
MENU
and
keys simultaneously for 3 seconds to enter Basic
3.
4.
key or SHIFT +
key to select Filter and then press the
key.
Set each item and press the
Use the key or SHIFT +
key.
key to select values.
For the procedure on how to enter values or characters, see section 4.2.
If you press the ESC key in the middle of the operation, the settings entered up
to then are cancelled, and the display returns to a higher level menu.
When the Setting complete screen appears, do either of the following:
5.
To correct the setting, press the
key.
If you are done, press the ESC key.
Basic=Filter
Filter=Not
Filter
Enable/Disable the filter function.
The new setting takes effect.
ESC/?
Setting complete
Applying the Changes and Returning to Operation Mode
Press the key or SHIFT + key to select End and then press the
the key to select Store and then press the
key. Press
key. The changes are applied, and
the screen returns to Operation mode. If you select Abort and press the
key, the
changes are discarded, and the screen returns to Operation mode. Press the ESC key
to return to the Basic= screen.
Explanation
Filter
Use: Enables the setting of the filter time constant in Setting mode.
Not: The Filter item does not appear in Setting mode.
<Related Topics>
Setting the filter: Section 6.2
7-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7.13 Enabling the Partial Expanded Recording
Function
This section explains the details of enabling/disabling the partial expanded recording
function.
Basic Setting mode cannot be entered when recording is in progress or when
computation is in progress on models with the computation function (/M1 option).
Procedure
Changing the Settings
1.
2.
Hold down the
Hold down the
Setting mode.
Press the
key for 3 seconds to enter Setting mode.
MENU
and
keys simultaneously for 3 seconds to enter Basic
3.
4.
key or SHIFT +
key to select Partial and then press the
key.
Set each item and press the
Use the key or SHIFT +
key.
key to select values.
For the procedure on how to enter values or characters, see section 4.2.
If you press the ESC key in the middle of the operation, the settings entered up
to then are cancelled, and the display returns to a higher level menu.
When the Setting complete screen appears, do either of the following:
5.
To correct the setting, press the
key.
If you are done, press the ESC key.
7
Basic=Partial
Partial=Not
Partial
Enable/Disable partial expanded recording.
The new setting takes effect.
Setting complete
ESC/?
Applying the Changes and Returning to Operation Mode
Press the key or SHIFT + key to select End and then press the
the key to select Store and then press the
key. Press
key. The changes are applied, and
the screen returns to Operation mode. If you select Abort and press the
key, the
changes are discarded, and the screen returns to Operation mode. Press the ESC key
to return to the Basic= screen.
Explanation
Partial
Use: Enables the setting of the boundary position and boundary value of the partial
expanded recording function in Setting mode.
Not: The Partial item does not appear in Setting mode.
<Related Topics>
Setting the partial expanded recording function: Section 6.5
7-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7.14 Changing the Display/Recording Language
This section explains the details of changing the display/recording language.
Basic Setting mode cannot be entered when recording is in progress or when
computation is in progress on models with the computation function (/M1 option).
Procedure
Changing the Settings
1.
2.
Hold down the
Hold down the
Setting mode.
Press the
key for 3 seconds to enter Setting mode.
MENU
and
keys simultaneously for 3 seconds to enter Basic
3.
4.
key or SHIFT +
key to select Language and then press the
key.
Set each item and press the
Use the key or SHIFT +
key.
key to select values.
For the procedure on how to enter values or characters, see section 4.2.
If you press the ESC key in the middle of the operation, the settings entered up
to then are cancelled, and the display returns to a higher level menu.
When the Setting complete screen appears, do either of the following:
5.
To correct the setting, press the
key.
If you are done, press the ESC key.
Basic=Language
Lang=English
Language
Select the display/recording language.
The new setting takes effect.
Setting complete
ESC/?
Applying the Changes and Returning to Operation Mode
Press the key or SHIFT + key to select End and then press the
the key to select Store and then press the
key. Press
key. The changes are applied, and
the screen returns to Operation mode. If you select Abort and press the
key, the
changes are discarded, and the screen returns to Operation mode. Press the ESC key
to return to the Basic= screen.
Explanation
Lang (Language)
English:
Uses English for the display and recording.
Japanese: Uses Japanese for the display and recording.
7-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7.15 Enabling the Bias Function, Low-Cut Function,
and Alarm Delay Function
This section explains the details of enabling/disabling the bias function, low-cut function,
and the alarm delay function.
Basic Setting mode cannot be entered when recording is in progress or when
computation is in progress on models with the computation function (/M1 option).
Procedure
Changing the Settings
1.
2.
Hold down the
Hold down the
Setting mode.
Press the
key for 3 seconds to enter Setting mode.
MENU
and
keys simultaneously for 3 seconds to enter Basic
3.
key or SHIFT +
key to select Personalize and then press
the
Press the
Set each item and press the
Use the key or SHIFT +
key.
4.
5.
key with Add function shown on the screen.
key.
key to select values.
For the procedure on how to enter values or characters, see section 4.2.
If you press the ESC key in the middle of the operation, the settings entered up
to then are cancelled, and the display returns to a higher level menu.
When the Setting complete screen appears, do either of the following:
6.
To correct the setting, press the
key.
7
If you are done, press the ESC key.
Basic=Personalize
Mode=Add function
Bias=Not
Enable/Disable the bias function.
Enable/Disable the low-cut function on
channels set to square root computation.
SQRT low-cut=Use
1-5V low-cut=Not
Alarm delay=Not
Personalize
Enable/Disable the low-cut function on
channels set to 1-5V.
Enable/Disable the alarm delay function.
The new setting takes effect.
Setting complete
ESC/?
Applying the Changes and Returning to Operation Mode
Press the key or SHIFT + key to select End and then press the
the key to select Store and then press the
key. Press
key. The changes are applied, and
the screen returns to Operation mode. If you select Abort and press the
key, the
changes are discarded, and the screen returns to Operation mode. Press the ESC key
to return to the Basic= screen.
7-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7.15 Enabling the Bias Function, Low-Cut Function, and Alarm Delay Function
Explanation
Bias
Enables/Disables the bias function.
Use: Enables the setting of the bias value in Setting mode.
Not: The Bias item does not appear in Setting mode.
SQRT low-cut
Enables/Disables the square root low-cut function.
Use: Enables the setting of the low-cut function when a channel is set to square root
computation in Setting mode.
Not: The SQRT low-cut item does not appear in Setting mode.
1-5V low-cut
Enables/Disables the 1-5V low-cut function.
Use: Enables the setting of the low-cut function when a channel is set to 1-5V in
Setting mode.
Not: The 1-5V low-cut item does not appear in Setting mode.
Alarm delay
Enables/Disables the alarm delay function.
Use: Enables the setting of delay high limit alarm or delay low limit alarm for the alarm
type.
Not: The delay high limit alarm and delay low limit alarm items do not appear as
possible selections for the alarm type.
7-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7.16 Changing the Time Printout Format
This section explains the details of changing the time printout format of alarm printout,
message printout, recording start printout, and new chart speed printout.
Basic Setting mode cannot be entered when recording is in progress or when
computation is in progress on models with the computation function (/M1 option).
Procedure
Changing the Settings
1.
2.
Hold down the
Hold down the
Setting mode.
Press the
key for 3 seconds to enter Setting mode.
MENU
and
keys simultaneously for 3 seconds to enter Basic
key to select Personalize and then press
key to select Time print and then press the
3.
4.
5.
key or SHIFT +
the
key.
Press the
key.
key or SHIFT +
Set each item and press the
Use the key or SHIFT +
key.
key to select values.
For the procedure on how to enter values or characters, see section 4.2.
If you press the ESC key in the middle of the operation, the settings entered up
to then are cancelled, and the display returns to a higher level menu.
When the Setting complete screen appears, do either of the following:
6.
7
To correct the setting, press the
key.
If you are done, press the ESC key.
Basic=Personalize
Mode=Time print
Alarm=HH:MM
Select the time printout format of the
alarm printout.
Select the time printout format of the
message printout.
Message=HH:MM
RCD On=HH:MM
Select the time printout format of the
recording start printout.
Select the time printout format of the
new chart speed printout.
C. Speed=HH:MM
Personalize
Setting complete
The new setting takes effect.
ESC/?
Applying the Changes and Returning to Operation Mode
Press the key or SHIFT + key to select End and then press the
the key to select Store and then press the
key. Press
key. The changes are applied, and
the screen returns to Operation mode. If you select Abort and press the
key, the
changes are discarded, and the screen returns to Operation mode. Press the ESC key
to return to the Basic= screen.
7-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7.16 Changing the Time Printout Format
Explanation
Alarms
Sets the time printout format of the alarm printout.
HH:MM: Hour:Minute
HH:MM:SS: Hour:Minute:Second
M/D H:M: Month Day Hour:Minute
M/D H:M:S: Month Day Hour:Minute:Second
YMD H:M:S: Month Day Year Hour:Minute:Second
Message
Sets the time printout format of the message printout.
HH:MM:
HH:MM:SS: Hour:Minute:Second
M/D H:M: Month Day Hour:Minute
Hour:Minute
M/D H:M:S: Month Day Hour:Minute:Second
YMD H:M:S: Month Day Year Hour:Minute:Second
None:
Does not print the date/time.
RCD On
Sets the time printout format of the record start time printout
The format is the same as that of the alarm printout.
C. Speed
Selects the time printout format of the new chart speed printout.
The format is the same as that of the alarm printout.
Note
The printout format of the year, month, and day varies depending on the printout/display
format of the date (see section 7.19).
7-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7.17 Initializing the Settings
This section explains the details of initializing the recorder settings to their factory
default.
Be careful, because all settings except the date/time setting in the recorder will be
initialized.
Basic Setting mode cannot be entered when recording is in progress or when
computation is in progress on models with the computation function (/M1 option).
Procedure
1.
2.
Hold down the
Hold down the
Setting mode.
Press the
key.
key for 3 seconds to enter Setting mode.
MENU
and
keys simultaneously for 3 seconds to enter Basic
3.
4.
key or SHIFT +
key to select Initialize and then press the
Press the
key.
key to select the settings to be initialized and then press the
Set:
Initializes the settings in Setting mode.
Setup+Set: Initializes the settings in Basic Setting mode and Setting mode.
5.
To execute the initialization, press the
key.
key to select Yes and then press the
The settings are initialized, and the recorder returns to Operation mode.
To cancel the initialization, press the ESC key The screen returns to the
Basic=Initialize screen.
7
If you press the
happens.
key to select No and press then the
key, nothing
Basic=Initialize
Mode=Setup+Set
Select the range to be initialized.
Are you sure?=No Select Yes and press
to execute
initialization and return to Operation
mode.
ESC/?
Explanation
Items That Are Not Initialized
The following items are not initialized.
•
•
Adjustment value of the pen position and the adjustment value of the printer carriage
position (Basic Setting mode)
Date/Time (Setting mode)
7-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7.18 Assigning Functions to the Remote Control
Input Terminals (/R1 Option)
This section explains the details of assigning functions to the input terminals of the
remote control function.
Basic Setting mode cannot be entered when recording is in progress or when
computation is in progress on models with the computation function (/M1 option).
Procedure
Changing the Settings
1.
2.
Hold down the
Hold down the
Setting mode.
Press the
key for 3 seconds to enter Setting mode.
MENU
and
keys simultaneously for 3 seconds to enter Basic
3.
4.
key or SHIFT +
key to select Remote and then press the
key.
Set each item and press the
Use the key or SHIFT +
key.
key to select values.
For the procedure on how to enter values or characters, see section 4.2.
If you press the ESC key in the middle of the operation, the settings entered up
to then are cancelled, and the display returns to a higher level menu.
When the Setting complete screen appears, do either of the following:
5.
To correct the setting, press the
key.
If you are done, press the ESC key.
Basic=Remote
Remote No.=1
Select the remote control input terminal
number.
Select the function to be assigned.
The new setting takes effect.
1=Record On/Off
Remote No.1
Setting complete
ESC/?
Applying the Changes and Returning to Operation Mode
Press the key or SHIFT + key to select End and then press the
the key to select Store and then press the
key. Press
key. The changes are applied, and
the screen returns to Operation mode. If you select Abort and press the
key, the
changes are discarded, and the screen returns to Operation mode. Press the ESC key
to return to the Basic= screen.
7-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7.18 Assigning Functions to the Remote Control Input Terminals (/R1 Option)
Explanation
Remote No.
The remote control terminal numbers are from 1 to 5.
Function to Be Assigned
Record On/Off: Starts/stops recording.
Alarm ACK:
Time adjust:
Manual print:
Message #:
Chart speed:
Executes alarm output release.
Adjusts the internal clock to the nearest hour.
Executes manual printout.
Prints message # (where # is a value between 1 and 5).
Changes the chart speed.
Math start/stop: Starts/stops the computation on the computation function (/M1 option).
Math reset:
None:
Resets the computed result of the computation function (/M1 option).
No function is assigned.
<Related Topics>
Setting the secondary chart speed: Section 6.9
7
7-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7.19 Changing the Printout/Display Format of the
Date
This section explains how to change the printout/display format of the year, month, and
day.
Basic Setting mode cannot be entered when recording is in progress or when
computation is in progress on models with the computation function (/M1 option).
Procedure
Changing the Settings
1.
2.
Hold down the
Hold down the
Setting mode.
Press the
key for 3 seconds to enter Setting mode.
MENU
and
keys simultaneously for 3 seconds to enter Basic
3.
4.
key or SHIFT +
key to select Date format and then press
the
Set each item and press the
Use the key or SHIFT +
key.
key.
key to select values.
For the procedure on how to enter values or characters, see section 4.2.
If you press the ESC key in the middle of the operation, the settings entered up
to then are cancelled, and the display returns to a higher level menu.
When the Setting complete screen appears, do either of the following:
5.
To correct the setting, press the
key.
If you are done, press the ESC key.
Basic=Date format
Type=M.D.Y
Select the date format.
Date format
Setting complete
The new setting takes effect.
ESC/?
Applying the Changes and Returning to Operation Mode
Press the key or SHIFT + key to select End and then press the
the key to select Store and then press the
key. Press
key. The changes are applied, and
the screen returns to Operation mode. If you select Abort and press the
key, the
changes are discarded, and the screen returns to Operation mode. Press the ESC key
to return to the Basic= screen.
Explanation
Date Format
Setting
Y/M/D
M/D/Y
D/M/Y
D.M.Y
M.D.Y
Format Example
2005/8/31
Note
8/31/2005
31/8/2005
31.8.2005
Aug.31.2005
Default value
7-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7.20 Changing the Temperature Unit
This section explains the details of changing the temperature unit on the temperature
measurement channels.
Basic Setting mode cannot be entered when recording is in progress or when
computation is in progress on models with the computation function (/M1 option).
Procedure
Changing the Settings
1.
2.
Hold down the
Hold down the
Setting mode.
Press the
key for 3 seconds to enter Setting mode.
MENU
and
keys simultaneously for 3 seconds to enter Basic
3.
4.
key or SHIFT +
key to select Temperature and then press
the
Set each item and press the
Use the key or SHIFT +
key.
key.
key to select values.
For the procedure on how to enter values or characters, see section 4.2.
If you press the ESC key in the middle of the operation, the settings entered up
to then are cancelled, and the display returns to a higher level menu.
When the Setting complete screen appears, do either of the following:
5.
To correct the setting, press the
key.
If you are done, press the ESC key.
7
Basic=Temperature
Temp=C
Select the temperature unit.
The new setting takes effect.
Temperature
Setting complete
ESC/?
Applying the Changes and Returning to Operation Mode
Press the key or SHIFT + key to select End and then press the
the key to select Store and then press the
key. Press
key. The changes are applied, and
the screen returns to Operation mode. If you select Abort and press the
key, the
changes are discarded, and the screen returns to Operation mode. Press the ESC key
to return to the Basic= screen.
Explanation
Temp (Temperature)
The setting is applied to all temperature measurement channels.
C: Use Celsius.
F: Use Fahrenheit.
7-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8 Setup Operations for Changing the Displayed Contents
8.1 Key Operations for Changing the Displayed
Information
Displaying the Data Display Setup Screen
1
MENU
Hold the
key for 3 seconds to show the data display setup screen.
Power ON
1
MENU
or 3 s to switch.
Hold down
Operation mode
Data display setup mode
The panel keys are set to the functions marked above the keys as shown below.
CHARACTER
ESC/?
MENU
SHIFT
RCD MENU DISP
FUNC
1
FEED
CH UP
Returning from the Data Display Setup Screen to Data Display Screen
1
MENU
Hold the
key for 3 seconds to return from the data display setup screen to data
display screen.
Note
When the data display setup screen is shown, operations such as measurement, alarm, and
recording continue.
8
8-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8.1 Key Operations for Changing the Displayed Information
Data Display Setup Menu
This menu is used to assign display types to screen 01 to 15. The
indicates a
display type. The items to set for each type are shown to the right of the display type.
Display type
Screen
1-channel digital display
2-channel digital display
4-channel digital display
Display update rate
Display update rate
Display update rate
End
End
Screen 01
Screen 15
End
6-channel digital display (dot model)
Display update rate
End
1-channel digital display + 1 channel bar graph display
Display update rate
End
1-channel digital display + 4-channel bar graph display (pen model)
2-channel digital display + 2-channel bar graph display
Display update rate
End
Display update rate
End
4-channel bar graph (pen model), 6-channel bar graph (dot model)
End
Flag display
On/Off for each channel
Channel alarm status display
Date/Time/Chart speed display
End
End
DI/DO display (when the /R1, or /A option is installed)
End
Top section
Channel No.
Display update rate
Display update rate
Multiple display
(Display in which different
screens can be assigned
to the top and bottom sections)
Bottom section
Channel No.
End
Display update rate
Display update rate
1-channel digital display: tag display
2-channel digital display: tag display
End
End
Display update rate
End
End
1-channel digital display + 1-channel bar graph display: tag display
1-channel digital display + 4-channel bar graph display: tag display (pen model)
Status display
System display
End
End
Display update rate
Lights off
Skip
End
End
The display update rate corresponds to “Interval” in the setup menu. It is the time interval at
which the displayed channel is switched.
8-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8.2 Changing the Displayed Information
This section explains the details of registering display types to screens 01 to 15. As an
example, the procedure of setting 1-channel digital display is explained below.
Procedure
1-Channel Digital Display
1
MENU
1.
2.
Hold the
Press the
press the
key for 3 seconds to show the data display setup screen.
key or SHIFT + key to select the screen number and then
key.
A sample screen of the display type appears. A section of the display blinks to
indicate that this is a data display setup screen.
3.
4.
5.
Press the
digital display and then press the
Press the key or SHIFT +
and then press the key.
When the Setting complete screen appears, press the
or SHIFT +
key to switch the display. Select the 1-channel
key.
key to select the channel switching interval
key.
1
MENU
Hold the
screen.
key down for 3 seconds to exit from the data display setup
Select the screen No.
Screen No.=01
Current display type name.
Select the display type.
1 200.0 mV
8
Select the channel switching interval.
The new setting takes effect.
Interval=Auto2s
Screen No.01
Setting complete
Explanation
Interval
Sets the channel switching interval.
Select the interval from 1 s, 2 s, 3 s, 4 s, 5 s, and manual.
1s, 2s, 3s, 4s, 5s: Switches the channels at the specified interval.
Manual:
Switch the channel manually.
Assigning Other Display Types (See the menu on the previous page)
•
•
When assigning the flag display, specify whether to display the flag for each channel.
If the channel switching interval is set to manual when assigning the display in which
different screens can be assigned to the top and bottom sections, set the channel
number.
<Related Topics>
Display types: Section 12.4
8-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9 Operations Related to the Computation Function (/M1 Option)
9.1 Starting/Stopping/Resetting the Computation
This section explains the details of starting/stopping the computation and resetting the
computed values of computation channels.
Procedure
Starting the Computation
FUNC
1.
2.
3.
Press the
Press the
Press the
key.
key to show Math and then press the
key with Start shown on the screen.
key.
The computation starts, and the screen switches to the data display screen.
The word MATH in the status display comes on.
Math=Start
Stopping the Computation
FUNC
1.
2.
3.
Press the
Press the
Press the
key.
key to show Math and then press the
key with Stop shown on the screen.
key.
The computation stops, and the screen switches to the data display screen.
The word MATH in the status display clears.
Math=Stop
Resetting the Computed Values of All Computation Channels to 0
This operation can be executed only when the computation is stopped.
FUNC
1.
2.
3.
Press the
Press the
Press the
key.
key to show Math and then press the
key to show Reset and then press the
key.
key.
9
The computed values of all computation channels are reset, and the screen
switches to the data display screen.
Math=Reset
* When the
key or
key is pressed while holding down the SHIFT key, the operation is
reversed as when the respective key is pressed by itself.
9-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9.2 Setting the Computing Equation
The computing equation cannot be entered when the computation is in progress. If you
change the computing equation or the recording span, set the alarm and the partial
expanded recording again.
Procedure
1.
2.
Hold down the
Press the
key.
key for 3 seconds to enter Setting mode.
MENU
key or SHIFT +
key to select Math and then press the
3
Press the
key with Formula shown on the screen.
key.
key to select values.
4.
Set each item and press the
Use the key or SHIFT +
For the procedure on how to enter values or characters, see section 4.2.
If you press the ESC/? key in the middle of the operation, the settings entered up
to then are cancelled, and the display returns to a higher level menu.
When the Setting complete screen appears, do either of the following:
5.
Press the
If you are done, press the ESC/? key.
Hold down the key for 3 seconds to return to Operation mode.
key to set other channels.
6.
MENU
Set=Math
Math=Formula
CH=0A-0A
Set the channel range.
First channel
Last channel
Mode=Off
Select On to use the computing equation.
Set the equation.
f.=01
Span_L= -200.00
Set the left span value.
Span_R= 200.00 Set the right span value.
The new setting takes effect.
0A-0A Channel
Setting complete
ESC/?
Setting the Computing Equation
The CHARACTER,
, and
keys are used to set the computing equation.
key to select the position for entering a character.
Use the key or SHIFT +
Use the CHARACTER key or SHIFT + CHARACTER key to select the character type.
Use the key or SHIFT + key to select the character.
9-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9.2 Setting the Computing Equation
Each time you press the CHARACTER key the display changes as shown below.
Pressing the
key or SHIFT +
key switches the character within the selected
character type and displays the character at the cursor position.
Display (
key) Description
Character (
key)
CHARACTER
01...
Measurement channel No.
Pen model: 01 to 04
Dot model: 01 to 06
0A...
Computation channel No.
Pen model: 0A, 0B, 0C, 0D, 0E, 0F,
0G, 0J
Dot model: 0A, 0B, 0C, 0D, 0E, 0F,
0G, 0J, 0K, 0M, 0N, 0P
+, –, *, /...
Function
Symbol and space
Function
+, –, *, /, (, ), space
SQR(, ABS(, LOG(, EXP(, .EQ.,
.NE., .GT., .LT., .GE., .LE., AND,
NOT, XOR, OR, TLOG.AVE(,
TLOG.MAX(, TLOG.MIN(,
TLOG.SUM(, TLOG.P-P(, space
K01-K30
D01-D05
Constant
K01 to K30
Status of the remote
D01 to D05
control terminals
C01-C12
Communication input data
Pen model: C01 to C08
Dot model: C01 to C12
Ins DISP
Del DISP
Insert a character
Delete a character
Delete the entire string
Clear DISP
Copy DISP
Store the entire string in the
memory
Past DISP
Paste the string in the memory
Inserting a Character
Press the
key or SHIFT +
key to move the cursor to the position where the
character is to be inserted.
Press the CHARACTER key or SHIFT + CHARACTER key to show Ins DISP and then
press the key. A space for one character is inserted. Enter the character.
9
Deleting a Character
Use the key or SHIFT +
Press the CHARACTER key or SHIFT + CHARACTER key to show Del DISP and then
press the key. The character is deleted.
key to move the cursor to the character to be deleted.
Deleting an Entire Character String
Press the CHARACTER key or SHIFT + CHARACTER key to show Clear DISP and
then press the
key. The entire character string is deleted.
Copying & Pasting a Character String
Show the copy source character string.
Press the CHARACTER key or SHIFT + CHARACTER key to show Copy DISP and
then press the
key. The character string is saved to the memory.
Show the copy destination.
Press the CHARACTER key or SHIFT + CHARACTER key to show Paste DISP and
then press the
key. The character string is pasted.
9-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9.2 Setting the Computing Equation
Explanation
Computing Equation
Follow the rules below when writing computing equations.
•
•
•
Use up to 120 characters to write equations.
The precedence of computing terms can be specified using parentheses.
Specify the channels in the equation using 2-digit channel numbers.
Example: 01, 0A
•
•
Specify the constants (K), communication input data (C), and remote control input
terminal status (D) in the computing equation using 2-digit numbers.
Example: K01, C01, D01
The data value for its own channel and channels that are greater in number than its
own channel are substituted with the data from the previous scan.
Order of Precedence in Computations
The order of precedence of computation in equations is as follows:
Type
Operator
(high order of precedence)
Function
ABS(), SQR(), LOG(), EXP(), TLOG.MAX(),
TLOG.MIN(), TLOG.P-P(), TLOG.SUM(),
TLOG.AVE()
Power
**
Logical negation
NOT
Multiplication and division
Addition and subtraction
Greater than and less than
Equal and not equal
Logical product
*, /
+, –
.GT., .LT., GE., LE.
.EQ., .NE.
AND
Logical sum and exclusive logical sum
OR, XOR
(low order of precedence)
Data That Can Be Used in Equations
In TLOG computation, the measured values of measurement channels or computed
values of computation channels can only be used. For all other computations, all of the
data types below can be used.
• Measured Values on Measurement Channels
Specified by the channel No. For channels that have linear scaling enabled, the
scaled values are used in the computation.
Pen model: 01 to 04, dot model: 01 to 06
• Computed Values on Computation Channels
Specified by the channel No.
Pen model: 0A, 0B, 0C, 0D, 0E, 0F, 0G, 0J
Dot model: 0A, 0B, 0C, 0D, 0E, 0F, 0G, 0J, 0K, 0M, 0N, 0P
• Constants (K01 to K30)
Enter the values as K01 to K30 in the equations.
Range of values (maximum significant digits is 5):
–9.9999E+29 to –1.0000E–30, 0, 1.0000E–30 to 9.9999E+29
• Communication Input Data (Pen model: C01 to C08, dot model: C01 to C12)
Enter the data as C01 to C12 in the equations.
Range of values (maximum significant digits is 5):
–9.9999E+29 to –1.0000E–30, 0, 1.0000E–30 to 9.9999E+29
For the procedure of setting the communication input data, see the RD100B/RD1800B
Communication Interface User’s Guide.
9-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9.2 Setting the Computing Equation
• Status of the Remote Control Input Terminal (D01 to D05, /R1 option)
The status of the remote control input signal (1 or 0) can be used in the computation.
Use D01 to D05 (the number following the letter D is the remote control input terminal
number) to specify the status in the equations.
Four Arithmetic Operation
The data that can be used in equations are measured values, computed values,
constants, communication input data, and remote control input terminal status.
Equation Examples
•
Addition
01+02
(Determines the sum of the measured values of channel 1 and channel
2.)
•
Subtraction 01–02
(Determines the difference of the measured values of channel 1 and
channel 2.)
Multiplication 01*K03
•
•
(Multiplies constant K03 to the measured value of channel 1.)
01/K02
Division
(Divides the measured value of channel 1 by constant K02.)
Note
By setting an equation similar to the one shown below, you can determine the accumulation
of a specified channel (in this case channel 01) and make the result the computed value of
computation channel 0A.
Computing equation of computation channel 0A: 0A+01
Power and Other Computations
The data that can be used in equations are measured values, computed values,
constants, communication input data, and remote control input terminal status. You can
nest a computing element inside the parentheses of another computing element.
Equation Examples
9
•
•
•
•
•
Power
01**02
(Determines the measured value of channel 1 to the power of
the measured value of channel 2.)
Square root
Absolute value
Common logarithm
Exponent
SQR(02)
(Determines the square root of the measured value of channel
2.)
ABS(02)
(Determines the absolute value of the measured value of
channel 2.)
LOG(01)
(Determines the common logarithm (log10) of the measured
value of channel 1.)
EXP(01)
(Determines e to the power of the measured value of channel
1.)
Note
You can determine the natural logarithm by setting an equation like the following.
From logbX = logaX/loga, we obtain logeX = log10X/log10
Hence, to determine the natural logarithm of channel 1, we set
Constant K01 = 0.43429(log10e)
Computing equation and set the equation to LOG(01)/K01.
e
9-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9.2 Setting the Computing Equation
Relational Computation
The data that can be used in equations are measured values, computed values,
constants, communication input data, and remote control input terminal status. You can
specify a computing equation that performs relational computation on a computing
element. (Example: 01.LT.ABS(02))
Equation Examples
02.LT.03
If the measured value of channel 2 is less than the measured value of channel 3, the
computed result is “1.” Otherwise, the result is “0.”
02.GT.03
If the measured value of channel 2 is greater than the measured value of channel 3, the
computed result is “1.” Otherwise, the result is “0.”
02.EQ.03
If the measured value of channel 2 is equal to the measured value of channel 3, the
computed result is “1.” Otherwise, the result is “0.”
02.NE.03
If the measured value of channel 2 is not equal to the measured value of channel 3, the
computed result is “1.” Otherwise, the result is “0.”
02.GE.03
If the measured value of channel 2 is greater than or equal to the measured value of
channel 3, the computed result is “1.” Otherwise, the result is “0.”
02.LE.03
If the measured value of channel 2 is less than or equal to the measured value of
channel 3, the computed result is “1.” Otherwise, the result is “0.”
Logical Computation
Checks whether the two data values, e1 and e2 (e1 only for NOT), are zeroes or non-
zeroes, and computes according to the conditions. The data that can be used in
equations are measured values, computed values, constants, communication input data,
and remote control input terminal status. You can specify a computing equation that
performs logical computation on a computing element.
AND
Logical Product
(Syntax)
e1ANDe2
(Condition)
If the two data values e1 and e2 are both non-zeroes, the computed
result is “1.” Otherwise, it is “0.”
e1 = 0
(Explanation)
→
→
e1ANDe2 = 0
e1ANDe2 = 0
e2 = 0
e1 ≠ 0
e2 = 0
e1 = 0
e2 ≠ 0
e1 ≠ 0
e2 ≠ 0
→
→
e1ANDe2 = 0
e1ANDe2 = 1
9-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9.2 Setting the Computing Equation
OR
Logical sum
(Syntax)
(Condition)
e1ORe2
If the two data values e1 and e2 are both zeroes, the computed result is
“0.” Otherwise, it is “1.”
e1 = 0
(Explanation)
→
→
→
→
e1ORe2 = 0
e1ORe2 = 1
e1ORe2 = 1
e1ORe2 = 1
e2 = 0
e1 ≠ 0
e2 = 0
e1 = 0
e2 ≠ 0
e1 ≠ 0
e2 ≠ 0
XOR
Exclusive OR
(Syntax)
e1XORe2
(Condition)
If the two data values e1 and e2 are zero and non-zero or non-zero and
zero, the computed result is “1.” Otherwise, it is “0.”
e1 = 0
(Explanation)
→
→
→
→
e1XORe2 = 0
e1XORe2 = 1
e1XORe2 = 1
e1XORe2 = 0
e2 = 0
e1 ≠ 0
e2 = 0
e1 = 0
e2 ≠ 0
9
e1 ≠ 0
e2 ≠ 0
NOT
Logical negation
(Syntax)
NOTe1
(Condition)
(Explanation)
The result is the inverse of the status of data e1 (zero or non-zero).
e1 = 0 →
NOTe1 = 1
NOTe1 = 0
e1 ≠ 0 →
Equation Example
01-02OR03.GT.04
Determines the OR of the computed results of “01-02” and “03.GT.04”.
9-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9.2 Setting the Computing Equation
TLOG Computation
Only measured values and computed values can be used in TLOG computation. In the
explanation below, e1 is used to represent a measurement or computation channel. You
cannot specify an equation that contains a computing element inside e1. In addition,
only one TLOG computation can be specified in a single computing equation.
TLOG.MAX( )
Maximum value
(Syntax)
TLOG.MAX(e1)
(Condition)
Determines the maximum value of channel e1.
TLOG.MIN( )
Minimum value
(Syntax)
TLOG.MIN(e1)
(Condition)
Determines the minimum value of channel e1.
TLOG.AVE( )
Average value
(Syntax)
TLOG.AVE(e1)
(Condition)
Determines the average value of channel e1.
TLOG.SUM( )
Sum value
(Syntax)
TLOG.SUM(e1)
(Condition)
Determines the sum of channel e1.
TLOG.P-P( )
Maximum − minimum value
(Syntax)
TLOG.P-P(e1)
Determines the maximum − minimum value of channel e1.
(Condition)
Equation Example
TLOG.MAX(01) + K01*SQR(02)
Examples of Equations That Are Not Allowed
TLOG.AVE(01) + TLOG.AVE(02)
Reason: TLOG appears twice in one equation.
TLOG.AVE(ABS(01))
Reason: A computing element is used inside the parentheses.
9-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9.3 Setting the Unit
This section explains the details of setting the unit on computation channels.
Procedure
1.
2.
Hold down the
Press the
key.
key for 3 seconds to enter Setting mode.
MENU
key or SHIFT +
key to select Math and then press the
3.
4.
Press the
key.
key or SHIFT +
key to select Unit and then press the
Set each item and press the
Use the key or SHIFT +
key.
key to select values.
For the procedure on how to enter values or characters, see section 4.2.
If you press the ESC key in the middle of the operation, the settings entered up
to then are cancelled, and the display returns to a higher level menu.
When the Setting complete screen appears, do either of the following:
5.
6.
Press the
key to set other channels.
If you are done, press the ESC key.
Hold down the
key for 3 seconds to return to Operation mode.
MENU
Set=Math
Math=Unit
CH=0A-0A
Set the channel range.
Set the unit.
First channel
Last channel
9
Unit=
The new setting takes effect.
0A-0A Channel
Setting complete
ESC/?
Explanation
Characters That Can Be Used for Units
Set the unit using up to 6 characters.
The available characters are as follows:
Alphabet, numbers, symbols (%, #, °, @, +, –, *, /, (, ), µ, Ω, 2, 3, .), and space
9-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9.4 Setting the Constants Used in Equations
This section explains the details of setting constants to be used in computing equations.
Procedure
1.
2.
Hold down the
Press the
key.
key for 3 seconds to enter Setting mode.
MENU
key or SHIFT +
key to select Math and then press the
3.
4.
Press the
key.
key or SHIFT +
key to select Constant and then press the
Set each item and press the
Use the key or SHIFT +
key.
key to select values.
For the procedure on how to enter values or characters, see section 4.2.
If you press the ESC key in the middle of the operation, the settings entered up
to then are cancelled, and the display returns to a higher level menu.
When the Setting complete screen appears, do either of the following:
5.
6.
Press the
If you are done, press the ESC key.
Hold down the key for 3 seconds to return to Operation mode.
key to set other channels.
MENU
Set=Math
Math=Constant
No.=K01
K01=1
Select the constant number.
Set the value.
The new setting takes effect.
K01
Setting complete
ESC/?
Explanation
Constant
Up to 30 constants can be registered. Enter the values as K01 to K30 in the equations.
Set the constants in the range shown below. The maximum number of significant digits
is 5.
–9.9999E+29 to –1.0000E–30, 0, 1.0000E–30 to 9.9999E+29
9-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9.5 Setting the Alarm
This section explains the details of setting alarms for each computation channel.
If you change the computing equation or the recording span, set the alarm again.
Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.
Hold down the
Press the
key for 3 seconds to enter Setting mode.
MENU
key or SHIFT +
key to select Math and then press the
key to select Alarm and then press the
key.
key.
key.
Press the
key or SHIFT +
Set each item and press the
Use the key or SHIFT +
key to select values.
For the procedure on how to enter values or characters, see section 4.2.
If you press the ESC key in the middle of the operation, the settings entered up
to then are cancelled, and the display returns to a higher level menu.
When the Setting complete screen appears, do either of the following:
5.
6.
Press the
key to set other channels.
If you are done, press the ESC key.
Hold down the
key for 3 seconds to return to Operation mode.
MENU
Set=Math
Math=Alarm
CH=0A-0A
Set the channel range.
First channel
Last channel
Level=1
Alarm=Off
Type=H
Select the level number between 1 and 4.
9
Select On to set the alarm. When set
to On, the settings below can be entered.
Select the alarm type.
Value=
0.00
Select the value used to turn On the alarm.
Relay=Off
Turn relay On when outputting alarms on
the relay. This setting is valid only on
models with the /A1, /A2, or /A3 option.
Relay No.=I01
Specify the alarm output relay No.
The new setting takes effect.
0A-0A CH/level 1
Setting complete
ESC/?
9-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9.5 Setting the Alarm
Explanation
Alarm Type
Symbol
Name
H
L
T
t
High limit alarm
Low limit alarm
Delay high limit alarm*
Delay low limit alarm*
*
Selectable only when the alarm delay function is enabled. See section 7.15.
If delay high limit alarm or delay low limit alarm is specified, set the alarm delay time.
<Related Topics>
Setting the delay time of the delay high limit alarm or delay low limit alarm: Section 9.11
Enabling the alarm delay function: Section 7.15
Setting the alarm hysteresis: Section 7.1
Alarm Value
Can be set to a value in the range of –9999999 to 99999999 excluding the decimal (–
9999999 to 99999999 is the displayable range).
Relay No.
The selectable relay numbers are listed below.
I01 and I02 on the /A1 option
I01, I02, I03, and I04 on the /A2 option
I01, I02, I03, I04, I05, and I06 on the /A3 option
9-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9.6 Specifying the Timer Used in Statistical
Calculations (TLOG)
On channels that perform statistical calculation (TLOG), the timer for determining the
interval is specified. The sum scale is also specified when using statistical calculation.
The timer is also used for the periodic printout of computed values.
Procedure
1.
2.
Hold down the
Press the
key.
key for 3 seconds to enter Setting mode.
MENU
key or SHIFT +
key to select Math and then press the
3.
4.
Press the
key.
key or SHIFT +
key to select TLOG and then press the
Set each item and press the
Use the key or SHIFT +
key.
key to select values.
For the procedure on how to enter values or characters, see section 4.2.
If you press the ESC key in the middle of the operation, the settings entered up
to then are cancelled, and the display returns to a higher level menu.
When the Setting complete screen appears, do either of the following:
5.
6.
Press the
key to set other channels.
If you are done, press the ESC key.
Hold down the
key for 3 seconds to return to Operation mode.
MENU
Set=Math
Math=TLOG
CH=0A-0A
Set the channel range.
9
First channel
Last channel
Select the timer number (Periodic, 1, or 2).
Select the sum scale.
Timer No=Periodic
SUM scale=Off
The new setting takes effect.
0A-0A Channel
Setting complete
ESC/?
9-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9.6 Specifying the Timer Used in Statistical Calculations (TLOG)
Explanation
Timer No.
There are three timers.
Periodic: The timer for determining the periodic printout interval. The computed result
is printed every interval, and the computed TLOG value is reset.
The timer of timer No. 1. Specify whether the computed value is printed every
interval and whether to reset the computed value.
1:
2:
The timer of timer No. 2. Specify whether the computed value is printed every
interval and whether to reset the computed value.
• Timer operation
The table below shows how each timer operates.
Timer #
Periodic
Item
1 and 2*
Application
Periodic
TLOG computation
Target channel
Measurement and
computation channels
Absolute time mode
Computation channels
Timer mode**
Reset computed TLOG value Yes
Print when computation
stops
Absolute or relative time mode
Yes/No selectable
Yes
No
*
For the timer 1 and 2 settings, see section 9.12.
** Absolute time mode: Keeps time from the reference time.
Relative time mode: Starts the time in sync with the starting of the computation.
SUM scale
Set the sum scale when using statistical calculation (TLOG.SUM).
For the definition of the term “sum scale,” see page 7-14.
Off: Simply sums the computed values.
/s:
/min: Sums by converting the computed values to a value over 1 minute.
/h: Sums by converting the computed values to a value over 1 hour.
Sums by converting the computed values to a value over 1 second.
/day: Sums by converting the computed values to a value over 1 day.
<Related Topics>
Setting the periodic printout timer: Section 7.8
Setting Timer 1 and Timer 2: Section 9.12
9-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9.7 Setting Recording Zones for Each Channel
(Zone Recording)
This section explains the details of setting the recording zone for each computation
channel.
Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Hold down the
Press the
key for 3 seconds to enter Setting mode.
MENU
key or SHIFT +
key or SHIFT +
key or SHIFT +
key to select Math and then press the
key to select Aux and then press the
key to select Zone and then press the
key.
key.
key.
key.
Press the
Press the
Set each item and press the
Use the key or SHIFT +
key to select values.
For the procedure on how to enter values or characters, see section 4.2.
If you press the ESC key in the middle of the operation, the settings entered up
to then are cancelled, and the display returns to a higher level menu.
When the Setting complete screen appears, do either of the following:
6.
7.
Press the
If you are done, press the ESC key.
Hold down the key for 3 seconds to return to Operation mode.
key to set other channels.
MENU
Set=Math
Math=Aux
Aux=Zone
9
CH=0A-0A
Set the channel range.
Last channel
First channel
Left= 0
Set the leftmost value of the recording
zone.
Right=100
Set the rightmost value of the recording
zone.
The new setting takes effect.
0A-0A Channel
Setting complete
ESC/?
Explanation
Zone
The recording zone can be set in the following range.
Leftmost position: 0 mm to 95 mm
Rightmost position: 5 mm to 100 mm
Set a larger value for the rightmost position than the leftmost position.
Set at least 5 mm for the zone width.
Note
If the zone is set to a value less than 40 mm, scale printout of periodic printout cannot be
executed.
9-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9.8 Setting the Partial Expanded Recording
This section explains the details of expanding a section of the recording range.
If you change the computing equation or the recording span, set the partial expanded
recording again.
Procedure
1.
2.
Hold down the
Press the
key.
key for 3 seconds to enter Setting mode.
MENU
key or SHIFT +
key or SHIFT +
key or SHIFT +
key to select Math and then press the
key to select Aux and then press the
key to select Partial and then press the
3.
4.
5.
Press the
key.
Press the
key.
Set each item and press the
Use the key or SHIFT +
key.
key to select values.
For the procedure on how to enter values or characters, see section 4.2.
If you press the ESC key in the middle of the operation, the settings entered up
to then are cancelled, and the display returns to a higher level menu.
When the Setting complete screen appears, do either of the following:
6.
7.
Press the
If you are done, press the ESC key.
Hold down the key for 3 seconds to return to Operation mode.
key to set other channels.
MENU
Set=Math
Math=Aux
Aux=Partial
CH=0A-0A
Set the channel range.
First channel
Last channel
Select On to use the partial expanded
recording function.
Partial=Off
Expand=50
Set the boundary position as
a percentage where the recording span
is assumed to be 100%.
Set the boundary value within the
recording span.
Bound=
0.00
The new setting takes effect.
0A-0A Channel
Setting complete
ESC/?
<Related Topics>
Enabling the partial expanded recording function: Section 7.13
9-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9.9 Turning Trend Recording (Dot Model) and
Periodic Printout ON/OFF for Each Channel
This section explains the details of setting the trend recording and periodic printout for
each computation channel.
The following settings can be entered for each channel on the dot model.
•
•
Turn trend recording ON/OFF.
Turn the printing of computed values ON/OFF during periodic printout.
The following setting can be entered for each channel on the pen model.
Turn the printing of computed values ON/OFF during periodic printout.
•
Procedure
1.
2.
Hold down the
Press the
key.
key for 3 seconds to enter Setting mode.
MENU
key or SHIFT +
key or SHIFT +
key or SHIFT +
key to select Math and then press the
key to select Aux and then press the
key to select Print out and then press the
3.
4.
5.
Press the
key.
Press the
key.
Set each item and press the
Use the key or SHIFT +
key.
key to select values.
For the procedure on how to enter values or characters, see section 4.2.
If you press the ESC key in the middle of the operation, the settings entered up
to then are cancelled, and the display returns to a higher level menu.
When the Setting complete screen appears, do either of the following:
6.
7.
Press the
If you are done, press the ESC key.
Hold down the key for 3 seconds to return to Operation mode.
key to set other channels.
MENU
Set=Math
9
Math=Aux
Aux=Print out
CH=0A-0A
Set the channel range.
First channel
Last channel
Trend=On
Turn trend recording On/Off
(dot model).
Periodic=On
Select whether to print the computed
values during periodic printout and
printout using the TLOG timer (On/Off).
The new setting takes effect.
0A-0A Channel
Setting complete
ESC/?
9-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9.10 Setting Tags on Channels
This section explains the details of setting the tag on computation channels.
Procedure
1.
2.
Hold down the
Press the
key.
key for 3 seconds to enter Setting mode.
MENU
key or SHIFT +
key or SHIFT +
key or SHIFT +
key to select Math and then press the
key to select Aux and then press the
key to select Tag and then press the
3.
4.
5.
Press the
key.
Press the
key.
Set each item and press the
Use the key or SHIFT +
key.
key to select values.
For the procedure on how to enter values or characters, see section 4.2.
If you press the ESC key in the middle of the operation, the settings entered up
to then are cancelled, and the display returns to a higher level menu.
When the Setting complete screen appears, do either of the following:
6.
7.
Press the
If you are done, press the ESC key.
Hold down the key for 3 seconds to return to Operation mode.
key to set other channels.
MENU
Set=Math
Math=Aux
Aux=Tag
CH=0A-0A
Set the channel range.
Set the tag.
First channel
Last channel
Tag=
The new setting takes effect.
0A-0A Channel
Setting complete
ESC/?
Explanation
Characters That Can Be Used for Tags
Set the tag using up to 7 characters.
The available characters are as follows:
Alphabet, numbers, symbols (%, #, °, @, +, –, *, /, (, ), µ, Ω, 2, 3, .), and space
<Related Topics>
Printing tags in place of channel numbers: Section 7.7
9-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9.11 Setting the Alarm Delay Duration
This section explains the details of setting the duration of the delay high limit and delay
low limit alarms.
Procedure
1.
2.
Hold down the
key for 3 seconds to enter Setting mode.
MENU
Press the
key.
key or SHIFT +
key or SHIFT +
key or SHIFT +
key to select Math and then press the
key to select Aux and then press the
key to select Alarm delay and then press
3.
4.
5.
Press the
key.
Press the
the
Set each item and press the
Use the key or SHIFT +
key.
key.
key to select values.
For the procedure on how to enter values or characters, see section 4.2.
If you press the ESC key in the middle of the operation, the settings entered up
to then are cancelled, and the display returns to a higher level menu.
When the Setting complete screen appears, do either of the following:
6.
7.
Press the
If you are done, press the ESC key.
Hold down the key for 3 seconds to return to Operation mode.
key to set other channels.
MENU
Set=Math
Math=Aux
9
Aux=Alm delay T
CH=0A-0A
Set the channel range.
First channel
Last channel
Duration= 10
Set the alarm delay time.
The new setting takes effect.
0A-0A Channel
Setting complete
ESC/?
Explanation
Duration
The duration can be set to a value in the range of 1 to 3600 s.
However, if the scan interval on the dot model is 2.5 s, the actual duration is an integer
multiple of 2.5 s. If the set value is not equal to an integer multiple of 2.5 s, the duration
is the smallest integer multiple of 2.5 s greater than the set value.
Example: The actual duration for 1 s and 2 s is 2.5 s.
<Related Topics>
Enabling the alarm delay function: Section 7.15
9-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9.12 Setting the Timer Used in TLOG Computation
and Periodic Printout
This section explains the details of setting the timer used in TLOG computation and
periodic printout.
Basic Setting mode cannot be entered when recording is in progress or when
computation is in progress on models with the computation function (/M1 option).
Procedure
Changing the Settings
1.
2.
Hold down the
Hold down the
Setting mode.
Press the
key for 3 seconds to enter Setting mode.
MENU
and
keys simultaneously for 3 seconds to enter Basic
3.
key or SHIFT +
key to select Math and then press the
key.
4.
5.
Press the
key with Timer (TLOG) shown on the screen.
key.
key to select values.
Set each item and press the
Use the key or SHIFT +
For the procedure on how to enter values or characters, see section 4.2.
If you press the ESC key in the middle of the operation, the settings entered up
to then are cancelled, and the display returns to a higher level menu.
When the Setting complete screen appears, do either of the following:
6.
To correct the setting, press the
key.
If you are done, press the ESC key.
Basic=Math
Math=Timer(TLOG)
Timer No.=1
Select the timer No.
Mode=Absolute
Select the timer type.
Select the timer interval.
(When the mode is set to Absolute)
Interval=1h
(When the mode is set to Absolute)
Ref.Time=00:00
Set the reference time.
Select On to reset the computed
values every interval.
Reset=Off
Print=Off
Math Timer
Select On to print the computed
values every interval.
The new setting takes effect.
Setting complete
ESC/?
9-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9.12 Setting the Timer Used in TLOG Computation and Periodic Printout
Applying the Changes and Returning to Operation Mode
Press the
key or SHIFT +
key to select End and then press the
key. Press
the key to select Store and then press the
key. The changes are applied, and
the screen returns to Operation mode. If you select Abort and press the
key, the
changes are discarded, and the screen returns to Operation mode. Press the ESC key
to return to the Basic= screen.
Explanation
Timers
Timer features
•
•
The timer determines the interval used to calculate the report data (the average,
minimum, maximum, sum value), etc.
The timer is also used to set the interval at which the computed values are printed on
the chart paper.
Number of Timers
There are two timers: Timer No. 1 and 2.
Timer Type
There are two timer modes, absolute time mode and relative time mode.
• Absolute Time Mode
After the computation is started, the timer times out at the times determined by the
reference time (on the hour) and the interval. The reference time is set on the hour
(00 to 23).
Example 1: Reference time: 14:00
Interval:
The timeout times are hour 2 and hour 14.
Example 2: Reference time: 00:00
Interval: 10min
12h
The timeout times are 0 hour, 0 hour 10 min, 0 hour 20 min, ... 23 hour
40 min, and 23 hour 50 min. For example, if computation is started at 9
hour 36 min, the timeout times are 09 hour 40 min, 09 hour 50 min, 10
hour, and so on.
9
• Relative Time Mode
The clock is started in sync with the starting of the computation, and the timer times
out every specified interval. In this mode, the timer and the clock stop when a power
failure occurs.
Example: Interval:
00:15
The timer times out every 15 minutes after the computation is started.
Setup Item and Corresponding Display
Display
Absolute
Relative
Ref. Time
Interval
Description
Absolute time mode
Relative time mode
Reference time
Interval
For absolute time mode timers, set the reference time and interval; for relative time mode
timers, set the interval.
Timers That Are Used
The timer that is used can be set for each channel.
<Related Topics>
Setting the timer to be used for each channel: Section 9.6
9-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9.12 Setting the Timer Used in TLOG Computation and Periodic Printout
Reset
Selects whether to reset the TLOG computed value at each interval. The figure below
illustrates the reset operation for sum computation (TLOG.SUM).
Example: TLOG.SUM computation
1
2
3
Timer timeout
Reset
Reset
Reset
Reset: On
Reset: Off
When reset is ON, the sum value is calculated over each interval. When set to Off, the
sum value from computation start is calculated.
Printout
On: Prints the computed value every interval specified by the timer. Computation
channels set to Off do not apply.
Off: Does not print.
9-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9.13 Changing the Channel Recording Color (Dot
Model)
This section explains the details of changing the recording colors of computation
channels.
Basic Setting mode cannot be entered when recording is in progress or when
computation is in progress on models with the computation function (/M1 option).
Procedure
Changing the Settings
1.
2.
Hold down the
Hold down the
Setting mode.
Press the
key for 3 seconds to enter Setting mode.
MENU
and
keys simultaneously for 3 seconds to enter Basic
3.
4.
5.
key or SHIFT +
key to select Math and then press the
key to select Color and then press the
key.
key.
key.
Press the
key or SHIFT +
Set each item and press the
Use the key or SHIFT +
key to select values.
For the procedure on how to enter values or characters, see section 4.2.
If you press the ESC key in the middle of the operation, the settings entered up
to then are cancelled, and the display returns to a higher level menu.
When the Setting complete screen appears, do either of the following:
6.
To correct the setting, press the
key.
If you are done, press the ESC key.
Basic=Math
Math=Color
Channel=0A
Select the channel.
9
Color=Purple
Select the recording color.
The new setting takes effect.
0A Channel color
Setting complete
ESC/?
Applying the Changes and Returning to Operation Mode
Press the key or SHIFT + key to select End and then press the
the key to select Store and then press the
key. Press
key. The changes are applied, and
the screen returns to Operation mode. If you select Abort and press the
key, the
changes are discarded, and the screen returns to Operation mode. Press the ESC key
to return to the Basic= screen.
Explanation
Color
This section explains the details of changing the recording colors of computation
channels.
The default values are as follows:
Purple: channel 0A, 0G, Red: channel 0B, 0J, Green: channel 0C, 0K,
Blue: channel 0D, 0M, Brown: channel 0E, 0N, Black: channel 0F, 0P
9-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9.14 Changing the Channel Assignments of
Recording Pens (Pen Model)
Measurement channels and computation channels can be arbitrarily assigned to
recording pens.
Basic Setting mode cannot be entered when recording is in progress or when
computation is in progress on models with the computation function (/M1 option).
Procedure
Changing the Settings
1.
2.
Hold down the
Hold down the
Setting mode.
Press the
key.
key for 3 seconds to enter Setting mode.
MENU
and
keys simultaneously for 3 seconds to enter Basic
3.
4.
5.
key or SHIFT +
key to select Math and then press the
Press the
key.
key or SHIFT +
key to select Output pen and then press the
Set each item and press the
Use the key or SHIFT +
key.
key to select values.
For the procedure on how to enter values or characters, see section 4.2.
If you press the ESC key in the middle of the operation, the settings entered up
to then are cancelled, and the display returns to a higher level menu.
When the Setting complete screen appears, do either of the following:
6.
To correct the setting, press the
key.
If you are done, press the ESC key.
Basic=Math
Math=Output pen
Pen=1 CH=01
Pen 1
Select the pen number and channel
number.
The new setting takes effect.
Setting complete
ESC/?
Applying the Changes and Returning to Operation Mode
Press the key or SHIFT + key to select End and then press the
the key to select Store and then press the
key. Press
key. The changes are applied, and
the screen returns to Operation mode. If you select Abort and press the
key, the
changes are discarded, and the screen returns to Operation mode. Press the ESC key
to return to the Basic= screen.
Explanation
Output pen
Measurement channels and computation channels can be arbitrarily assigned to
recording pens.
The default values are as follows:
Pen No. 1 (red): Channel 01
Pen No. 2 (green): Channel 02
Pen No. 3 (Blue): Channel 03
Pen No. 4 (violet): channel 04
9-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9.15 Changing the Type of Report Data Printed in
Periodic Printout
This section explains the details of selecting the type of computed value (the average,
minimum, maximum, sum, or instantaneous) printed in periodic printout
Basic Setting mode cannot be entered when recording is in progress or when
computation is in progress on models with the computation function (/M1 option).
Procedure
Changing the Settings
1.
2.
Hold down the
Hold down the
Setting mode.
Press the
key.
key for 3 seconds to enter Setting mode.
MENU
and
keys simultaneously for 3 seconds to enter Basic
3.
4.
5.
key or SHIFT +
key to select Math and then press the
Press the
key.
key or SHIFT +
key to select Print2 and then press the
Set each item and press the
Use the key or SHIFT +
key.
key to select values.
For the procedure on how to enter values or characters, see section 4.2.
If you press the ESC key in the middle of the operation, the settings entered up
to then are cancelled, and the display returns to a higher level menu.
When the Setting complete screen appears, do either of the following:
6.
To correct the setting, press the
key.
If you are done, press the ESC key.
Basic=Math
Math=Print2
CH=0A-0A
9
Set the channel range.
First channel
Last channel
Mode=AVE
Select the type of report data to print.
Select the sum scale.
SUM scale=Off
The new setting takes effect.
Periodic
Setting complete
ESC/?
Applying the Changes and Returning to Operation Mode
Press the key or SHIFT + key to select End and then press the
the key to select Store and then press the
key. Press
key. The changes are applied, and
the screen returns to Operation mode. If you select Abort and press the
key, the
changes are discarded, and the screen returns to Operation mode. Press the ESC key
to return to the Basic= screen.
9-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9.15 Changing the Type of Reported Data Printed in Periodic Printout
Explanation
Mode
Sets the type of report data to be printed.
AVE: Prints the average value over the interval.
MIX: Prints the minimum, maximum, and average values over the interval.
SUM: Prints the sum value over the interval. If SUM is selected, set the sum scale.
MIN: Prints the minimum value over the interval.
MAX: Prints the maximum value over the interval.
INST: Prints the instantaneous value.
SUM scale
Set this item only when SUM is selected.
For the definition of the term “sum scale,” see page 7-14.
Off:
/s:
Simply sums the computed values.
Sums by converting the computed values to a value over 1 second.
/min: Sums by converting the computed values to a value over 1 minute.
/h: Sums by converting the computed values to a value over 1 hour.
/day: Sums by converting the computed values to a value over 1 day.
<Related Topics>
Setting the periodic printout interval: Section 7.8
9-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9.16 Setting the Bar Graph Display Mode
This section explains the details of setting the bar graph display mode.
Basic Setting mode cannot be entered when recording is in progress or when
computation is in progress on models with the computation function (/M1 option).
Procedure
Changing the Settings
1.
2.
Hold down the
Hold down the
¥U‘ting mode.
Press the
key.
key for 3 seconds to enter Setting mode.
MENU
and
keys simultaneously for 3 seconds to enter Basic
3.
4.
5.
key or SHIFT +
key to select Math and then press the
Press the
key.
key or SHIFT +
key to select Bar graph and then press the
Set each item and press the
Use the key or SHIFT +
key.
key to select values.
For the procedure on how to enter values or characters, see section 4.2.
If you press the ESC key in the middle of the operation, the settings entered up
to then are cancelled, and the display returns to a higher level menu.
When the Setting complete screen appears, do either of the following:
6.
Press the
key to set other channels.
If you are done, press the ESC key.
Basic=Math
Math=Bar graph
CH=0A-0A
9
Set the channel range.
First channel
Last channel
Graph=Normal
Select the display mode of the bar
graph.
The new setting takes effect.
0A-0A Channel
Setting complete
ESC/?
Applying the Changes and Returning to Operation Mode
Press the key or SHIFT + key to select End and then press the
the key to select Store and then press the
key. Press
key. The changes are applied, and
the screen returns to Operation mode. If you select Abort and press the
key, the
changes are discarded, and the screen returns to Operation mode. Press the ESC key
to return to the Basic= screen.
Explanation
Graph
Normal: Sets the base point of the bar graph to the left or right of the recording span
whichever is smaller in value.
Center: Sets the base point of the bar graph to the 50% position of the recording span.
9-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9.17 Setting the Procedure Taken When the
Computed Result Is in Error
This section explains the details of setting the procedure taken when the computed result
is in error.
Basic Setting mode cannot be entered when recording is in progress or when
computation is in progress on models with the computation function (/M1 option).
Procedure
Changing the Settings
1.
2.
Hold down the
Hold down the
Setting mode.
Press the
key.
key for 3 seconds to enter Setting mode.
MENU
and
keys simultaneously for 3 seconds to enter Basic
3.
4.
5.
key or SHIFT +
key to select Math and then press the
Press the
key.
key or SHIFT +
key to select Error data and then press the
Set each item and press the
Use the key or SHIFT +
key.
key to select values.
For the procedure on how to enter values or characters, see section 4.2.
If you press the ESC key in the middle of the operation, the settings entered up
to then are cancelled, and the display returns to a higher level menu.
When the Setting complete screen appears, do either of the following:
6.
Press the
key to set other channels.
If you are done, press the ESC key.
Basic=Math
Math=Error data
Error=+Over
Over=Skip
Select the computation error procedure.
Select the input overflow procedure.
The new setting takes effect.
Math exception
Setting complete
ESC/?
Applying the Changes and Returning to Operation Mode
Press the key or SHIFT + key to select End and then press the
the key to select Store and then press the
key. Press
key. The changes are applied, and
the screen returns to Operation mode. If you select Abort and press the
key, the
changes are discarded, and the screen returns to Operation mode. Press the ESC key
to return to the Basic= screen.
9-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9.17 Setting the Procedure Taken When the Computed Result Is in Error
Explanation
Error
Specifies how to display or print the computed result when computation errors occur.
+Over: Set to +over. Displayed/Printed as “+Over.”
–Over: Set to –over. Displayed/Printed as “–Over.”
Computation that result in errors
•
•
•
•
x/0
SQR(-x)
LOG(-x)
When a channel set to Skip is included in the equation
Over
Selects the procedure when an “over” value* is input for TLOG.SUM or TLOG.AVE
computation.
*
An “over” value on a measurement channel refers to +Over or –Over. See section 12.4. An
“over” value on a computation channel refers to a value that is less than or equal to
–100000000 or greater than or equal to 100000000 excluding the decimal.
Skip: The “over” value is not used in the computation.
Limit: The following limit value is used for the computation.
Channel
Limit Value
Measurement channel • For scaling (1-5V, scaling, and square root)
–Over: –315000, +Over: 31500 (excluding the decimal)
• For input types other than scaling
–Over: The minimum measurable value at the specified range type
(Example: –2.000 at 2V range)
+Over: The maximum measurable value at the specified range type
(Example: 2.000 at 2V range)
Computation channel
–Over: –100000000, +Over: 100000000 (excluding the decimal)
9
9-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 10 Troubleshooting
10.1 A List of Error Messages
There are cases in which error codes and messages are displayed on the screen during
operation. The error messages and their description are listed below.
Setting Errors
Code Message
Explanation/Countermeasures
1
System error.
Contact OMEGA.
2
Incorrect date or time setting.
A disabled channel is selected.
Incorrect function parameter.
The input numerical value exceeds the set range.
Incorrect input character string.
Too many characters.
Check the setting.
3
The channel does not exist.
4
Incorrect communication parameter.
–
5
6
The entered character cannot be used.
–
7
8
Incorrect input mode.
Incorrect range mode (Volt, TC, Scale, etc.) setting.
Incorrect range type (2 V, R, PT100, etc.) setting.
Incorrect character string format.
Channels whose range differs cannot be set simultaneously.
9
Incorrect input range code.
Format error.
10
11
Range settings are not same within the selected
channels.
12
13
An invalid characters.
Ref. CH error.
Contains an invalid character.
Specify a channel whose range is set to voltage, TC, or RTD for
the reference channel.
21
22
23
24
Cannot set an alarm for a SKIPPED channel.
The upper and lower span limits are equal.
The upper and lower scale limits are equal.
–
This is not allowed.
This is not allowed.
–
The lower span limit is greater than the upper span
limit.
25
The lower scale limit is greater than the upper scale
limit.
–
26
27
30
Bias cannot be set to the SKIPPED channel.
Bias cannot be set to the DI channel.
–
–
The partial boundary value exceeds the range of the –
span.
10
31
35
Partial is invalid on the SKIPPED channel.
–
The upper and lower limits of the printing zone
are equal.
Set the rightmost value of the zone – the leftmost value ≥ 5
mm.
36
37
The lower limit of the printing zone is greater
than the upper limit.
Set the rightmost value of the zone – the leftmost value ≥ 5
mm.
The printing zone is narrower than the minimum
width (5 mm).
Set the rightmost value of the zone – the leftmost value ≥ 5
mm.
38
47
48
49
Partial is invalid on the DI channel.
All items in DISP menu parameters are set to SKIP.
Start = Finish.
–
–
The DST start time and end time cannot be set to the same time.
Invalid or missing DST time settings.
Since the time gains one hour when the DST starts, the set-up
time does not exist.
61
There is no channel specified by the MATH
expression.
Set a computation channel.
62
63
64
70
71
MATH expression grammar is incorrect.
MATH expression sequence is incorrect.
MATH upper and lower span values are equal.
MATH constant description is incorrect.
The range of the MATH constant is exceeded.
Enter the equation correctly.
Enter the equation correctly.
This is not allowed.
Incorrect computation constant syntax.
–
10-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10.1 A List of Error Messages
Code Message
Explanation/Countermeasures
72
MATH channel is turned off
–
81
All space or ‘quit’ string cannot be specified.
The key-lock release password is incorrect.
This key is locked.
–
86
Enter the correct password.
87
–
91
Password is incorrect.
Enter the correct password.
100
101
102
103
IP address doesn’t belong to class A, B, or C.
The result of the masked IP address is all 0s or 1s.
SUBNET mask is incorrect.
–
–
Set a correct subnet mask.
The net part of default gateway is not equal to
that of IP address.
Set the correct default gateway.
151
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
169
This action is invalid during calculation.
This action is invalid during chart end.
This action is invalid during pen hold.
Cannot set an number for a skipped data.
This action is invalid during record.
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
This action is invalid during manual printing.
This action is invalid during list printing.
This action is invalid during setup list printing.
This action is invalid during chart feed.
This action is invalid during ribbon hold.
Operation Errors
Code Message
Explanation/Countermeasures
232
There is no available data.
There is no data for periodic printout or data for calculating TLOG
when the timer expired.
Communication Errors
Code Message
Explanation/Countermeasures
300
301
Command is too long.
–
Too many number of commands delimited with ’;’.
Keep the number of commands separated by sub delimiters
under 10.
302
303
This command has not been defined.
–
Data request command can not be enumerated with –
sub-delimiter.
350
351
Command is not permitted to the current user level.
–
–
This command cannot be specified in the current
mode.
352
353
The option is not installed.
–
–
This command cannot be specified in the current
setting.
354
390
391
392
393
394
395
396
397
This command is not available during calculation.
Command error.
–
–
Delimiter error.
–
Parameter error.
–
No permission.
–
No such connection.
–
Use “quit” to close this connection.
Failed to disconnect.
Attempted to disconnect its own connection.
–
No TCP control block.
The control block of the specified connection cannot be found.
10-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10.1 A List of Error Messages
Code Message
Explanation/Countermeasures
400
401
402
Input username.
–
–
Input password.
Select username from ‘admin’ or ‘user’.
If the recorder is configured not to use the user name and
password, use user names ‘admin’ or ‘user’.
403
404
420
421
Login incorrect, try again!
–
–
–
–
No more login at the specified level is acceptable.
Connection has been lost.
The number of simultaneous connection has been
exceeded.
422
Communication has timed-out.
–
Warning Messages
Code Message
Explanation/Countermeasures
600
Initialized.
Settings and measured data have been initialized.
System Errors
Code Message
Explanation/Countermeasures
Contact OMEGA.
Contact OMEGA.
Contact OMEGA.
Contact OMEGA.
Contact OMEGA.
Contact OMEGA.
Contact OMEGA.
Contact OMEGA.
Contact OMEGA.
Contact OMEGA.
Contact OMEGA.
Contact OMEGA.
Contact OMEGA.
Contact OMEGA.
Contact OMEGA.
902
910
921
922
930
940
950
951
960
961
962
963
964
965
966
RAM failure.
A/D error.
A/D calibration value error.
A/D calibration is in the wrong order.
Memory acquisition failure.
The ethernet module is down.
A/D number error.
EEPROM write error.
Ribbon error
Printer error
Plotter error
Pen 1 error
Pen 2 error
10
Pen 3 error
Pen 4 error
10-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10.2 Troubleshooting Flow Charts
Follow the flow charts to correct the problem.
Nothing works (pen and chart paper do not move).
Is the power switch
NO
Turn ON the power properly.
Section 2.6
turned ON? Does the switch
work properly?
YES
Is the power supply
connected properly?
NO
Connect properly.
Section 2.5
YES
Supply the power at the specified
voltage and frequency.
NO
Is the power supplied
properly?
YES
Contact OMEGA.
• The reading error is large.
• The indication is unstable.
• The pen is off the scale on either the 0% or 100% side.
Does the input meet
the specifications?
NO
Change the input to meet
the specifications.
YES
Are the span and range
settings correct?
NO
Adjust the span and range.
YES
To the next page
10-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10.2 Troubleshooting Flow Charts
From the previous page
YES
• Separate the input wiring from the noise source.
• Ground the recorder properly.
• Ground the measured object properly.
• Insulate the TC from the measured object.
• Use shielded cables for input.
NO
Is the input free of noise?
YES
Select the integration time of the A/D converter
(See section 7.2).
• Use input filter (pen model: see sections 7.12 and
6.2), moving average (dot model: see sections
7.11 and section 6.3).
• Attach the input terminal cover properly.
• Protect the input terminal from wind or fans.
• Keep the temperature fluctuation near the input
terminal to a minimum.
Is the environmental
temperature kept constant?
NO
NO
NO
YES
• Wire correctly (see section 2.3).
• Install the terminal block correctly.
• Fasten the terminal screws correctly.
• Insulate the RTD from ground.
• If burnt, replace the TC.
Is the input wiring correct?
YES
• Stop the TC burnout upscale/
downscale function of other equipment.
• Ground the recorder and other equipment at the
same grounding pole.
Is the input wiring parallel
with other equipment?
• Disconnect parallel wiring.
YES
(Use a double-element TC, for instance.)
Is the RJC setting
correct (TC input)?
NO
Set correctly.
Section 7.4
10
YES
Is the pen
position and dot
printing position adjustment
correct?
NO
Section 11.5
Section 11.6
Adjust the pen position or dot printing position
YES
Contact OMEGA.
10-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10.2 Troubleshooting Flow Charts
Display and other functions do not work properly.
• Separate the input and
NO
communication wiring from the
noise source.
Is the input free of noise?
YES
• Ground the recorder properly.
• Use shielded cables for input and
communication wiring.
• Insert an isolation transformer
into the power line.
• Insert a power line filter into the
power line.
• If an inductive load is connected
to an alarm contact output, use a
surge suppresser on that line.
Contact OMEGA.
Keys do not work.
Release the key lock using the
FUNC key (see section 3.13).
NO
Is the key lock released?
YES
Contact OMEGA.
10-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 11 Maintenance
11.1 Periodic Inspection
Check the operation periodically to keep the recorder in good working order.
Perform the following checks and replace worn parts as needed.
•
•
Is the indication and recording functioning properly? If not, see chapter 10.
Are recorded lines or printed characters clear (not blurred)?
For the replacement procedure of felt pens and plotter pens, see section 3.3 (pen
model).
For the replacement procedure of the ribbon cassette, see section 3.4 (dot model).
Is the chart paper feeding properly (no paper jams)? If not, see chapter 10.
Is there enough chart paper remaining?
•
•
Remaining chart length is printed on the left margin of the chart at intervals of 20 cm.
For the chart paper replacement procedure, see section 3.2.
Remaining amount of chart paper
11
11-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11.2 Cleaning the Recorder
CAUTION
•
•
When cleaning, be sure not to scratch the flexible printed circuit board of the
plotter carriage.
Do not apply lubricating oil to the shaft.
Pen Model
To maintain smooth operation, it is recommended that the plotter carriage shaft be
cleaned once a year.
Cleaning Procedure
Wipe the dust off the plotter carriage shaft using a soft lint-free cloth or paper.
If the dirt does not come off easily, apply ethyl alcohol to the cloth or paper.
Dot Model
To maintain smooth operation, wipe the dust off the two shafts of the printer carriage
using a soft lint-free cloth or paper. It is recommended that these shafts be cleaned
once a year.
11-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11.3 Replacing the Internal Light LED
If the brightness of the internal light degrades with time, replace the LED.
For the replacement parts, see section 11.7.
CAUTION
•
•
The LED is connected to the internal circuitry through the flexible printed circuit
board. Do not pull the LED with force.
Be sure not to break the flexible printed circuit board.
Replacement Procedure
1.
2.
3.
Open the door and turn OFF the power switch.
Open the display and key panel section.
Pull out the internal light LED assembly that is attached to the end of the display
and key panel section.
Display and key panel
4.
Remove the LED assembly from the connector of the flexible printed circuit
board.
Flexible printed circuit board
LED assembly
Connector
11
5.
6.
Connect the new LED assembly.
Push the LED assembly back into the display and key panel section.
Be sure not to bend or scratch the flexible printed circuit board.
Stored condition of the flexible printed circuit board
Flexible printed circuit board
7.
Turn the power switch ON and check that the internal light comes on a few
seconds later.
11-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11.4 Calibrating the Recorder
Calibrate the measured value against the input.
It is recommended that the recorder be calibrated once a year to assure its
measurement accuracy.
For details regarding calibration, contact OMEGA.
Required Instruments
A calibration instrument with appropriate resolution l˜ required for calibrating the
recorder.
Recommended Instrument
•
DC voltage standard:
Main Specifications
Output accuracy: ±(0.005% + 1 µV)
Decade resistance box:
•
Main Specifications
Accuracy of output range 0.1 to 500 Ω: ±(0.01% + 2 mΩ)
Resolution: 0.001 Ω
•
0°C standard temperature device:
Main Specifications
Standard temperature stability accuracy: ±0.05°C
For information on purchasing the calibration instruments, contact OMEGA.
Calibration Procedure
1.
Wire the recorder and the calibration instrument as shown in the following figure,
and adequately warm up the instruments (the warm-up time of the recorder is at
least 30 minutes).
2.
3.
Check that the operating environment such as ambient temperature and
humidity is within the normal operating conditions (see section 12.6).
Apply appropriate input signals corresponding to 0%, 50%, and 100% of the
input range and calculate the errors from the readings.
If the error is outside the accuracy specifications, contact OMEGA.
Note
For thermocouple inputs, you must measure the temperature of the input terminal and apply a
voltage taking into account the reference junction temperature.
DC Voltage Measurement
–
+
+
–
DC voltage standard
Input terminals
11-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11.4 Calibrating the Recorder
Temperature Measurement When Using an RTD
The resistance of three lead wires must be equal.
/b
−/B +/A
Decade resistance box
Input terminals
Temperature Measurement When Using a Thermocouple
Copper wires
Thermocouple wires or TC extension wires
−
+
+
–
Copper
wires
Thermocouple
wires
DC voltage standard
Input terminals
(0°C standard temperature device)
RJC of TC input
As the measurement terminal of the recorder is generally at room temperature, the
actual output of the thermocouple is different from the values given on the
thermoelectromotive force table based on 0°C. The recorder performs compensation by
measuring the temperature at the input terminal and adding the corresponding
thermoelectromotive force to the actual output of the thermocouple. Therefore, when the
measurement terminal is shorted (equivalent to the case when the detector tip is 0°C),
the measured value indicates the temperature of the input terminal.
11
When calibrating the recorder, this compensation voltage (thermoelectromotive force of
0°C reference corresponding to the input terminal temperature) must be subtracted from
the output of the DC voltage standard before application. As shown in the figure, by
using the 0°C standard temperature device to compensate the reference junction at 0 °C,
you can input the thermoelectromotive force of 0 °C reference from the DC voltage
standard and perform the calibration.
11-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11.5 Adjusting the Pen Position (Pen Model)
This section explains the details of adjusting the pen position on the chart paper.
It is recommended that the pen be adjusted once a year to assure its recording accuracy.
Note
Pen position is adjusted under standard operating conditions when the recorder is shipped from
the factory. Because the chart paper may expand or contract depending on the environment in
which the recorder is used, it is recommended that the position be readjusted before use.
Procedure
1.
2.
Warm up the recorder for at least 30 minutes.
Check that the operating environment such as ambient temperature and
humidity is within the normal operating conditions (see section 12.6).
3.
4.
Hold down the
Hold down the
Setting mode.
Press the
key for 3 seconds to enter Setting mode.
MENU
and
keys simultaneously for 3 seconds to enter Basic
5.
6.
7.
key or SHIFT+
key to select P_Adj and then press the key.
Select the Pen No.
Press the key to select Zero (left edge of the chart paper) or Full (right
edge of the chart paper) and then press the
Adjust Zero first and then Full.
key.
Increase or decrease the setting to align the pen position with the scale line on
the chart paper. Then, press the
key. To change the setting, press the
key to change the value.
key to move the cursor and
The pen moves after the
key is pressed.
A value change of 1 corresponds to 0.033 mm change in the pen position.
Decreasing the value moves the pen to the left and increasing the value moves
the pen to the right.
8.
Press the
key to set adjust other pens.
Press the ESC key to finish the adjustment. The screen returns to the
Basic=P_Adj screen.
Basic=P_Adj
Select Zero or Full.
Select the pen No.
P_Adj=Zero
Pen No.=1
Zero=40
Change the value to adjust the pen
position.
P_Adj
Setting complete
The pen moves.
ESC/?
Applying the Changes and Returning to Operation Mode
Press the key or SHIFT + key to select End and then press the
the key to select Store and then press the
key. Press
key. The changes are applied, and
the screen returns to Operation mode. If you select Abort and press the
key, the
changes are discarded, and the screen returns to Operation mode. Press the ESC key
to return to the Basic= screen.
11-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11.6 Adjusting the Dot Printing Position (Dot Model)
This section explains the details of adjusting the dot printing position on the chart paper.
It is recommended that the position be adjusted once a year to assure its recording
accuracy.
Note
Dot printing position is adjusted under standard operating conditions when the recorder is
shipped from the factory. Because the chart paper may expand or contract depending on the
environment in which the recorder is used, it is recommended that the position be readjusted
before use.
Procedure
1.
2.
Warm up the recorder for at least 30 minutes.
Check that the operating environment such as ambient temperature and
humidity is within the normal operating conditions (see section 12.6).
3.
4.
Hold down the
Hold down the
Setting mode.
Press the
key for 3 seconds to enter Setting mode.
MENU
and
keys simultaneously for 3 seconds to enter Basic
5.
6.
key or SHIFT +
key to select P_Adj and then press the
key.
Press the
key to select Hysteresis (center of the chart paper), Zero (left
edge of the chart paper), or Full (right edge of the chart paper) and then press
the key.
Adjust Hysteresis first followed by Zero and then Full.
Adjusting the Hysteresis
A line is drawn at the center of the chart paper. If the line appears as shown in Figure
a, increase the displayed setting. Then press the
key. If the line appears as shown
key.
key to move the cursor and
in Figure b, decrease the displayed setting. Then, press the
To change the setting, press the
the value.
key to change
Repeat this procedure until the line becomes straight.
A value change of 1 corresponds to 0.1 mm change in the dot printing position.
Up
Up
Down
Down
11
Figure a
Figure b
Adjusting Zero and Full
A line is drawn to the left edge for Zero and right edge for Full.
Increase or decrease the displayed setting so that the drawn line is aligned with the
scale line on the chart paper. Then, press the
setting is the same as with the adjustment of hysteresis.
The line moves after the key is pressed.
key. The procedure of changing the
A value change of 1 corresponds to 0.1mm change in the dot printing position.
Decreasing the value moves the line to the left and increasing the value moves the
line to the right.
11-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11.6 Adjusting the Dot Printing Position (Dot Model)
7.
Press the ESC key to finish the adjustment. The screen returns to the
Basic=P_Adj screen.
Basic=P_Adj
Select Zero or Full.
P_Adj=Hysteresis
Change the value to adjust the pen
position.
Hysteresis=-2
P_Adj
Setting complete
The dot printing position moves.
ESC/?
Applying the Changes and Returning to Operation Mode
Press the key or SHIFT + key to select End and then press the
the key to select Store and then press the
key. Press
key. The changes are applied, and
the screen returns to Operation mode. If you select Abort and press the
key, the
changes are discarded, and the screen returns to Operation mode. Press the ESC key
to return to the Basic= screen.
11-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11.7 Recommended Replacement Periods for Worn
Parts
To preserve the reliability of the recorder and to use the recorder in good condition for an
extended time, it is recommended that periodic replacements be made on parts.
The table below shows the recommended replacement period for expendable parts.
The replacement period shown here applies when the recorder is used under standard
operating conditions. For the actual replacement period, consider the actual conditions
of use.
Replacement of parts other than the chart paper, pen, ribbon cassette, and internal light
LED will be carried out by a OMEGA engineer or an engineer certified by OMEGA.
Contact OMEGA when such replacement is necessary.
Note
The replacement period of the display and the internal light LED is the half life of the
brightness. The deterioration of brightness varies depending on the condition of use, and its
determination is subjective. Consider these facts for determining the actual replacement
period.
Pen Model
Replacement
Period
Quantity
Used
Part Name
CHART
Item
Part No.
Note
Z-fold chart paper 33 days
RD100-ZFP-10 When used at 20 mm/h
1
Felt pen
2 km
PEN ASSY
RD100A-01
RD100A-02
RD100A-03
RD100A-04
Red
Green
Blue
1 each
At a pen speed of
10 cm/s
Violet
100,000
characters
1
Plotter pen
Display
PEN ASSY
RD100A-11
When printing continuously
5 years*
5 years
5 years
5 years
5 years
5 years
DISPLAY ASSY B8800CA
MOTOR ASSY B9962EJ
CARRIAGE ASSY B8800DJ
1
1
Chart paper feed
motor
1
1
Plotter carriage
Plotter motor
Lever bearing
Pen servo
For the X-axis
For the plotter
MOTOR ASSY
BEARING
B8800DT
B9900RP
B8800FG
1
1 to 4
SERVO ASSY
Shared by all pens
(excludes the pen arm ASSY)
11
1
Internal light LED
2 years*
LED ASSY
B8800CR
*
The half life of the brightness at the factory default brightness setting.
11-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11.7 Recommended Replacement Periods for Worn Parts
Dot Model
Replacement
Quantity
Used
Item
Part Name
Part No.
Note
Period
Z-fold chart paper 33 days
CHART
RD100-ZFP-10 When used at 20 mm/h
RD100-RC
1
1
Ribbon cassette
Display
3 months
5 years*
5 years
3 years
3 years
5 years
5 years
5 years
5 years
RIBBON CASSETTE
DISPLAY ASSY
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
B8800CA
B9962EJ
Chart paper feed
motor
MOTOR ASSY
LEVER ASSY
PULLY
Lever
B9901EK
B9963CJ
B9963CF
B9963CL
B9962EJ
For the carriage
For the carriage
Pulley
Carriage motor
Carriage
MOTOR ASSY
CARRIAGE ASSY
MOTOR ASSY
GEAR
Ribbon shift motor
Ribbon shift gear
B8801BX
B8801BW
1 each
1
Ribbon feed motor 5 years
MOTOR ASSY
GEAR
B9962EJ
Ribbon feed gear
5 years
1 each
B9901HL
B9901HM
B9901HN
1
Internal light LED
2 years*
LED ASSY
B8800CR
*
The half life of the brightness at the factory default brightness setting.
11-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 12 Specifications
12.1 Input Specifications
Number of Inputs and Scan Interval on the Pen Model
Item
Specifications
1, 2, 3, or 4
125 ms
Number of inputs
Scan interval
Number of Inputs and Scan Interval on the Dot Model
Item
Specifications
Number of inputs
Scan interval
6
1 s (when the integration time of the A/D converter is 20 ms or 16.7 ms)
2.5 s (when the integration time of the A/D converter is 100 ms)
Input Type
Item
Specifications
Input type
DC voltage, 1-5V, TC, RTD, DI (ON/OFF input), DC current (by adding an external shunt resistor)
Input Range and Measurable Range
Input
Range Type
Measurable Range
Volt
20 mV
60 mV
200 mV
2 V
–20.00 to 20.00 mV
–60.00 to 60.00 mV
–200.0 to 200.0 mV
–2.000 to 2.000 V
6 V
–6.000 to 6.000 V
20 V
–20.00 to 20.00 V
50 V
–50.00 to 50.00 V
1-5V
(0.800 to 1.200 V range) to (4.800 to 5.200 V range)
TC
R1
0.0 to 1760.0 °C
0.0 to 1760.0 °C
0.0 to 1820.0 °C
−200.0 to 1370.0 °C
−200.0 to 800.0 °C
−200.0 to 1100.0 °C
−200.0 to 400.0 °C
0.0 to 1300.0 °C
0.0 to 2315.0 °C
−200.0 to 900.0 °C
−200.0 to 400.0 °C
0.0 to 2400.0 °C
32 to 3200 °F
32 to 3200 °F
32 to 3308 °F
−328 to 2498 °F
−328.0 to 1472.0 °F
−328.0 to 2012.0 °F
−328.0 to 752.0 °F
32 to 2372 °F
S1
B1
K1
E1
J1
T1
N1
W2
L3
32 to 4199 °F
−328.0 to 1652.0 °F
−328.0 to 752.0 °F
32 to 4352 °F
U3
WRe4
RTD
DI
PT (Pt100)5
–200.0 to 600.0°C
–200.0 to 550.0°C
−328.0 to 1112.0 °F
−328.0 to 1022.0 °F
JPT (JPt100)5
Level
Contact
0: Less than 2.4 V, 1: Greater than or equal to 2.4 V
0: Open, 1: Closed
1
2
3
4
5
R, S, B, K, E, J, T, N: IEC584-1 (1995), DIN IEC584, JIS C1602-1995
W: W-5% Rd/W-26% Rd (Hoskins Mfg. Co.), ASTM E988
L: Fe-CuNi, DIN43710, U: Cu-CuNi, DIN43710
WRe: W-3%Re/W-25%Re (Hoskins Mfg Co.)
Pt100: JIS C1604-1997, IEC751-1995, DIN IEC751-1996
JPt100: JIS C1604-1989, JIS C1606-1989
12
Measurement current: i = 1 mA (Pt100, JPt100)
12-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12.1 Input Specifications
Item
Specifications
Input type
Floating unbalanced input.
Isolation between channels (except, b terminal is shared for RTD input).
Burnout Detection of TC
Can be set for each channel.
Upscale/Downscale switchable.
Input Type
TC input
Operating Conditions
2 kΩ or less: normal, 10 MΩ or more: burnout, detection current: approx. 10 µA
0.2 V or less: burnout
1-5V input
RJC of TC input
Set whether to use the recorder RJC function or an external RJC function for each channel.
Set the compensation voltage when using an external RJC function.
Compensation voltage range: –20000 µV to 20000 µV.
A/D converter
Resolution
16 bits
Integration time
Pen model: Selectable from 20 ms (50 Hz), 16.7 ms (60 Hz), and Auto (auto switch between 20 ms
and 16.7 ms according to the power supply frequency).
Dot model: Selectable from 20 ms (50 Hz), 16.7 ms (60 Hz), 100 ms and Auto (auto switch
between 20 ms and 16.7 ms according to the power supply frequency).
Filter function (pen model) Filter ON/OFF switchable for each channel.
Time constant selectable from 2, 5, and 10 s.
Moving average function
(dot model)
Moving average ON/OFF switchable for each channel.
The number of samples of the moving average is selectable between 2 and 16.
Input Computation (Standard Function)
Item
Specifications
Delta computation
Calculates the difference between two channel inputs using the following equation.
Delta = (the input value of the channel set to delta computation) – (the input value of the
reference channel)
where (reference channel NO.) < (channel No. set to delta computation).
Computable input type: DC voltage, TC, and RTD. The channel set to delta computation and the
reference channel is set to the same range type.
Linear scaling
Scales the input value to a value with a unit suitable for the application.
Computable input type: DC voltage, TC, RTD, DI
Value after scaling
Mantissa: –20000 to 30000
Decimal position: Can be set arbitrarily
Unit: Can be set arbitrarily (up to 6 characters)
Displayable and printable range
–19999 to 31500
Computation on the 1-5V input
Linear scaling
Linearly scales the 1-5V signal.
Value after scaling: Same as linear scaling.
Displayable and printable range: Same as linear scaling.
Low-cut function
Sets values below 0% of the recording span to the leftmost value of the scale. The leftmost value of
scale must be less than the rightmost value of scale.
Square root computation Takes the square root of the input value and linearly scales the result.
Computable input type: DC voltage
Linear scaling
Value after scaling: Same as linear scaling.
Displayable and printable range: Same as linear scaling.
Sets values below the low-cut point to the leftmost value of scale. The leftmost value of scale must
be less than the rightmost value of scale.
Low-cut function
Low-cut point range: 0.0 to 5.0% of the recording span (0.1% steps)
Bias
Adds a bias to the measuring input value.
Bias value range: ±10% of the span of the measurable range at the specified range type.
±10% of the scaling span if linear scaling is used.
12-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12.2 Alarm Function Specifications
Item
Specifications
Number of alarms
Alarm types
Up to four alarms (level) for each measurement channels.
High limit (H), low limit (L), difference high limit (h), difference low limit (l), high limit on rate-of-
change (R), low limit on rate-of-change (r), delay high limit (T), delay low limit (t). The symbol
indicating the alarm is given in parentheses.
Rate-of-change calculation interval of rate-of-change alarms (can be set individually for the high limit
on rate-of-change and low limit on rate-of-change alarms)
Rate-of-change calculation interval = Scan interval × the number of sampled data
where the number of sample data is a value between 1 and 15
Alarm delay time of delay high and low limit alarms (can be set for each channel, common within a
channel)
1 to 3600 s (1 hour)
However, if the alarm delay time setting is not an integer multiple of the scan interval, the alarm
delay time is set to a value that is the first integer multiple of the scan interval exceeding the
delay time setting.
Hysteresis
Display
Set a width to the value for detecting alarm occurrence/release (common to all channels and all levels)
Applied to high limit alarm and low limit alarm.
Hysteresis range: Approx. 0.0% to 1.0% of the recording span (0.1% steps)
Indicates the alarm occurrence status on the display.
Indication for each channel: Displays the alarm type (display precedence: H, L, T, t, h, l, R, and r).
Alarm summary display: Displayed using an icon.
Displays the alarm point mark and status on the bar graph.
Non-hold/hold operation of alarm indication
Turn ON/OFF the indication along with the alarm occurrence/release (non-hold) or hold the
indication until the alarm ACK operation.
Alarm relay contact output (optional specifications)
See section 12.5
12
12-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12.3 Recording Function Specifications
Trend Recording (Pen Model)
Item
Specifications
Recording pen
Step response time
Number of pens
Recording color
Trend recording
Disposable felt pen
Approx. 1 s (using the IEC61143 measurement method)
Up to 4
Pen 1: Red, pen 2: Green, pen 3: Blue, pen 4: Violet
Updates the data at the scan interval. Continuous recording.
Pen offset compensation Records by compensating for the offset of each pen along the time axis.
Chart speed
5 to 12000 mm/h (82 steps).
Zone recording
Recording zone can be specified for each channel.
Recording width: 5 mm or more (1 mm steps)
Partial expanded recording Records by expanding the right or left side of the boundary position (the other section is reduced).
Boundary position: 1 to 99%
Boundary value: Within the recording span range
Trend Recording (Dot Model)
Item
Specifications
Recording method
Recording color
Trend recording by a 6-color wire dot printer
Channel 1: Purple, channel 2: Red, channel 3: Green, channel 4: Blue, channel 5: Brown,
channel 6: Black
Trend recording interval
Records at the following interval through a raster scan system.
Auto: Synchronizes to the chart speed and automatically sets to the interval
Fix:
10 s/6 channels (see section 12.5 for the recording interval on models with the
computation function (/M1 option)
Chart speed
1 to 1500 mm/h (1 mm steps)
Recording ON/OFF
Zone recording
Recording can be turned ON/OFF for each channel.
Same as the pen model.
Partial expanded recording Same as the pen model.
Chart Paper
Item
Specifications
100 mm
Printing width
Type/Length
Z-fold type. Approx. 16 m.
Chart paper feeding accuracy
Within ±0.1% After feeding 1000 mm and with respect to the print scale on the chart paper.
12-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12.3 Recording Function Specifications
Printouts (Pen Model)
Item
Specifications
Recording pen (color)
Plotter pen (purple)
Alarm printout
Prints alarm occurrence/release.
Printout contents
Occurrence ( )/release ( ) marks, channel No. or tag, alarm type, alarm level, time, printout
buffer overflow mark.
Time printout format
Alarm printout buffer
Selectable from hour:minute, hour:minute:second, month:day:hour:minute,
month:day:hour:minute:second, and year:month:day:hour:minute:second.
Stores 8 occurrences of alarm information waiting to be printed.
Periodic printout
Interval
Prints at specified time intervals from the reference time.
Reference time: 00 hour 00 minute to 23 hour 00 minute (1 hour steps, minute fixed)
Auto:
Automatically determined from the chart speed.
Manual: Select 10 min, 12 min, 15 min, 20 min, 30 min, 1 hour, 2 hours, 3 hours, 4 hours, 6 hours,
8 hours, 12 hours, or 24 hours.
Mode
Selectable from disable periodic printout, print instantaneous values, and print report data (report mode).
Report data: Selectable from the average, minimum, maximum, minimum/maximum/average, sum
value, and instantaneous value.
Printout contents
For instantaneous values: Date/Time, offset compensation ON/OFF, channel information
(measured value, alarm status, unit, delta computation ON/OFF, scale,
channel number or tag, recording color), chart speed (with time ticks)
For report data: Report start/end date/time, offset compensation ON/OFF, events, channel
information (value, unit, range change occurrence, scale, recording color), chart
speed (with time ticks)
Message printout
Number of messages
Printout contents
Prints preset message strings.
5
Time, message (up to 16 characters), printout buffer overflow mark.
Selectable from hour:minute, hour:minute:second, month:day:hour:minute,
month:day:hour:minute:second, year:month:day:hour:minute:second, and not print.
Time printout format
Message printout buffer Stores 5 messages waiting to be printed.
Recording start printout
Printout contents
Time printout format
Prints at the start of recording.
Time and chart speed, printout buffer overflow mark.
Selectable from hour:minute, hour:minute:second, month:day:hour:minute,
month:day:hour:minute:second, and year:month:day:hour:minute:second.
New chart speed printout Prints when the chart speed is changed.
Printout contents
Chart speed and time, printout buffer overflow mark.
Time printout format
Selectable from hour:minute, hour:minute:second, month:day:hour:minute,
month:day:hour:minute:second, and year:month:day:hour:minute:second.
Manual printout
Printout contents
Prints the measured values of all channels.
Measured values of all channels at that point.
Trend recording is temporarily suspended.
Setting printout (List)
Printout contents
Prints the settings of items in Setting mode.
Range setting, alarm setting, etc.
Trend recording is temporarily suspended.
Setting printout (Setup)
Printout contents
Prints the settings of items in Basic Setting mode.
Basic alarm specifications, basic recording specifications, etc.
Trend recording is temporarily suspended.
Items dependent on the chart speed
Chart speed
Periodic printout
Alarm printout
Message printout
New chart speed printout
Printed
12
5 to 9 mm/h
10 to 1500 mm/h
1600 mm/h or higher
Not printed
Printed
Not printed
Printed
Not printed
Chart speed
10 to 18 mm/h
20 to 36 mm/h
40 to 72 mm/h
75 to 135 mm/h
150 to 180 mm/h
200 to 320 mm/h
350 to 1500 mm/h
Periodic printout interval
8 hours
4 hours
2 hours
1 hour
30 minutes
20 minutes
10 minutes
Date printout format
Select the printout format of the date from Y/M/D, M/D/Y, D/M/Y, D.M.Y, and M.D.Y. The format
applies to the date printout of all printout items (version 1.11 and later).
12-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12.3 Recording Function Specifications
Printout (Dot Model)
Item
Specifications
Recording
Channel printout
Dot printing.
Prints the channel number beside the trend recording every approx. 25 mm of chart paper.
Channel printout ON/OFF selectable.
Alarm printout
Prints alarm occurrence/release.
Printout contents
Occurrence ( , red)/release ( , blue) marks, channel No. or tag, alarm type, alarm level, time,
printout buffer overflow mark.
Time printout format
Alarm printout buffer
Selectable from hour:minute, hour:minute:second, month day hour:minute,
month day hour:minute:second, and month day year hour:minute:second.
Stores 12 occurrences of alarm information waiting to be printed.
Periodic printout
Interval
Prints at specified time intervals from the reference time.
Same as the pen model.
Measured value
Printout contents
Same as the pen model.
For instantaneous values: Same as the pen model except offset compensation ON/OFF and
recording color are not printed.
For report data:
Same as the pen model except offset compensation ON/OFF and
recording color are not printed.
Message printout
Same as the pen model.
Recording start printout
Same as the pen model. With time ticks.
New chart speed printout Same as the pen model. With time ticks.
Manual printout
Same as the pen model.
Same as the pen model.
Same as the pen model.
Setting printout (List)
Setting printout (Setup)
Items dependent on the chart speed
Chart speed
Channel printout
Periodic printout
Alarm printout
Message printout
New chart speed printout
Printed
1 to 9 mm/h
10 to 100 mm/h
Printed
Printed
Not printed
Printed
Printed
101 to 1500 mm/h
Not printed
Not printed
Not printed
Chart speed
10 to 19 mm/h
20 to 39 mm/h
40 to 79 mm/h
80 to 100 mm/h
Periodic printout interval
8 hours
4 hours
2 hours
1 hour
Date printout format
Same as the pen model.
Values for Special Measured Values
Same as “Special values” for the digital display on page 12-8.
12-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12.4 Display Function Specifications
Display and Displayed Contents
This section explains the specifications of the display functions of measurement channels and computation channels (/M1 option).
Display examples are illustrations used to explain the displayed contents and differ in appearance from the actual displays.
Item
Specifications
Display
VFD (101 × 16, dot matrix)
Up to 11 characters using large fonts. 17 characters × 2 lines using normal fonts.
Number of screens
15 (switched using keys)
Displayed information
Display type
1-channel digital display
2-channel digital display
4-channel digital display
6-channel digital display (dot model)
1-channel digital + 1-channel bar graph
1-channel digital + 4-channel bar graph (pen model)
2-channel digital + 2-channel bar graph
4-channel bar graph (pen model)
6-channel bar graph (dot model)
Flag display
Channel alarm status display
Date, time, and chart speed display
DI/DO status display
1-channel digital display (tag display)
2-channel digital display (tag display)
1-channel digital + 1-channel bar graph (tag display)
1-channel digital + 4-channel bar graph (tag display) (pen model)
Status display
System display
Lights off
Skip
Multiple display
The following screens can be assigned arbitrarily to the top and bottom sections of the display.
1-channel digital display
2-channel digital display
Date/Time
Chart speed display
Channel alarm status display
Status display
Lights off
1-channel digital display (tag display)
Display update of measured values / computed values
When displayed channels are fixed
Dot model: Updated at the scan interval
Pen model: Updated every 2 s
When displayed channels are automatically switched
Switches the channel and measured values at 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 second intervals.
Status display
RECORD
ALARM
This indicator turns ON when recording is started and turns OFF when stopped.
The indicator turns ON when an alarm occurs and turns OFF when the alarm is released.
If the alarm indication is set to hold operation, the indicator blinks when an alarm occurs. When
alarm ACK operation is performed, the indicator turns ON or OFF.
12
MATH
This indicator turns ON when computation on the computation function (/M1 option) is started and
turns OFF when stopped.
KEYLOCK
CHART END
This indicator turns ON when key lock is activated and turns OFF when released.
This indicator turns ON when the remaining amount of chart paper falls to approximately 2 cm on
models with the FAIL/chart end detection and output function (/F1 option).
12-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12.4 Display Function Specifications
Item
Specifications
Display type specifications
Digital display
Measured value or computed value
• DC voltage input: Displays values between “the min. measurable value – 5% of the span of the
measurable range” and “the max. measurable value + 5% of the span of the measurable range”
of the range (example: –2.200 to 2.200 V for the 2 V range).
• TC and RTD input: Displays values for input values between “the min. measurable value – 10°C”
and “the max. measurable value + 10°C” (example: –10.0°C to 1770.0°C for TC R)
• ON/OFF input (DI): Displays the input value 0 or 1.
• Linear scaling (1-5V, scaling, and square root): Displays value for input values between “the
leftmost value of scale – 5% of scaling span” and “the rightmost value of scale + 5% of scaling
span” (example: –5.0 to 105.0 when scaled to 0.000 to 100.0). However, the displayable range
during scaling is from –19999 to 31500 (excluding the decimal). Values below –19999 and
values above 31500 are displayed as –Over and +Over, respectively.
• Computation channel (/M1 option): Displays values in the range of –9999999 to 99999999.
Displayed with 1 character as follows:
Measurement channels: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6
Computation channels: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, J, K, M, N, P
Alarms are displayed using the symbols below. If multiple alarms are occurring simultaneously, the
alarm with higher precedence is shown.
Channel No.
Alarm
(Higher precedence) H, L, T, t, h, l, R, r (Lower precedence)
Special values
Measurement channel
Status
+Over
–Over
Skip
Display
+Over
–Over
SKIP
Description
See below.
See below.
A value for channels set to skip.
Error
ERROR
Values such as when both the reference channel and measurement
channel are +Over or –Over in delta computation.
+Burnout
–Burnout
B.out
B.out
A value displayed when a burnout is detected on a channel set to
burnout up scale.
A value displayed when a burnout is detected on a channel set to
burnout down scale.
+Over and –Over of measurement channels
A condition in which the value is outside the display range indicated in “Measured value or
computed value” above. For example,
• For 2 V range, values below –2.200 V are –Over and values over 2.200 V are +Over.
• For TC R, values below –10.0°C are –Over and values over 1770.0°C are +Over.
• If scaled to 0.0 to 100.0, values below –5.0 are –Over and values above 105.0 are +Over.
However, the displayable range during scaling is from –19999 to 31500 (excluding the decimal).
Values below –19999 and values above 31500 are displayed as –Over and +Over, respectively.
Computation channel
Status
+Over
–Over
OFF
Display
+Over
–Over
SKIP
Description
When the computed result exceeds 99999999.
When the computed results is less than –9999999.
A value for channels set to Off.
Channel switching interval The switching interval of displayed channels can be set to 1 s, 2 s, 3 s, 4 s, or 5 s.
12-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12.4 Display Function Specifications
Item
Specifications
Bar graph display
Displays the measured value on a bar graph.
Relationship between the digital display and bar graph
Displays the same channel on the digital display and bar graph. On the 2-channel digital + 2-
channel bar graph display, the top bar graph is the left digital display channel and the bottom graph
is the right digital display channel.
Scale
Displays 10 equally spaced scale marks.
Alarm point mark
For a channel set to delta computation, the alarm point marks of h and l are displayed. For all other
channels, the alarm point marks of H, L, T, and t are displayed.
• Blinks on the bar graph when an alarm occurs. Stops blinking when the alarm is released.
Bar graph display mode Selectable from the two modes below.
• Set the base point of the bar graph to the left or right of the recording span whichever is smaller in value.
• Set the base point of the bar graph to the 50% position of the recording span.
Flag display
Displays measured values using flags.
Display channel
The flag can be turned ON/OFF for each channel.
Flag (If flags overlap, the channel with the smallest number is displayed on top)
Displays 10 equally spaced scale marks.
Scale
Channel alarm status display
Lists the alarm status of all channels using the symbols below.
Symbol
Description
•
Alarm is not set.
Alarm is not occurring.
–
Channel No. Alarm is occurring.
Displays the channel number when an alarm occurs and clears when the alarm is
released.
If the alarm indication is set to hold operation, the indicator blinks when an alarm
occurs. When alarm ACK operation is performed, the indicator turns ON (stop
blinking) or OFF.
Date/time and chart speed display
Displays the date/time on the left and chart speed on the right.
The date display format can be selected. The format is common with the “Date printout format.”
DI/DO status display
Status display
DI: Displays the ON/OFF state of the remote control input terminal (/R1 option).
DO: Displays the relay operation (active) of the alarm output terminal (/A1, /A2, or /A3 option).
Displays the status below. The display condition is the same as the status display under the main
display (see page 12-7).
Alarm and chart end (/F1 option)
Lights off
Skip
Displays nothing.
Skips the screen during screen switching.
Tag display
Displays 7-digit tags in place of channel numbers.
See the digital display and bar graph display sections.
Multiple display (display in which different screens can be assigned to the top and bottom sections)
8 display types (see page 12-7) can be assigned to the top and bottom sections of the display
(VFD).
System display
Displays system information by switching screens every 3 seconds. The main displayed contents
are as follows:
Analog: Number of inputs
Option1, Option2: Options that are installed
Math: Number of computation channels
Periodic: Periodic printout interval
12
Interval: Trend recording interval (dot model)
POC: Pen offset compensation ON/OFF (pen model)
MAC address: MAC address
Version: Firmware version number
12-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12.4 Display Function Specifications
Name
Display Example
Description
Measurement channel
1-channel digital display
Channel No. (1 digit), alarm (1 digit),
measured value (6 digits), unit (3 digits)
Displays using 5 × 7 dots when the unit
exceeds 3 digits.
1H3000.0ABC
Unit
Alarm
Channel No.
Measured
value
Computation channel
Channel No. (1 digit), alarm (1 digit),
computed value (9 digits)
AH9999999.9
Measurement channel
2-channel digital display
4-channel digital display
Channel No. (1 digit), alarm (1 digit),
measured value (7 digits), unit (6 digits)
1H-1999.9ABCDEF
2L 2000.0PQRSTU
Computation channel
AH-999999.9ABCDEF
BL9999999.9PQRSTU
Channel No. (1 digit), alarm (1 digit),
computed value (9 digits), unit (6 digits)
hannel
Measurement c
1H3000.0 1H3000.0
3H3000.0 4H3000.0
Channel No. (1 digit), alarm (1 digit),
measured value (6 digits)
Computation channel
AH-1999.9 BH-1999.9
CH9999.9 DH9999.9
Channel No. (1 digit), alarm (1 digit),
computed value (6 digits)
Displayable values are –19999 to 99999 and
a decimal. If this range is exceeded, the value
is displayed as“–####” or “+####.”
Measured value (5 or 6 digits)
6-channel digital display
(Dot model)
999.9 999.9 999.9
999.9 999.9 999.9
Channel No. (1 digit), alarm (1 digit),
measured value (6 digits), unit (3 digits)
Bar graph, scale, alarm (bar graph)
Value and bar graph of the same channel.
1-channel digital display
+ 1-channel bar graph display
1H3000.0ABC
hannel
Measurement c
1H3000.0 2L-999.9
2-channel digital display
+ 2-channel bar graph display
Channel No. (1 digit), alarm (1 digit),
measured value (6 digits)
Bar graph, scale
Computation channel
AH-1999.9 BH9999.9
Channel No. (1 digit), alarm (1 digit),
computed value (6 digits)
Bar graph, scale
Displayable values are –19999 to 99999 and a
decimal. If this range is exceeded, the value
is displayed as“–####” or “+####.”
hannel
Measurement c
1H-1999.9ABCDEF
1-channel digital display
+ 4-channel bar graph display
(Pen model)
Channel No. (1 digit), alarm (1 digit),
measured value (7 digits), unit (6 digits)
Computation channel
AH9999999.9ABCDEF
Channel No. (1 digit), alarm (1 digit),
computed value (9 digits), unit (6 digits)
Bar graph, scale
4-channel bar graph display
(Pen model)
Bar graph, scale
Flag, scale
6-channel bar graph display
(Dot model)
Flag display
•
–
Alarm is not set.
Alarm is not occurring.
Channel ID alarm status
display
Channel No. Alarm is occurring.
Date/time and chart speed
display
Displays the date/time on the left and chart
speed on the right.
Sep.21.2004 1200
11:26:37 mm/h
12-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12.4 Display Function Specifications
Name
Display Example
Description
DI/DO status display
DI (remote control inputs) status.
DO (alarm output relays) status.
Displays the appropriate mark.
Status display
Chart end
Alarm
Lights off
No display.
Measurement channel
abcdefg
H-1999.9ABCDEF
1-channel digital display
(Tag display)
Tag (7 digits), alarm (1 digit),
measured value (7 digits), unit (6 digits)
Alarm
Tag
Measured
value
Unit
Computation channel
abcdefg
H9999999.9ABCDEF
Tag (7 digits), alarm (1 digit),
computed value (9 digits), unit (6 digits)
Measurement channel
Tag (7 digits), alarm (1 digit),
2-channel digital display
(Tag display)
abcdefgH-1999.9ABC
abcdefgH9999999.9
measured value (6 digits), unit (3 digits)
Computation channel
The top section is measurement channel;
bottom section is computation channel
Tag (7 digits), alarm (1 digit),
computed value (9 digits)
hannel
Measurement c
abcdefgH-1999.9ABC
The digital display is the same as
1-channel digital display
+ 1-channel bar graph display
(Tag display)
the 2-channel digital display (tag display).
Bar graph, scale, alarm (bar graph)
Value and bar graph of the same channel.
Computation channel
abcdefgH9999999.9
1-channel digital display
+ 4-channel bar graph display
(Tag display) (Pen model)
hannel
Measurement c
abcdefgH-1999.9ABC
The digital display is the same as
the 2-channel digital display (tag display).
Bar graph
Computation channel
abcdefgH9999999.9
12
12-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12.4 Display Function Specifications
Multiple display (Different screens assigned to the top and bottom sections)
Name
Display Example
hannel
Description
1-channel digital display
Computation c
Channel No. (1 digit), alarm (1 digit),
1H-1999.9ABCDEF
measured value (7 digits), unit (6 digits)
Measurement channel
AH9999999.9ABCDEF
Channel No. (1 digit), alarm (1 digit),
computed value (9 digits), unit (6 digits)
2-channel digital display
hannel
Computation c
1H-1000.0 2H3000.0
Channel No. (1 digit), alarm (1 digit),
measured value (6 digits)
Measurement channel
AH-1999.9 BH9999.9
Channel No. (1 digit), alarm (1 digit),
measured value (6 digits)
Date/Time
Date/Time
Sep21.04 11:26:37
25mm/h
Chart speed
Chart speed
•
–
Alarm is not set.
Alarm is not occurring.
Channel ID alarm status
display
Channel No. Alarm is occurring.
Alarm summary display
of computation channels
Status display
Lights off
Displays the appropriate mark.
No display.
1-channel digital display
(Tag display)
The digital display is the same as
the 2-channel digital display (tag display).
abcdefgH-1999.9ABC
abcdefgH9999999.9
The top section is measurement channel;
bottom section is computation channel
12-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12.5 Specifications of Optional Functions
Alarm Output Relay (/A1, /A2, and /A3)
Item
Specifications
Operation
Number of outputs
Relay contact rating
Outputs relay contact signals from the dedicated terminals on the rear panel when alarms occur.
2 outputs (/A1), 4 outputs (/A2), 6 outputs (/A3)
250 VDC/0.1 A (for resistance load)
250 VAC (50/60 Hz)/3 A
Output format
NO-C-NC
Auxiliary functions
Energized/De-energized operation selectable (common to all relays)
Hold/Non-hold operation selectable (common to all relays)
AND/OR operation selectable
Reflash operation (Fixed to relay I01, I02, and I03. Relay release time is approx. 500 ms.)
Relay I01 can be used for diagnosis output.
Diagnosis output
Diagnosis output: Outputs a relay signal when an error in the recording section (plotter on the
pen model), a burnout, or an error in the A/D converter is detected. Relay operation is fixed to
de-energized and non-hold.
RS-422A/485 Communication Interface (/C3)
Item
Specifications
Connection
Complies with EIA RS-422A/485
Connection type
Transmission mode
Synchronization
Baud rate
Multi-drop connection 1:32 (four-wire system), 1:31 (two-wire system, version 1.11 and later)
Half-duplex
Start-stop synchronization
1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, or 38400 bps
Start bit
Fixed to 1 bit
Data length
7 bits or 8 bits
Stop bit
Fixed to 1 bit
Parity
Odd, even, or none (no parity)
2047 bytes
Open and close
Dedicated protocol, Modbus slave protocol (version 1.11 and later)
ASCII for input/output for control and setting
ASCII or binary for input/output of measured data
1.2 km
Received buffer length
Escape sequence
Protocol
Communication mode
Communication distance
Ethernet Communication Interface (/C7)
Item
Specifications
Function
Setting/Measurement server Uses a dedicated protocol
Measured/computed data, setup data, status byte
Connection information, network statistics, etc.
Maintenance/Test server
Instrument information server Model, serial number, etc.
Electrical and mechanical specifications
Conforms to IEEE 802.3.
Interface
Basic specifications
Connection
12
Ethernet (10BASE-T)
Protocol
TCP, IP, UDP, ICMP, and ARP
The maximum number of simultaneous connections and the number of simultaneous use
Function
Maximum Number of Number of
Administrators
Connections Users
Simultaneous Users Port Number
Setting/Measurement server
Maintenance/Test server
3
1
-
1
1
-
2
1
-
34260/tcp
34261/tcp
34264/udp
Instrument information server
Miscellaneous
User authentication
Keepalive
Administrator: 1, users: 6 (limitations placed on users)
Drops the connection if there is no response to an inspection packet. Use or not use is
selectable.
12-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12.5 Specifications of Optional Functions
FAIL/Chart End Detection and Output (/F1)
Item
Specifications
FAIL output
Relay output on CPU error
Relay operation
Energized during normal operation and de-energized on CPU error. Non-hold operation.
Chart end detection output Stops recording and outputs a relay signal when the remaining amount of chart paper is approx.
2 cm. Also, turns ON the words CHART END on the display.
Relay operation
Contact rating
The relay is energized when the above conditions are met. Non-hold operation.
250 VAC (50/60 Hz)/3 A, 250 VDC/0.1 A (for resistor load)
Clamped Input Terminal (/H2)
Item
Specifications
Measuring input terminal Uses clamped input terminals.
Non-Glare Door Glass (/H3)
Item
Specifications
Door glass
Uses a door glass with minimal reflection.
Computation Function (/M1)
Item
Number of computation channels
Pen model: 8 channels, dot model: 12 channels
Specifications
Operation
General arithmetic operations: Four arithmetic operations, square root, absolute, common
logarithm, exponential, power, relational operations (<, ≤ , >, ≥ , =,
≠), logical operations (AND, OR, NOT, XOR)
Statistical operations (TLOG): Average, max., min., sum, and max. – min. for each interval
Up to 30 constants can be defined
Constants
Range: –9.9999E+29 to –1.0000E–30, 0, 1.0000E–30 to 9.9999E+29
Symbol: K01 to K30
Communication input data Digital data via communication can be used in computations other than statistical computation (TLOG)
Number of communication input data points: 8 channels (pen model), 12 channels (dot model)
Range: –9.9999E+29 to –1.0000E–30, 0, 1.0000E–30 to 9.9999E+29
Symbol: C01 to C12
Remote input
Use remote input status (0/1) in equations
Number of inputs: 5
Symbol: D01 to D05
Computation accuracy
Computation range
Equation
32-bit floating-point computation (excluding TLOG computation)
Computed values throughout the computation remains within approx. ±3.4×1038.
Defined using up to 120 characters.
Execution interval
TLOG timer
Number of timers
Timer 1 and 2 modes
Reset
Scan interval
Performs statistical calculation for each interval specified by the timer.
3 (periodic printout timer, timer 1, and timer 2).
Absolute or relative
TLOG data can be reset at each interval.
Printout at each interval is possible.
Printout
Trend recording
Recording span
Unit
–9999999 to 99999999, decimal position arbitrary.
Up to 6 characters
Recording methods
Pen
Dot printing
Zone recording and partial expanded recording available.
Measurement channels and computation channels can be assigned arbitrarily to pens.
Trend recording of measurement and computation channels. The fastest dot printing interval is as follows:
Number of channels being trend recorded Fastest dot printing interval
6 or less
7 to 12
13 to 18
10 s
15 s
20 s
12-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12.5 Specifications of Optional Functions
Alarms
Number of alarms
Up to four alarms (level) for each measurement channels.
Alarm types
High limit (H), low limit (L), delay high limit (T), delay low limit (t). The alarm symbol is shown in parentheses.
Alarm delay time of delay high and low limit alarms (can be set for each channel, common within a
channel) See section 12.2
Hysteresis
Applied to high limit alarm and low limit alarm.
Hysteresis range: Approx. 0.0% to 1.0% of the recording span (0.1% steps)
See section 12.2.
Miscellaneous
Display
See section 12.4.
Cu10, Cu25 RTD Input (/N1)
Item
Specifications
Cu10, Cu25 RTD
This option allows Cu10 and Cu25 inputs to be added to the standard input types.
Input type and measurable range
Input Type
Measurable Range
Cu10 (GE)
Cu10 (L&N)
RTD
Cu10 (WEED)
–200 to 300°C
(Measurement
current i: 2 mA)
Cu10 (BAILEY)
–328.0 to 572.0°F
Cu10: α = 0.00392 at 20°C
Cu10: α = 0.00393 at 20°C
Cu25*: α = 0.00425 at 0°C
* Measurement current i = 1 mA
Measurement and recording accuracy
Input Type
Cu10 (GE)
Measurement Accuracy
±(0.4% of rdg + 1.0°C)
±(0.3% of rdg + 0.8°C)
Recording Accuracy
Cu10 (L&N)
Cu10 (WEED)
Measurement accuracy
Cu10 (BAILEY)
± (0.3% of recording span)
Cu10: α = 0.00392 at 20°C
Cu10: α = 0.00393 at 20°C
Cu25: α = 0.00425 at 0°C
3 Legs Isolated RTD (/N2)
Item
Specifications
Input terminal isolation
Applies to the dot model.
The RTD input terminals are isolated between channels (on the standard dot model, input terminal b
are common to all channels)
Expansion Inputs (/N3)
Item
Specifications
Input type
Adds the input types shown in the table below.
Input Type
PR40-20
Measurement Range
0.0 to 1900.0°C
32 to 3452°F
32 to 2552°F
32 to 2390°F
32 to 4352°F
32 to 2372°F
12
PLATINEL
0.0 to 1400.0°C
0.0 to 1310.0°C
0.0 to 2400.0°C
0.0 to 1300.0°C
0.0 to 300.0 K
Thermocouple
NiNiMo
W/WRe26
Type N (AWG14)
Kp vs Au7Fe
Pt25
–200.0 to 550.0°C
–200.0 to 600.0°C
–200.0 to 250.0°C
–60.0 to 180.0°C
–70.0 to 200.0°C
0.0 to 300.0 K
–328.0 to 1022.0°F
–328.0 to 1112.0°F
–328.0 to 482.0°F
–76.0 to 356.0°F
–94.0 to 392.0°F
Pt50
Ni100 (SAMA)
Ni100 (DIN)
Ni120
RTD
(Measuring current
i = 1 mA)
J263*B
Cu53
–50.0 to 150.0°C
–58.0 to 302.0°F
Cu100: α = 0.00425 at 0°C –50.0 to 150.0°C
–58.0 to 302.0°F
12-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12.5 Specifications of Optional Functions
Item
Specifications
Measurement and recording accuracy
Input Type
0 to 450°C
Measurement Accuracy Recording Accuracy
Not warranted
PR40-20
450 to 750°C
(0.9% of rdg + 3.2°C)
750 to 1100°C
(0.9% of rdg + 1.3°C)
1100 to 1900°C (0.9% of rdg + 0.4°C)
(0.25% of rdg + 2.3°C)
PLATINEL
NiNiMo
(0.25% of rdg + 0.7°C)
W/WRe26
0 to 400°C
15.0°C or less
400 to 2400°C
(0.2% of rdg + 2.0°C)
(0.2% of rdg + 1.3°C)
4.5 K
Type N(AWG14)
Kp vs Au7Fe
Measurement
accuracy
0 to 20 K
20 to 300 K
2.5 K
(0.3% of
Pt25
Pt50
(0.15% of rdg + 0.6°C)
(0.3% of rdg + 0.6°C)
recording span)
Ni100(SAMA)
Ni100(DIN)
Ni120
(0.15% of rdg + 0.4°C)
J263*B
0 to 40 K
3.0 K
40 to 300 K
1.0 K
Cu53
Cu100
(0.15% of rdg + 0.8°C)
(0.2% of rdg + 1.0°C)
Note) No RJC for PR40-20 (fixed to 0°C)
Remote Control 5 Points (/R1)
Item
Specifications
Number of input terminals
Input type
5
Isolated from the main circuitry through a photocoupler, built-in isolated power supply for the input
terminals, and shared common
Input type and signal level
Voltage-free contact
Open collector
Contact closed at 200 Ω or less and contact open at 100 kΩ or greater
ON voltage: 0.5 V or less (sink current 30 mA or more), leakage current when OFF: 0.25 A or less
Edge, level, or trigger (250 ms or more)
Signal type
Operation
Perform the following control operations by applying a given signal to the remote signal input
terminal.
• Start/stop recording (edge)
• Alarm ACK (trigger)
• Set the clock (adjust the clock to the nearest hour with the contact input, trigger)
Time When Signal Is Input Procedure
00 min 00 s to 01 min 59 s
58 min 00 s to 59 min 59 s
Truncates the minutes and seconds. Example: 10:00:50 → 10:00:00
Rounds up the minutes and seconds. Example: 10:59:50 → 11:00:00
02 min 00 s to 57 min to 59 s No operation
• Manual printout (trigger)
• Message 1 to 5 printout (trigger)
• Switch the chart speed (level)
• Start/stop computation (/M1 option) (edge)
• Reset computation (/M1 option) (trigger)
12-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12.6 General Specifications
Construction
Item
Specifications
Mounting
Flush panel mounting (on a vertical plane)
Mounting angle
Inclined backward up to 30 degrees from a horizontal plane.
Allowable panel thickness 2 to 26 mm
Material
Color
Case: drawn steel
Front door: Aluminum die-cast
Case: Charcoal gray light (Munsell 10B3.6/0.3 or equivalent)
Front door: Charcoal gray light (Munsell 10B3.6/0.3 or equivalent)
Water and dust-proof (complies with DIN40050-IP54)
144(W) × 144(H) × 220(D) mm (D: depth from the panel mounting plane)
1-pen: approx. 2.1 kg, 2-pen: approx. 2.2 kg, 3-pen: approx. 2.3 kg, 4-pen: approx. 2.4 kg
6-dot: approx. 2.5 kg
Front panel
Dimensions
Weight
Normal Operating Conditions
Item
Specifications
Ambient temperature
Ambient humidity
0 to 50°C
20 to 80%RH (at 5 to 40°C)
Allowable power supply voltage range
90 to 132, 180 to 264 VAC
Power supply frequency
Vibration
50 Hz±2%, 60 Hz±2%
10 to 60 Hz 0.2 m/s2 or less
Shock
Not acceptable.
Magnetic field
Noise
400 A/m or less (DC and 50/60 Hz)
Normal mode (50/60 Hz)
Volt: The peak value including the signal must be less than 1.2 times the rated value of the range
(Example: 2 V for 2 V range).
TC: The peak value including the signal must be less than 1.2 times the rated value of the range.
RTD: 50 mV or less
Common mode noise (50/60 Hz): 250 VACrms or less for all ranges
Maximum noise voltage between channels (50/60 Hz): 250 VACrms or less. 6-dot model with the 3
legs isolated RTD (/N2 option) installed: 200 VACrms or less.
Up to 30° of backward tilt angle allowed, no tilt to the left or right
At least 30 minutes after power on
Mounting position
Warm-up time
Altitude
2000 m or less above sea level
Power Supply
Item
Specifications
Rated supply voltage
100 to 240 VAC
Allowable power supply voltage range
90 to 132, 180 to 264 VAC
Rated power supply frequency
50 Hz, 60 Hz
Pen model: 40 VA, dot model: 40 VA
Rated power
12
Power consumption
Model
100 VAC
240 VAC
Maximum
1- to 4-pen model
6-dot model
Approx. 12 VA*
Approx. 13 VA*
Approx. 17 VA*
Approx. 18 VA*
Approx. 40 VA
Approx. 40 VA
*
When balanced
12-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12.6 General Specifications
Isolation
Item
Specifications
Insulation resistance
Dielectric strength
Each terminal to ground terminal: 20 MΩ or more (at 500 VDC)
Power supply to ground terminal: 1500 VAC (50/60 Hz), 1 minute
Contact output terminal to ground terminal: 1500 VAC (50/60 Hz), 1 minute
Measuring input terminal to ground terminal: 1000 VAC (50/60 Hz), 1 minute
Between measuring input terminals: 1000 VAC (50/60 Hz), 1 minute (except for RTD input terminal)
Remote input terminal to ground terminal: 500 VDC, 1 minute
Grounding
Grounding resistance: 100 Ω or less
Transport and Storage Conditions
Item
Specifications
Ambient temperature
Ambient humidity
Vibration
–25 to 60°C
5 to 95%RH (no condensation)
10 to 60 Hz, 4.9 m/s2 maximum
392 m/s2 maximum (in packaged condition)
Shock
Supported Standards
Item
Specifications
CSA
Certified by CSA22.2 No. 61010-1, Installation category II1, Measurement category II2, Pollution
degree 23
UL
CE
Certified by UL61010B-1 (CSA NRTL/C)
EMC
EN61326(Emission: Class A, Immunity: Annex A)
EN61000-3-2
EN61000-3-3
EN55011 Class A Group 1
Low voltage directive
C-Tick
EN61010-1, Installation category II, Measurement category II, Pollution degree 2
AS/NZS CISPR 11 Class A Group 1
1
Installation category (overvoltage category) describes a number which defines a transient overvoltage condition. It implies
the regulation for impulse withstand voltage. “II” applies to electrical equipment which is supplied from the fixed installation
like a distribution board.
2
3
Applies to measuring circuits connected to low voltage installation, and electrical instruments supplied with power from fixed
equipment such as electric switchboards.
“Pollution degree” describes the degree to which a solid, liquid, or gas which deteriorates dielectric strength or surface
resistivity is adhering. “2” applies to normal indoor atmosphere. Normally, only non-conductive pollution occurs.
12-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12.6 General Specifications
Standard Performance
Item
Specifications
Measurement and recording accuracy
The following specifications apply to operation of the recorder under standard operation conditions:
Temperature:
23 ± 2°C
Humidity:
55% ± 10%RH
Power supply voltage:
90 to 132 or 180 to 264 VAC
Power supply frequency: 50/60 Hz ± 1%
Warm-up time: At least 30 minutes.
Other ambient conditions such as vibration should not adversely affect the operation
Measurement (Digital Display) Recording (Trend)
Highest Res. Recording Accuracy
Resolution
Input Type Range Type
Measurement Accuracy
20 mV
10 µV
Measurement
Pen model:
DC voltage
accuracy
± (0.3% of
recording span)
Dead band 0.2%
of recording span
Dot model:
60 mV
200 mV
2 V
10 µV
100 µV
1 mV
±(0.1% of rdg + 2 digits)
Resolution 0.1 mm
6 V
1 mV
20 V
50 V
1-5 V
R
10 mV
10 mV
1 mV
±(0.1% of rdg + 2 digits)
±(0.1% of rdg + 2 digits)
±(0.15% of rdg + 1)
DC voltage
TC
0.1°C
S
except R,S: 0 to 100°C, ±3.7°C
100 to 300°C, ±1.5°C
B
(excludes
RJC
accuracy)
B: 400 to 600°C, ±2°C
Accuracy not warranted for
values less than 400°C
K
±(0.15% of rdg + 0.7°C)
except ±(0.15% of rdg + 1°C)
for –200 to –100°C
±(0.15% of rdg + 0.5°C)
E
J
±(0.15% of rdg + 0.5°C)
except ±(0.15% of rdg + 0.7°C)
for J: –200 to –100°C
T
N
W
L
±(0.15% of rdg + 0.7°C)
±(0.15% of rdg + 1°C)
±(0.15% of rdg + 0.5°C)
except ±(0.15% of rdg + 0.7°C)
for L: –200 to –100°C
U
WRe
±(0.2% of rdg + 1°C)
RTD
Pt100
±(0.15% of rdg + 0.3°C)
JPt100
–
ON/OFF input Level
Contact
Threshold level (2.4 V)
accuracy ± 0.1 V
–
≤ 1 KΩ: ON, ≥ 100 kΩ: OFF
(Parallel capacitance
0.01 µF or less)
12
Measuring accuracy in case of linear scaling
Accuracy during scaling (digits) = measuring accuracy (digits) × multiplier + 2 digits (rounded up)
where the multiplier = scaling span (digits)/measuring span (digits).
Example: Assuming that
• range type:
1-5 V
• measuring span:
• scaling span:
1.000 to 5.000 V
0.000 to 2.000 Then,
Measuring accuracy = ±(0.1% × 5 V + 2 digits)
= ±(0.005 V [5 digits] + 2 digits)
= ±7 digits
Multiplier = {2000 digits (0.000 to 2.000)}/4000 digits (1.000 to5.000) = 0.5
Accuracy during scaling = ±(7 × 0.5 + 2) digits = 6 digits (rounded up)
Reference junction compensation
Internal/External selectable for each channel
12-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12.6 General Specifications
Item
Specifications
Reference junction compensation accuracy
Above 0°C with input terminal temperature balanced (60 minutes after power on)
Type R, S, B, W, WRe: ±1.0°C
Type K, J, E, T, N, L, U: ±0.5°C
Maximum input voltage
Input resistance
±10 VDC (continuous) for ranges of 200 mV or less, TC, RTD, and DI ranges
±60 VDC (continuous) for 2 VDC or higher ranges
Approximately 10 MΩ or more for ranges of 200 mV or less and TC
Approximately 1 MΩ for 2 VDC or higher ranges
Input source resistance
Bias current
Volt, TC:
RTD input:
2 kΩ or less
10 Ω or less per wire (The resistance of all three wires must be equal).
10 nA or less (except when burnout detection function is enabled)
Common mode rejection ratio 120 dB (50/60 Hz ± 0.1%, 500 Ω unbalanced, between the minus terminal and ground)
Normal mode rejection ratio 40 dB or more (50/60 Hz ± 0.1%)
Noise rejection
By the integrating A/D converter: The integration time is 16.7 ms, 20 ms, or 100 ms (dot model)
Low-pass filtering (pen model): Filter time constant is 2 s, 5 s, or 10 s
Moving average (dot model):
The number of samples is 2 to 16.
Effects of Operating Conditions
Item
Specifications
Ambient temperature
With temperature variation of 10°C:
Measurement: ±(0.1% of rdg + 1 digit) or less
Recording:
Measurement fluctuation + ±0.2% of the recording span or less
* Excluding the error of reference junction compensation
With variation within 90 to 132 V and 180 to 264 VAC (50/60 Hz):
Measurement: ±1 digit or less
Power supply fluctuation
Recording:
±0.1% of the recording span or less
With variation of ±2 Hz from rated power frequency (power supply voltage 90 to 132, 180 to 264 VAC):
Measurement: ±(0.1% of rdg + 1 digit) or less
Recording:
Same as the measurement fluctuation
Magnetic field
AC (50/60 Hz) and DC 400 A/m fields:
Measurement: ±(0.1% of rdg 10 digit) or less
Recording:
±0.5% of the recording span or less
Input source resistance
DC voltage range
With variation of +1 kΩ:
Ranges of 200 mV or less: Within ±10 µV
Ranges of 2V or more:
±0.1% of rdg
TC range
With variation of +1 kΩ: ±10 µV or less
RTD range
With variation of 10 Ω per wire (resistance of all three wires must be equal):
Measurement: ±(0.1% of rdg + 1 digit) or less
Recording:
Measurement fluctuation + ±0.1% of the recording span or less
With maximum difference of 40 mΩ between wires: Approx. 0.1°C (for Pt100)
With a backward tilt of 30° or less
Mounting position
Vibration
Measurement: ±(0.1% of rdg + 1 digit) or less
Recording:
Indication fluctuation + ±0.1% of the recording span or less
When a sinusoidal vibration along all three axis at a frequency between 10 to 60 Hz and an
acceleration of 0.2 m/s2 is applied for 2 hours
Measurement: ±(0.1% of rdg + 1 digit) or less
Recording:
Indication fluctuation + ±0.1% of the recording span or less
Other Specifications
Item
Specifications
Clock
With a calendar function
Accuracy of clock
DST
±100 ppm, excluding a delay (of 1 second, maximum) caused each time the power is turned on.
The date/time for switching between standard time and DST can be specified.
Memory backup
A built-in lithium battery backs up the setup parameters and runs the clock
(battery life: approximately ten years at room temperature).
Key lock function
Key lock items
Password for releasing the key lock can be set.
RCD key, MENU key, DISP MENU key, FEED key, and function under the FUNC key (Alarm ACK, computation start/
stop, print, message, printout buffer clear, periodic printout reset, and pen or ribbon cassette exchange)
Internal light
Noise
Lights up the recording area of the chart paper. Uses a dedicated LED.
Machine Noise Information Ordinance 3.GSGV, Jan 18, 1991
Maximum noise level: 60 dB (A) or less (complies with ISO7779)
12-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12.7 Dimensional Drawings
Unit: mm (approx. inch)
Unless otherwise specified, tolerance is 3%
(however, tolerance is 0.3 mm when below 10 mm).
220 (8.66)
178 (7.01)
(1.08) 27.5
151.5 (5.96)
144 (5.67)
Mounting panel
2 to 26
(Dimensions before attaching
the mounting bracket)
9.4
(0.37)
thickness
144
(5.67)
136.5 +2
(5.37)
0
151.5
(5.96)
7.5 (Dimensions after attaching
the mounting bracket)
(0.30)
Note
When mounting the recorder to a panel, use two brackets, top and bottom or left and right.
12
12-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
Appendix 1 Periodic Printout and Printout Using the
TLOG Timer (/M1 Option)
Periodic Printout
This section explains the contents of the periodic printout. The periodic printout contents
vary between the pen model and dot model. The contents also vary depending on
whether the periodic printout is in instantaneous mode, report mode, or Off.
Instantaneous mode or report mode is specified using Print1 > Mode in Basic Setting
mode.
The figure below illustrates the printout contents. The font used in the figure differs from that
of the actual printout. The printout positions may also differ from those of the actual printout.
Pen Model
Instantaneous Mode
Channel No.
or tag
Time tick cancel mark
Measured
value
Offset compensation mark
Unit
Date
Mar.31.2004!
15:50*
Time
TAG-001
2
3
4
TAG-00A
C
1.000V
-1.000V
H-2.1050UNIT03
d 2.000V
1UNIT0A
1.00
Channel data
L
Computation channel
Scale
D
E
J
-10.00UNIT0D
1.0000%
-1.00UNIT0J
0.000
TAG-001
RED
2.000
V
Recording color
Chart speed
50mm/h_
Time tick
Alarm
Prints the letter “d” for channels set to
delta computation.
• Date/Time
The date/time when the periodic printout was executed.
• Time tick
Indicates the pen 1 position at the time the periodic printout was executed.
• Time tick cancel mark
Prints an exclamation point (!) when the time tick is not printed correctly.
• Offset compensation mark
Prints an asterisk (*) when offset compensation is enabled.
• Channel data
Prints the channel numbers (1 to 4 or A to J) or tags, measured/computed values, and unit.
Prints the letter “d” on channels set to delta computation.
• Alarm
Prints the alarm that is occurring. If multiple alarms are occurring, the alarm with the
highest precedence is printed.
Alarm printout precedence: (Higher) H, L, T, t, h, l, R, r (Lower)
App
App-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix 1 Periodic Printout and Printout Using the TLOG Timer (/M1 Option)
• Scale
Prints the leftmost and rightmost values of the recording span and the channel
number or tag for channels that have scale printout specified. The scale is printed for
one channel at each periodic printout. The channel whose scale is printed changes in
ascending order. The scale of channels that are being zone recorded is printed within
the recording range of the zone.
• Recording color
Prints the recording colors of channels that have scale printout and recording color
printout specified.
• Chart speed
Prints the chart speed.
Report Mode
Channel No. or tag
Time tick cancel mark
Offset compensation mark/event
Sum value
Min./Max./Ave.
Range change
occurrence mark
Measured value
Unit
Report start date/time
Mar.31.2004 15:00!
-Apr.01.2004 15:00*TPR
TAG-001*1.000V
Report end date/time
Channel data
2
3
4
-1.000V
-2.105500E+03UNIT03
2.000V
TAG-00A 1UNIT0A
C
D
*1.00
-10.00UNIT0D
150.00UNIT0D
100.00UNIT0D
1.0000%
Computation channel
E
J
-1.00UNIT0J
0.000
TAG-001
RED
2.000
V
Scale
Recording color
Chart speed
50mm/h_
Time tick
• Report start date/time and report end date/time
The start date/time and end date time of the report (statistical calculation) (periodic
printout interval).
• Time tick and time tick cancel mark
These are the same as with the instantaneous mode.
• Offset compensation mark
This is the same as with the instantaneous mode.
• Event
Prints the events that occurred in the interval.
T: Time change
P: Power failure or power OFF/ON
R: Data reset
• Channel data
Prints the channel numbers (1 to 6 or A to J) or tags, report data, and unit.
An asterisk (*) is printed for channels whose range type was changed in the interval.
• Scale, recording color, and chart speed
These are the same as with the instantaneous mode.
App-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix 1 Periodic Printout and Printout Using the TLOG Timer (/M1 Option)
Instantaneous Mode
Dot Model
Prints the letter “d” for channels set to
delta computation.
Channel No.
or tag
Measured
value
Unit
Date
Time
Channel data
Mar.31.2004
15:50
TAG-001
2
1.000V
-1.000V
H-2.1050UNIT03
d 2.000V
1UNIT0A
-1.00UNIT0J
3
4
TAG-00A
J
Computation channel
L
0.000
TAG-001
50mm/h_
2.000
V
Scale
Chart speed
Time tick
Alarm
• Date/Time
The date/time when the periodic printout was executed.
• Time tick
Indicates the position at the time the periodic printout was executed. If the time tick
cannot be printed correctly, it is not printed.
• Channel data, alarm, scale printout, and chart speed
These are the same as with the instantaneous mode of the pen model.
Report Mode
Event
Channel No. or tag
Range change occurrence mark
Sum value
Min./Max./Ave.
Measured value
Unit
Report start date/time
Report end date/time
Channel data
Mar.31.2004 15:00
-Apr.01.2004 15:00*TPR
TAG-001*1.000V
2
3
4
-1.000V
-2.105500E+03UNIT03
2.000V
TAG-00A 1UNIT0A
C
D
*1.00
-10.00UNIT0D
150.00UNIT0D
100.00UNIT0D
1.0000%
Computation channel
,
E
J
-1.00UNIT0J
0.000
TAG-001
50mm/h_
2.000
V
Scale
Chart speed
Time tick
• Report start date/time and report end date/time
The start date/time and end date time of the report (statistical calculation) (periodic
printout interval).
• Time tick
This is the same as with the instantaneous mode.
• Event
App
This is the same as with the report mode of the pen model.
• Channel data
This is the same as with the report mode of the pen model. However, the channel
numbers are 1 to 6 or A to P.
• Scale and chart speed
These are the same as with the instantaneous mode of the pen model.
App-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix 1 Periodic Printout and Printout Using the TLOG Timer (/M1 Option)
Printout Using the TLOG Timer (/M1 Option)
Prints the computed values of computation channels for each interval determined by the
TLOG timer.
Pen Model
Offset compensation mark/event
Alarm
Channel No. or tag
Measured
value
Unit
Date
Mar.31.2004
15:50*TPR
TAG-00A
B
Time
Channel data
1UNIT0A
1.0
1.00
-1.0
-1.00UNIT0J
C
G
J
L
-100
TAG-00A
RED
100
UNIT0A
Scale
Recording color
Timer
TLOG1
• Date/Time
The date/time when the printout using the TLOG timer was executed.
• Offset compensation mark, scale, and recording color
These are the same as with the periodic printout of the pen model.
• Event
This is the same as with the report mode of the periodic printout of the pen model.
• Channel data
Prints the computation channel numbers (A to J) or tags, computed values, and unit.
• Alarm
This is the same as with the instantaneous mode of the periodic printout of the pen model.
• Timer
Prints the timer number being used.
Dot Model
Event
Channel No. or tag
Measured value
Unit
Alarm
Date
Time
Channel data
Mar.31.2004
15:50*TPR
TAG-00A
1UNIT0A
1.00
C
L
D
E
G
100.00UNIT0D
1.0000%
-1.0
J
-1.00UNIT0J
-100
TAG-00A
TLOG2
100
UNIT0A
Scale
Timer
• Date/Time
The date/time when the printout using the TLOG timer was executed.
• Event
This is the same as with the report mode of the periodic printout of the pen model.
• Channel data
Prints the computation channel numbers (A to P) or tags, computed values, and unit.
• Alarm
This is the same as with the instantaneous mode of the periodic printout of the pen model.
• Scale
These are the same as with the periodic printout of the pen model.
• Timer
Prints the timer number being used.
App-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix 1 Periodic Printout and Printout Using the TLOG Timer (/M1 Option)
Special Cases
This section explains the operation of the periodic printout report (statistical calculation)
and the TLOG computation for special cases. In the explanation below, statistical
calculation represents computation in periodic printout report mode or TLOG
computation.
Operation during Power Failures
If a power failure occurs in the middle of statistical calculation, the operation is as follows
when the power recovers.
The statistical calculation resumes when the power recovers. The exact operation will
vary depending on whether the power is restored before or after the printout time.
Time of Recovery
Statistical Calculation Operation
After the printout time
Statistical calculation data is created immediately after power is
restored. The measured/computed data up to the time of the power
failure is used. At the next printout time, data after the power recovery
is used to create the statistical calculation data.
Before the printout time The data is created at the printout time after the power recovers. The
measured/computed data excluding the power failure period is used.
Procedure of Handling “Over” Values during Periodic Printout
When an “over” value* is input for sum or average computation, that value is not used in
the computation.
*
An “over” value on a measurement channel refers to +Over or –Over. See section 12.4. An
“over” value on a computation channel refers to a value that is less than or equal to
–100000000 or greater than or equal to 100000000 excluding the decimal.
App
App-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
chart speed ............................................................. 1-14, 5-13
cleaning ............................................................................. 11-2
clearing alarm information................................................. 3-15
comment line ....................................................................... 4-3
common logarithm ............................................................ 1-24
communication input data ................................................... 9-4
compensation voltage ......................................................... 7-7
computation errors ............................................................ 9-29
computation-dedicated channels ...................................... 1-24
computing equation............................................................. 9-2
computing equations ........................................................... 9-4
constants ................................................................... 9-4, 9-10
construction ..................................................................... 12-17
conventions used in this manual ........................................... ix
copying & pasting a character string ........................... 4-4, 9-3
current input ........................................................................ 1-2
cursor .......................................................................... 4-3, 4-4
Symbols
Page
1-5V .................................................................................... 1-2
1-5V input ............................................................................ 5-6
1-5V low-cut function ........................................................ 7-24
A
Page
absolute time mode ........................................................... 9-21
absolute value ................................................................... 1-24
accuracy of clock ............................................................ 12-20
activating the key lock ....................................................... 3-19
adjusting the dot printing position ..................................... 11-7
adjusting the hysteresis .................................................... 11-7
adjusting the pen position ................................................. 11-6
alarm ........................................................................... 1-7, 5-9
alarm ACK ............................................................... 1-12, 3-18
alarm acknowledge operation ................................. 1-12, 3-18
alarm delay function .......................................................... 7-24
alarm hysteresis ................................................ 1-8, 1-26, 7-3
alarm indication ................................................................... 1-9
alarm information .............................................................. 7-11
alarm output relays ............................................................. 1-9
alarm output terminals ...................................................... 2-10
alarm printout .................................................................... 1-18
alarm type ..................................................... 5-10, 9-12, 12-3
alarm value ............................................................. 5-10, 9-12
alarms on the delta computation channel ......................... 5-10
AND operation (alarm output relay) .................................. 1-11
AND/OR .............................................................................. 7-3
assigned function (remote control) .................................... 7-29
assigning channels to recording pens ............................... 9-24
D
Page
data display setup screen ................................................... 8-1
data types (computation) .......................................... 1-24, 9-4
date format ........................................................................ 7-30
date/time ................................................................. 2-14, 5-14
DC voltage .......................................................................... 5-2
de-energized ............................................................. 1-11, 7-3
default values (basic setting mode) .................................. 4-10
default values (setting mode) .............................................. 4-9
delay high limit alarm .......................................................... 1-8
delay low limit alarm ............................................................ 1-8
deleting a character .................................................... 4-4, 9-3
deleting an entire character string............................... 4-4, 9-3
delta computation ........................................................ 1-3, 5-4
diagnosis output .......................................................... 1-9, 7-2
difference high limit alarm ................................................... 1-7
difference low limit alarm .................................................... 1-7
dimensional drawings ..................................................... 12-21
display ............................................................................... 1-22
display and key panel ......................................................... 3-2
display examples .............................................................. 1-23
display type ............................................................. 1-22, 12-7
display update rate .............................................................. 8-2
display/recording language ............................................... 7-22
displayed contents ............................................................ 12-7
dot printing interval .................................................... 1-14, 6-1
duration (alarm delay) ............................................. 6-10, 9-19
B
Page
bar graph ........................................................................... 1-22
base point of the bar graph ..................................... 7-15, 9-27
basic setting mode .............................................................. 4-1
bias ........................................................................... 1-4, 6-12
bias function ...................................................................... 7-24
brightness (display) ........................................................... 6-11
brightness (internal light)................................................... 6-11
buffer memory ......................................................... 1-18, 1-19
buffer overflow mark ............................................... 1-18, 1-19
burnout detection ........................................................ 1-4, 7-5
C
Page
E
Page
calibration .......................................................................... 11-4
calibration instrument ........................................................ 11-4
cassette holder.................................................................. 3-10
changing the settings .......................................................... 4-3
channel auto switching ...................................................... 3-12
channel number ................................................................ 7-11
channel printout ................................................................ 1-17
channel range ......................................................... 5-10, 6-12
channel switching interval ................................................... 8-3
character type ............................................................. 4-4, 9-3
chart cassette...................................................................... 3-4
chart end output ................................................................ 1-27
chart holder ......................................................................... 3-5
chart paper ................................................................ 3-5, 12-4
chart paper guide ................................................................ 3-5
edge .................................................................................. 1-29
effects of operating conditions ........................................ 12-20
EMC standards ..................................................................... iii
energized .................................................................. 1-11, 7-3
entering basic setting mode ................................................ 4-2
entering characters ............................................................. 4-4
entering setting mode ......................................................... 4-2
entering values.................................................................... 4-3
error messages ................................................................. 10-1
ESC key .............................................................................. 4-3
exponent ........................................................................... 1-24
external dimensions ............................................................ 2-4
external reference compensation ........................................ 1-4
Index
Index-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
menu (data display setup)................................................... 8-2
menu (setting mode) ........................................................... 4-7
message ............................................................................. 6-8
message printout .............................................................. 1-19
model ..................................................................................... v
mounting brackets ............................................................... 2-3
mounting hole ..................................................................... 3-1
moving average ........................................................ 1-5, 7-19
F
Page
FAIL output ....................................................................... 1-27
fastest recording interval ................................................... 1-26
feeding the chart paper ....................................................... 3-6
felt pen ................................................................................ 3-7
filter ................................................................... 1-5, 6-2, 7-20
format of the date .............................................................. 1-19
four arithmetic operation ........................................... 1-24, 9-5
front cover tab of the chart cassette.................................. 3-11
FUNC key operation ........................................................... 4-5
N
Page
names of parts .................................................................... 3-1
new chart speed printout................................................... 1-19
non-hold .................................................................... 1-9, 1-12
non-hold operation .............................................................. 7-3
normal operating conditions ............................................ 12-17
number of samples of moving average ............................... 6-3
H
Page
half life of the brightness ................................................... 11-9
handling precautions ........................................................... 2-1
heat sink .............................................................................. 3-3
high limit alarm .................................................................... 1-7
high limit on rate-of-change alarm ...................................... 1-7
hold ........................................................................... 1-9, 1-12
hold operation ..................................................................... 7-3
hysteresis ............................................................................ 1-8
O
Page
offset compensation mark .............................................. App-1
ON/OFF input...................................................................... 5-5
opening the display .............................................................. vii
operation menus using the FUNC key ................................ 4-5
operation mode ................................................................... 4-1
operations on the panel keys .............................................. 4-2
optional accessories ............................................................. vi
optional functions ............................................................ 12-13
optional terminal.................................................................. 2-9
order of precedence of computation ................................... 9-4
over value ......................................................................... 9-29
over values during periodic printout ............................... App-5
I
Page
initializing the recorder settings......................................... 7-27
input computation.............................................................. 12-2
input range .......................................................................... 5-1
input type .......................................................................... 12-1
inserting a character ........................................................... 9-3
inserting characters ............................................................. 4-4
installation location.............................................................. 2-2
instantaneous mode....................................................... App-1
integration time of the A/D converter .......................... 1-6, 7-4
internal clock adjustment .................................................. 1-28
internal light LED assembly .............................................. 11-3
interval (periodic printout) ................................................. 1-18
interval (rate-of-change alarm).................................... 1-7, 7-3
isolation ........................................................................... 12-18
P
Page
packing materials ..................................................................vii
panel ................................................................................... 2-3
panel cutout ........................................................................ 2-4
parallel connection .............................................................. 2-6
partial expanded recording ................... 1-15, 6-5, 7-21, 9-16
password (key lock) .......................................................... 3-19
password for releasing the key lock .................................. 7-18
pen caps ............................................................................. 3-7
pen holder ........................................................................... 3-7
pen offset compensation ........................................... 1-15, 7-9
periodic inspection ............................................................ 11-1
periodic printout ................................. 1-18, 6-6, 9-17, App-1
periodic printout interval .................................................... 7-14
plotter pen ........................................................................... 3-8
POC .................................................................................... 7-9
power (computation) ......................................................... 1-24
power and other computations............................................ 9-5
power failure .................................................................. App-5
power supply ......................................................... 2-12, 12-17
power supply terminals ..................................................... 2-13
power switch ..................................................................... 2-14
precautions (input signal wiring) ......................................... 2-5
precautions (optional terminal wiring) ................................. 2-9
precautions (power supply wiring) .................................... 2-12
printing a message............................................................ 3-16
printing the computed value .............................................. 9-22
printing the recorder settings ............................................ 3-14
printout contents ............................................................... 1-16
printout using the TLOG timer........................................ App-4
printouts ............................................................................ 12-5
protective ground terminal ................................................ 2-13
K
Page
key lock ................................................................... 3-19, 7-18
keys..................................................................................... 3-2
keys to be key-locked ....................................................... 7-18
L
Page
language ........................................................................... 7-22
level................................................................................... 1-29
linear scaling ....................................................................... 5-3
List .................................................................................... 3-14
loading the chart paper ....................................................... 3-4
logical computation ................................................... 1-24, 9-6
low limit alarm ..................................................................... 1-7
low limit on rate-of-change alarm ........................................ 1-7
low-cut......................................................................... 5-6, 5-7
M
Page
main display ...................................................................... 1-22
manual printout ....................................................... 1-19, 3-13
measurable range ............................................................... 1-2
measuring input terminal..................................................... 2-6
memory backup .............................................................. 12-20
menu (basic setting mode).................................................. 4-8
Index-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
standard performance ..................................................... 12-19
standard temperature device ............................................ 11-5
start recording ................................................................... 3-11
starting the computation ...................................................... 9-1
status display .................................................................... 1-22
status of the remote control input terminal .......................... 9-5
stop recording ................................................................... 3-11
stoppers ...................................................................... 3-4, 3-6
stopping the computation .................................................... 9-1
suffix code .............................................................................. v
SUM scale ..................................................... 7-14, 9-14, 9-26
supported standards ....................................................... 12-18
switching the display screen ............................................. 3-12
R
Page
range type ........................................................................... 1-2
rear panel ............................................................................ 3-3
recorder ............................................................................... 1-1
recording ........................................................................... 1-13
recording (computation channels)..................................... 1-25
recording color ...................................... 1-14, 7-8, 7-11, 9-23
recording span .................................................................... 1-2
recording start printout ...................................................... 1-19
recording zone .......................................................... 6-4, 9-15
reference junction compensation ........................................ 1-4
reference pen .................................................................... 1-15
reference time ................................................................... 7-14
reflash alarm ............................................................. 1-10, 7-3
registering display types to screens .................................... 8-3
relational computation ............................................... 1-24, 9-6
relative time mode ............................................................. 9-21
relay contact input ............................................................. 2-11
relay contact output ........................................................... 2-11
relay numbers ......................................................... 5-11, 9-12
releasing the alarm output ................................................ 3-18
releasing the key lock ....................................................... 3-19
remaining chart length ...................................................... 11-1
remote control ......................................................... 1-28, 7-28
remote control input terminals ........................................... 2-10
remote signal .................................................................... 1-29
replacement period for expendable parts ......................... 11-9
replacing felt pens ............................................................... 3-7
replacing the internal light LED ......................................... 11-3
replacing the plotter pen ..................................................... 3-8
report data ............................................................... 7-14, 9-26
report mode .................................................................... App-2
resetting the computed values ............................................ 9-1
resetting the report data .................................................... 3-17
resetting the TLOG computed value ................................. 9-22
revisions .................................................................................. i
ribbon cassette.................................................................. 3-10
ribbon feeding knob .......................................................... 3-10
ribbon is loose ................................................................... 3-10
RJC ..................................................................................... 7-7
RTD ..................................................................................... 5-2
run modes ........................................................................... 4-1
T
Page
tag ................................................................... 6-7, 7-11, 9-18
TC ....................................................................................... 5-2
temperature unit ................................................................ 7-31
thermocouple ...................................................................... 5-2
thermocouple input ............................................................. 2-6
time constant ....................................................................... 6-2
time printout format ................................................. 1-18, 7-26
time tick ................................................................ 1-16, App-1
time tick cancel mark ........................................... 1-16, App-1
timer .................................................................................. 9-21
TLOG computation .................................................... 1-24, 9-8
transistor input .................................................................. 2-11
trend recording ...................................... 1-14, 6-6, 9-17, 12-4
trend recording interval ....................................................... 6-1
trigger ................................................................................ 1-29
troubleshooting ................................................................. 10-4
type of measured values ................................................... 7-14
type of report data ............................................................. 9-26
types of computations ....................................................... 1-24
types of inputs ..................................................................... 1-2
U
Page
unit ............................................................................ 5-12, 9-9
unit in computations .......................................................... 1-25
V
Page
VFD ................................................................................... 1-22
Volt ...................................................................................... 5-2
S
Page
safety precautions ................................................................. iii
safety standards.................................................................... iii
safety symbols ...................................................................... iii
scale printout .................................................................. App-2
scaling ................................................................................. 1-3
scan interval ........................................................................ 1-2
secondary chart speed ........................................................ 6-9
Setting complete screen ..................................................... 4-3
setting mode ....................................................................... 4-1
settings necessary to use various functions ..................... 4-13
Setup ................................................................................. 3-14
setup guide ....................................................................... 4-13
setup items (basic setting mode) ...................................... 4-10
setup Items (setting mode) ................................................. 4-9
shunt resistor ...................................................................... 1-2
skip ...................................................................................... 5-8
sprocket teeth ..................................................................... 3-5
square root ........................................................................ 1-24
square root computation ............................................. 1-3, 5-7
square root low-cut function .............................................. 7-24
standard accessories ............................................................ vi
W
Page
wiring (measuring input )..................................................... 2-8
wiring (optional terminal) ..................................................... 2-9
wiring (power supply) ........................................................ 2-12
Z
Page
zone recording .................................................................. 1-14
Index
Index-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WARRANTY/DISCLAIMER
OMEGA ENGINEERING, INC. warrants this unit to be free of defects in materials and workmanship for a
period of 13 months from date of purchase. OMEGA’s WARRANTY adds an additional one (1) month
grace period to the normal one (1) year product warranty to cover handling and shipping time. This
ensures that OMEGA’s customers receive maximum coverage on each product.
If the unit malfunctions, it must be returned to the factory for evaluation. OMEGA’s Customer Service
Department will issue an Authorized Return (AR) number immediately upon phone or written request.
Upon examination by OMEGA, if the unit is found to be defective, it will be repaired or replaced at no
charge. OMEGA’s WARRANTY does not apply to defects resulting from any action of the purchaser, includ-
ing but not limited to mishandling, improper interfacing, operation outside of design limits,
improper repair, or unauthorized modification. This WARRANTY is VOID if the unit shows evidence of
having been tampered with or shows evidence of having been damaged as a result of excessive corrosion;
or current, heat, moisture or vibration; improper specification; misapplication; misuse or other operating
conditions outside of OMEGA’s control. Components in which wear is not warranted, include but are not
limited to contact points, fuses, and triacs.
OMEGA is pleased to offer suggestions on the use of its various products. However,
OMEGA neither assumes responsibility for any omissions or errors nor assumes liability for any
damages that result from the use of its products in accordance with information provided by
OMEGA, either verbal or written. OMEGA warrants only that the parts manufactured by the
company will be as specified and free of defects. OMEGA MAKES NO OTHER WARRANTIES OR
REPRESENTATIONS OF ANY KIND WHATSOEVER, EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, EXCEPT THAT OF
TITLE, AND ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING ANY WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY
AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE HEREBY DISCLAIMED. LIMITATION OF
LIABILITY: The remedies of purchaser set forth herein are exclusive, and the total liability of
OMEGA with respect to this order, whether based on contract, warranty, negligence,
indemnification, strict liability or otherwise, shall not exceed the purchase price of the
component upon which liability is based. In no event shall OMEGA be liable for
consequential, incidental or special damages.
CONDITIONS: Equipment sold by OMEGA is not intended to be used, nor shall it be used: (1) as a “Basic
Component” under 10 CFR 21 (NRC), used in or with any nuclear installation or activity; or (2) in medical
applications or used on humans. Should any Product(s) be used in or with any nuclear installation or
activity, medical application, used on humans, or misused in any way, OMEGA assumes no responsibility
as set forth in our basic WARRANTY/DISCLAIMER language, and, additionally, purchaser will indemnify
OMEGA and hold OMEGA harmless from any liability or damage whatsoever arising out of the use of the
Product(s) in such a manner.
RETURN REQUESTS/INQUIRIES
Direct all warranty and repair requests/inquiries to the OMEGA Customer Service Department. BEFORE
RETURNING ANY PRODUCT(S) TO OMEGA, PURCHASER MUST OBTAIN AN AUTHORIZED RETURN
(AR) NUMBER FROM OMEGA’S CUSTOMER SERVICE DEPARTMENT (IN ORDER TO AVOID
PROCESSING DELAYS). The assigned AR number should then be marked on the outside of the return
package and on any correspondence.
The purchaser is responsible for shipping charges, freight, insurance and proper packaging to prevent
breakage in transit.
FOR WARRANTY RETURNS, please have the
following information available BEFORE
contacting OMEGA:
FOR NON-WARRANTY REPAIRS, consult OMEGA
for current repair charges. Have the following
information available BEFORE contacting OMEGA:
1. Purchase Order number under which the prod-
uct was PURCHASED,
1. Purchase Order number to cover the COST
of the repair,
2. Model and serial number of the product under
warranty, and
3. Repair instructions and/or specific problems
relative to the product.
2. Model and serial number of the product, and
3. Repair instructions and/or specific problems
relative to the product.
OMEGA’s policy is to make running changes, not model changes, whenever an improvement is possible. This affords our
customers the latest in technology and engineering.
OMEGA is a registered trademark of OMEGA ENGINEERING, INC.
© Copyright 2005 OMEGA ENGINEERING, INC. All rights reserved. This document may not be copied, photocopied, repro-
duced, translated, or reduced to any electronic medium or machine-readable form, in whole or in part, without the prior
written consent of OMEGA ENGINEERING, INC.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Where Do I Find Everything I Need for
Process Measurement and Control?
OMEGA…Of Course!
Shop online at omega.com
TEMPERATURE
Ⅺ
ߜ Ⅺ
ߜ Ⅺ
ߜ Ⅺ
ߜ Ⅺ
ߜ Thermocouple, RTD & Thermistor Probes, Connectors, Panels & Assemblies
Wire: Thermocouple, RTD & Thermistor
Calibrators & Ice Point References
Recorders, Controllers & Process Monitors
Infrared Pyrometers
PRESSURE, STRAIN AND FORCE
Ⅺ
ߜ Ⅺ
ߜ Ⅺ
ߜ Ⅺ
ߜ Transducers & Strain Gages
Load Cells & Pressure Gages
Displacement Transducers
Instrumentation & Accessories
FLOW/LEVEL
Ⅺ
ߜ Ⅺ
ߜ Ⅺ
ߜ Ⅺ
ߜ Rotameters, Gas Mass Flowmeters & Flow Computers
Air Velocity Indicators
Turbine/Paddlewheel Systems
Totalizers & Batch Controllers
pH/CONDUCTIVITY
Ⅺ
ߜ Ⅺ
ߜ Ⅺ
ߜ Ⅺ
ߜ pH Electrodes, Testers & Accessories
Benchtop/Laboratory Meters
Controllers, Calibrators, Simulators & Pumps
Industrial pH & Conductivity Equipment
DATA ACQUISITION
Ⅺ
ߜ Ⅺ
ߜ Ⅺ
ߜ Ⅺ
ߜ Ⅺ
ߜ Data Acquisition & Engineering Software
Communications-Based Acquisition Systems
Plug-in Cards for Apple, IBM & Compatibles
Datalogging Systems
Recorders, Printers & Plotters
HEATERS
Ⅺ
ߜ Ⅺ
ߜ Ⅺ
ߜ Ⅺ
ߜ Ⅺ
ߜ Heating Cable
Cartridge & Strip Heaters
Immersion & Band Heaters
Flexible Heaters
Laboratory Heaters
ENVIRONMENTAL
MONITORING AND CONTROL
Ⅺ
ߜ Ⅺ
ߜ Ⅺ
ߜ Ⅺ
ߜ Ⅺ
ߜ Ⅺ
ߜ Metering & Control Instrumentation
Refractometers
Pumps & Tubing
Air, Soil & Water Monitors
Industrial Water & Wastewater Treatment
pH, Conductivity & Dissolved Oxygen Instruments
M4231/0805
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|